This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

information in books and make it universally accessible.

https://books.google.com
War
1208
65
2
Wa

IVERI

TAS

HARVARD

COLLEGE

LIBRARY
申
3
醬
1865 .
1865 .
 C

M M

2
 0

RIFLE

AND

LIGHT INFANTRY TACTICS ;

"
FOR

THE EXERCISE AND MANEUVERS

OF

TROOPS WHEN ACTING AS LIGHT INFANTRY

OR RIFLEMEN.

COMPRISING
THE SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON AND COMPANY, RULES
FOR SKIRMISHING, SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION,
REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS AND A CON
DENSED SYSTEM OF CAMP AND
GARRISON REGULATIONS.

PREPARED EXPRESSLY FOR THE USE OF THE

MILITIA OF THE TERRITORY OF UTAH,
BY
COLONEL WM. B. PACE,
NAUVOO LEGION.

GREAT SALT LAKE CITY :

DESERET NEWS PRINT.
1865 .
War 1205.6572
4s 34530.5

HARVARD COLLEGE LIBRARY

JUL 1
CHARLES ELLIOTT PERKINS
MEMORIAL COLLECTION
 ADJUTANT GENERAL'S OFFICE, NAUVOO LEGION,
G. S. L. CITY, U,T., March 24th, 1865.

The Adjutant General's Department have care

fully examined the following system of RIFLE AND
LIGHT INFANTRY TACTICS, compiled by Colonel Wm.
B. Pace, and recommend the same for general use by
the Militia of the Territory.

H. B. CLAWSON,
Adjutant-General, Nauvoo Legion,
T. W. ELLERBECK,
Chief of Ordnance and Ass't. Adjutant-Gen. , N.L.
R. T. BURTON,
Col. 1st Cav. , and Ass't. Adjutant- Gen. , N.L.
D. J. Ross , f
Col. 3d Infantry , and Ass't. Adjutant-Gen., N.L.
 ERRATA:
Page 21, paragraph 126, read 1. Platoon. 2. Ready. 3.
Aim. 4. Fire. 5. Load.
Page 106, paragraph 78, third line, for ten read six and
in seventh line for eight read four.
Page 106, paragraph 79, third line, for ten read six.
Page 107, paragraph 81, seventh line, for ten read six.
Page 107, paragraph 91, sixth line, for ten read six.
Page 116, paragraph 160, third line, for adjutant read
lieutenant-colonel.
Page 117, first line, for adjutant read lieutenant-colonel.
Page 119, paragraph 190, third line, for "186" read "184."
Page 134, paragraph 308, eighth line, for" 308" read "305,"
Page 141, paragraph 367, fifth line for guide read marker.
Page 144, paragraph 389, third line, for adjutant read
lieutenant-colonel.
Page 153, paragraph 459, second line, for sergeant read
surgeon.
Page 155, paragraph 3, second line, after the word com
mission, read "and when of the same grade, corps
and date of commission then"
Page 156, paragraph 9, fourth line, for regulations read
restgnations.
Page 157, paragraph 29, fifth line, for lieutenant-colonel
read aide-de-camp.
 INDEX .

BASIS OF INSTRUCTION.
PAGE

83442
Formation of the regiment ...................………………………………………………….
Post of officers in line...
Post of officers in line of battle and in column..

)
Guides and markers..... …………………………

28384328
Instruction ofthe regiment …………………………

L222222
Instruction of officers-commands ………….. …………………………...
Definition of terms of formation …………………...
.
SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON. CP
First principles..... ………………………… ...……………………….
-

Principle ofthe direct step....

Principles of the double quick step..................
Manual of arms.. 11
The direct fire... 21
Oblique firing-to fire by file.
Cease firing- To fire and load, kneeling... 23
To fire and load, lying 24
Inspection ofarms 25
To mark time.. 26
To change step-To march backwards-Align
ments.... 27
To march to the front-The oblique march 29
To face about in marching.... 30
To march by the flank ……………………………………….............……………………………………………. 31
Wheelings
Turning- Wheeling and changing direction in
double quick time... 35
To break by sections to the left and form left into
line 36
To form on right into line-Front into line, and 37
right four deep.....
vi. INDEX .
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.

*==== * S
General principles-To form by platoon ... 39
Formation of the company . 40
Roll call ... 41
To fire by company...To fire by file 42
To fire by rank-To fire by the rear rank... 43
To advance in line..... 4-1
To mark time-To march in double quick time..... 46
To march in retreat 46
To march by a flank 47
To change direction by file 48
To march by a flank and form on right or left into
line 48
To march by a flank and form by company or pla
toon into line. 49
Marching in column by platoon, to march by a
flank in same direction.. 50
To break from a halt into column by platoons ..... 50
To march in column 51
Remarks on the march in column. 52
To change direction ... 53
To halt the column . 54
Diminishing and increasing ofa column 57
To march the column in route 58
Being in column by platoons to form right or left
into line....... 60
To stack arms and break ranks............ 61
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.
General principles.. 62
Deployments
SAANNNER

To deploy forward ..
To deploy by a flank
To extend intervals
To close intervals....
8888

To relieve a company of skirmishers...

To advance and retreat in line.
**

To march by a flank..
The firings
To fire marching..
The rally by groups and guard against cavalry.
The rally by platoons on reserve and by company 74
Reduce circle.
Rally on regiment::
The assembly .
To deploy a regiment as skirmishers... 76
To rally the regiment.... 79
Manual of the sabre 81
8888

Color salute 83
Instruction for chief of music.
 INDEX. vii.
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.
Manner of forming line................. 84
Fire by company 87
To pass from line into column. 88
To break by the right or left of companies, rear
into column.. 90
To advance or retire by the right or left of com
panies 91
To ploy the battalion into close column by com
panies 92
To march in column at full distance... 93
To change direction in column at full distance.... 94
To change directlon in column at half distance..... 95
To deploy column at half distance.......... 96
REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
Manner of forming line... 97
The fire by company, by regiment, by file and by
rank 101
To fire by rear rank. 102
Movements from line...... 102
To break to the rear into column. 104
To advance or retire by the right or left of com
panies 105
To ploy the regiment into column in mass 105
To march in column at full distance..... 110
Column in route... 113
Remarks on the column in route. 114
To change direction at full distance 115
To close the column to half distance 117
To close the column on tenth company. 118
To march in column at half distance or closed in
mass ... 120
To change direction at half distance or closed in
mass. 120
To change direction from a halt 121
Being closed to half distance or in mass, to take
distance 122
To take distance on rear company 123
To take distance on the head of column .. 124
To form battalions from columns in mass .. 125
To formi battalions from column at full distance 127
Το pass from a column at full distance into line..... 128
To pass from a column at full distance on right 129
into line.....
To form forward into line.... 181
To form line faced to the rear.. 135
To form line by two movements ... 136
To form left into line from column at halfdistance 137
viii . JADDa.
To deploy column closed in mass ******* 138
To advance in line 142
To halt the regiment and align it...... 143
To march in retreat in line..... 144
To halt the regiment in retreat and face it to the
front 145
Passage of obstacles 146
To change front forward. 147
To ploy into close column doubled on the centre.... 148
To deploy the double column 149
To form from double column on right into line. 150
Dispositions against cavalry to form square.. 150
To form oblique squares 153
The rally 154
REGULATIONS.
Procedure of corps..... 154
Rank and command. 155
Succession in command.. 155
Resignation ofofficers .... 156
Hours of service and roll calls.. 156
Morning reports- Forms ofparade 157
Dress parades .. 158
Guard mounting 160
Officers ofthe day and guard 164
Guards, their use and duty. 164
Review 168
Form ofguard report. 168
List ofguard, &c.. 169
List of prisoners. 170
Inspection 173
Escorts of honor. 174
Manner of issuing orders 175
Military districts . 175
District quartermaster. 176
Commissaries of subsistence 177
Calling the militia into service. 177
Arrests and confinements ........ 178
Courts martial ......... 179
Manner of sitting at a court martial. 180
Honors to be paid by the troops 182
Salutes 184
Funeral honors... 184
Order of encampment for infantry. 185
Muster rolls.. 186
Morning report.. 188
Muster roll of Company 189
Muster roll of battalion.. 190
Regimental return 191
Provision return ............ 192
RIFLE AND LIGHT INFANTRY TACTICS.

BASIS OF INSTRUCTIONS.

Composition andformation of a Regiment in line, and in

line ofBattle.
1. A regiment is composed of five battalions, and
will be distinguished by the denomination of first,
second, third, fourth and fifth battalions, formed on the
same line, and in the order of their numbers, with an
interval between each of four paces.
2. A regiment with a less number of battalions will
observe the same rule.
3. A battalion is composed of two companies, and
will be numbered from right to left, as first and second
companies in each battalion .
4. A company is composed of five platoons, num
bered from right to left. Companies in regiments will
be lettered by the regimental commandant as, A. B. C.
D., etc. , which letters will be preserved irrespective of
what particular place they may occupy when in line.
5. A platoon is composed of twelve men (one 2d
lieutenant, one sergeant and ten privates).
6. The centre platoon of the right centre company
will be constituted the color guard, and numbers three
and four of the front rank of this platoon, the color
bearers of the regiment; that company, with all on its
right, will be designated the right wing, and the com
panies on its left, the left wing of the regiment.
7. In all exercises or maneuvers every regiment or
part of a regiment, composed of two or more batta
lions, will be designated as a regiment.
8. The formation of the regiment is in two ranks,
with a distance between the ranks of sixteen inches,
measured from the breasts of the rear rank men to the
backs of the front rank men,
Post of Officers in Line.
9. The 2d lieutenants in the front rank, on the right
of their respective platoons, their sergeants covering
them; the men in each platoon will be numbered from
right to left, including officers and sergeants. A
viii. INDDA,
To deploy column closed in mass. 138
To advance in line 142
To halt the regiment and align it.... 143
To march in retreat in line... 144
To halt the regiment in retreat and face it to the
front .... 145
Passage of obstacles 146
To change front forward. 147
To ploy into close column doubled on the centre.... 148
To deploy the double column 149
To form from double column on right into line... 150
Dispositions against cavalry to form square...... 150
To form oblique squares 153
The rally 154
REGULATIONS.
Procedure of corps ...... 154
Rank and command ..... 155
Succession in command.. 155
Resignation ofofficers 156
Hours of service and roll calls.... 156
Morning reports-Forms of parade 157
Dress parades . 158
Guard mounting 160
Officers of the day and guard 164
Guards, their use and duty.. 164
Review 168
Form ofguard report..... 168
List ofguard, &c... 169
List of prisoners ... 170
Inspection 173
Escorts of honor. 174
Manner of issuing orders 175
Military districts .. 175
District quartermaster.. 176
Commissaries of subsistence 177
Calling the militia into service... 177
Arrests and confinements ... 178
Courts martial. 179
Manner of sitting at a court martial.. 180
Honors to be paid by the troops 182
Salutes ... 184
Funeral honors... 184
Order of encampment for infantry . 185
Muster rolls... 186
Morning report... 188
Muster roll ofCompany 189
Muster roll of battalion.. 190
Regimental return 191
Provision return ... 192
RIFLE AND LIGHT INFANTRY TACTICS .

BASIS OF INSTRUCTIONS.

Composition andformation of a Regiment in line, and in

line of Battle.
1. A regiment is composed of five battalions, and
will be distinguished by the denomination of first,
second, third, fourth and fifth battalions, formed on the
same line, and in the order of their numbers, with an
interval between each of four paces.
2. A regiment with a less number of battalions will
observe the same rule.
3. A battalion is composed of two companies, and
will be numbered from right to left, as first and second
companies in each battalion.
4. A company is composed of five platoons, num
bered from right to left. Companies in regiments will
be lettered by the regimental commandant as, A. B. C.
D., etc., which letters will be preserved irrespective of
what particular place they may occupy when in line.
5. A platoon is composed of twelve men (one 2d
lieutenant, one sergeant and ten privates).
6. The centre platoon of the right centre company
will be constituted the color guard, and numbers three
and four of the front rank of this platoon, the color
bearers of the regiment; that company, with all on its
right, will be designated the right wing, and the com
panies on its left, the left wing of the regiment.
7. In all exercises or maneuvers every regiment or
part of a regiment, composed of two or more batta
lions, will be designated as a regiment.
8. The formation of the regiment is in two ranks,
with a distance between the ranks of sixteen inches,
measured from the breasts of the rear rank men to the
backs of the front rank men,
Post of Officers in Line.
9. The 2d lieutenants in the front rank, on the right
of their respective platoons, their sergeants covering
them; the men in each platoon will be numbered from
right to left, including officers and sergeants. Α
2 BASIS OF INSTRUCTION.
10. The captain three paces in front of the right
centre of his company; the 1st lieutenant three paces
in front of the left centre of the company.
11. The majors of each battalion, six paces in front
of the centre of their respective battalions; battalion
adjutants three paces in front of the right guide ofh
battalion.
12. The colonel will take post twenty-five paces in
front of the centre of the regiment; the lieutenant
colonel twelve paces in front of the centre ofthe right
wing; the aid-de-camp twelve paces in front of the
centre of the left wing; the surgeon and other staff
officers thirty paces in rear of the centre of the regi
ment.
13. The music of the regiment will be drawn up in
three ranks, and posted fifteen paces in rear of the
centre platoon of right centre company, its chief
three paces in front of the centre of the music.
Post of Officers in line of Battle.
14. In passing from the order in line, to the order in
line ofbattle, the officers whose positions are in front,
will pass through the intervals to the rear, opposite to
their places in front, and at the same distance from
the line.
Post of Officers in Column right in Front.
15. The colonel twelve paces to the left, opposite the
centre of the regiment; the lieutenant colonel six
paces to the left and opposite the centre of the right
wing; the aid-de-camp six paces to the left and op
posite the centre of the left wing; the surgeon and
other staff officers fifteen paces to the right and oppo
site the centre of the regiment. In active service, oron
general parades, the colonel, lieutenant colonel and
aid-de-camp will be mounted.
16. In column by battalion, battalion and company
officers as in line.
17. In column by companies, the major will be three
paces to the left, opposite the centre of his battalions;
the battalion adjutant two paces to the right and
abreast with the front rank of leading company of his
respective battalion. Company officers as in line.
18. In column by platoon, the colonel, lieutenant
colonel, aid-de-camp, surgeon and battalion officers
as prescribed in Nos. 15 and 17; the captains two paces
to the left, abreast with the right centre of their com
panies; the 1st lieutenants two paces to the left,
abreast with the left centre oftheir companies.
19. The music, when the regiment is in column,
either by platoon, company or battalion, will habitu
 BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 3
ally hold themselves about six paces to the right, and
opposite the centre platoon of the right centre com
pany.
20. In a column left in front, the officers and music
will hold themselves upon the same flank, and at the
prescribed distance just laid down for a column right
in front.
Company Guides.
21. The lieutenant of the right platoon will be desig
nated the right guide of the company, and a serjeant,
or well instructed man will be selected by the captain,
and posted on the extreme left of the front rank, who
will, for the time being, be denominated left guide.
Battalion Guides.
22. The lieutenant, or right guide of the right com
pany, will be denominated the right guide of the bat
talion, and the left guide of the second or left com
pany, the left guide of the battalion .
Markers.
23. In breaking into column from line, or in the va
rious formations from column into line, the first lieu
tenants and battalion adjutants will mark the points
where the right or left of their companies or batta
lions will rest, when in column or in line.
Instruction of the Regiment.
24. Every commanding officer is responsible for the
instruction of his command, and will exact a similar
responsibility from subordinate officers; he will as
semble the officers together for theoretical and practi
cal instruction as often as the exigencies of the case
may require, and will vigilantly superintend their in
struction in person.
25. Majors will be responsible for the dicipline of
their battalions and in all separate battalion exercises
should be their instrutor; but when practicable, such
exercises will be under the observance of the colonel
or a field officer.
26. Captains will, in like manner, be responsible for
the instruction of their respective companies; and on
all individual company musters should be their in
structor, under the observance of the major or batta
lion adjutant.
27. In the school of the platoon, the chief of platoon
will be the instructor, under the direction of the cap
tain or first lieutenant.
28. Platoon drill being the basis of instruction of
companies, and on which the success of the battalion
and regiment depends, the greatest care will be taken
4 BASIS OF INSTRUCTION.
that the men are well established in this school , before
passing them into the school of the company.
29. Instructors will explain in a clear and precise
manner the movements to be executed, always useing
the same words to explain the same principles; they
will also often join example to precept, and keep up
the attention of the men by an animated tone, pas
sing rapidly from one movement to another, when
the last command has been satisfactorily executed.
Instruction of Officers.
30. The instruction of officers cannot be perfected
only by joining theory to practice; and every officer
from the colonel to the second lieutenant should be
able to command according to his rank, and to ex
plain and execute, or cause to be executed, all that is
prescribed in this system of drill, together with a
thorough knowledge of the bugle signals, and regula
tions prescribing their duties in camp and garrison.
Selection and Instruction of 2d Lieutenants and
Sergeants.
31. The discipline and efficiency of a company ma
terially depends upon the character and intelligence
of its second lieutenants and sergeants; their instruc
tion will include the "School of the platoon," "School
of the company," "Rules for skirmishing," all the
details of service and such regulations as prescribe
their duty in camp or garrison.
Commands.
32. There are three kinds of commands, viz.:-the
command of caution, which is attention; the prepara
tory command, which indicates the movement to be
executed, and the command of execution, such as
march or halt, or in the manual of arms that part of
the command which causes an execution.
33. The tone of command should be animated, dis
tinct and of a loudness proportioned to the number of
men under instruction.
34. The command of attention will be pronounced at
the top of the voice, dwelling upon the last syllable,
that of execution in a tone firm and brief.
35. The commands of caution and the preparatory
commands will be herein distinguished by italics;
those of execution by SMALL CAPITALS.
Definition of Certain Terms of Formation and
Maneuver.
36. A Rank- Is any number of men, side by side, in
line.
 BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. 5
37. A File-Is composed of two men, one behind the
other.
38. File-leader-Is a man of the front rank of a pla
toon or company, relatively to the one who is behind
him in the rear rank.
39. Front- Is the direction perpendicular to the
alignment of a corps, and before it, either in column
or in line.
40. Wings-Are the two grand divisions into which
any body of men may be divided when in line.
41. Flank-Is the right or left extremity of a line or
column.
42. Interval-Is the space between two battalions or
regiments when in line, and groups when skirmish
ing; the interval between battalions when in line will
be four paces, between regiments twelve places, and
between groups of skirmishers habitually twenty
paces.
43. Distance-Is the space from one division to
another in column, or between the ranks of a com
pany, either in line or column.
44. Depth-Is the space included between the head
and the rear of a column.
45. Alignment-Is the placing men in the same line,
elbow to elbow with each other.
46. Column- Is a line broken into several parts, each
part following exactly behind the other. There are
four kinds of column; column in route, column with dis
tance, column at half distance and column in mass.
47. Column in Route- Is formed of men by section or
platoon for convenience in marching from one post
or encampment to another.
48. Column with Distance- Is formed of platoons, com
panys or battalions, having between themthe dis
tance necessary to form line in every way.
49. Column at Half Distance- Is a column closed to a
distance of one half its front.
50. Column in Mass-Is a column closed up, until the
guides of each battalion or company, are only separa
ted by four paces.
51. Fixed Points or Points of Direction-Serve to point
out the direction in which a corps in line or in column
is to march, or to mark the right or left of a line.
52. Intermediate Points-Are those taken between the
fixed points and the guide, and are used to preserve
the desired direction during the march.
53. Guide of the Column-Is the man on one of the
flanks of the front rank of a column, who is charged
with the direction. The guide is habitually left when
the right is in front, and right when the left is in front.
54. Wheel-Is a circular movement; when a platoon
6 BASIS OF INSTRUCTION.
or company makes a wheel it turns upon one of its
fianks; each of the men composing it describes a circle
larger in proportion to his distance from the centre
point or pivot.
55. About Face-Is the half of a circle; right or left
face, is the fourth part of a circle, and right halfor left
halfface is the eighth part of a circle.
56. Pivot- Is the front rank man of the flank on
which the wheel is made; there are two kinds of
pivots, fixed and moveable: the pivot is fixed when
he turns upon himself, and moveable when he de
scribes a small arc of a circle.
57. Ployments-Is the movement by which a regi
ment forms from line into column.
58. Deployments-Is the movement by which a regi
ment forms from column into line.
59 The March by a Flank-Is that by which ground
is gained to the right or left after facing.
60. The Direct March- Is that which a company exe
cutes by moving off perpendicularly to its alignment.
61. Skirmishers-Are men dispersed in front, in rear,
or on the flanks of a corps to cover its movement or
its position .
62. Obstacle- Is anything in the nature ofthe ground
whichobliges a troop in line to ploy a part of its front.
63. A Defile- Is a passage which compels a line to
ploy into column, or a column to diminish its front.
64. Echelon- Is a line broken into several parts,
moving direct to the front or rear, each part habitu
ally holding itself at a distance equal to its front in
rear of the sub-division that preceded it, and march
ing opposite its place in line.
65. Oblique Echelon- Is a line broken into several
parts by wheel from line or column less than a
quarter circle, so as to be oblique to the former front.
66. Inversion-Is a line formed by companys or bat
talions not in their proper order, when the right is to
the left and the left to the right.

SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.

First Principles.
1. In this the first part which includes the first
Position, the facings, the march in common, quick and
double quick time, the men will be without arms.
2. The instructor will cause the men to form in one
rank at nearly one pace apart and faced to the front;
then placing himself five or six paces in front oftheir
centre, and facing to them will himself execute the
movements which he commands so as to join example
 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.
to precept and never require a movement to be exe
cuted until he has given an exact explanation of it.
First Position.
3. Heels on a line, and as close together as the con
formation of the man will permit, the feet turned out
equally and forming with each other something less
than a right angle, knees straight withont stiffness;
the body erect on the hips, the upper part inclining a
little forward; the shoulders square and falling
equally; arms hanging naturally, elbows near the
body, the palm ofthe hand turned a little to the front,"
the little finger behind the seam of the pantaloons,
the face well to the front, the chin a little drawn in
without constraint, and the eyes striking the ground
at the distance of fifteen paces.
4. The instructor having established the platoon in
the position of the soldier without arms will now
teach them the turning of the head and eyes. He
will command:
1. Eyes-RIGHT. 2. FRONT.
5. At the word right the men will turn their heads
gently to the right, so as to bring the inner corner of
the left eye in a line with the centre of the body, the
eyes fixed on the line of the eyes of the men in, or
supposed to be in the same rank.
6. At the second command the head will resume its
direct position to the front.
7. The movement of eyes-LEFT will be executed by
inverse means.
8. The instructor will take particular care that the
movement of the head does not derange the squar
ness of the shoulders, which will happen ifthe move
ments of the former be too sudden.
9. When the instructor shall wish the platoon to
pass from the state of attention to that of ease, he will
command:
Platoon-REST.
10. At the word rest, the men will carry the right
foot six inches in rear of the left heel, cross the hands
in front, the back of the hand outward, the right
hand uppermost, and stand at ease.
11. To resume the habitual position the instructor
will command:
1. Attention. 2. PLATOON.
12. At the first word the men will fix their atten
tion; at the second they will resume the prescribed
position and steadiness.
8 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.
Facings.
13. Facing to the right and left will be executed in
one time or pause. The instructor will command:
1. Platoon. 2. Right (or left) FACE.
14. At the second command raise the right foot
slightly, turn on the left heel, raising a little the left
toe, and face to the right (or left) at the same time
bring the right heel by the side of the left, and on the
same line, so that this new line of heels shall be ex
actly at right angles with their former line.
15. The full face to the rear (or front) will be execut
ed in two times, or pauses. The instructor will com
mand:
1. Platoon. 2. About-FACE.
16. (First time) at the word about, the men will turn
on the left heel, bring the left toe to the front, carry
the right foot to the rear, the hollow opposite to, and
full three inches from the left heel, the feet square to
each other.
17. (Second time) at the word face, the men will
turn on both heels, raise the toes a little, extend the
hams and face to the rear, bringing at the same time
the right heel by the side of the left.
Principles of the Direct Step.
18. The length of the direct step, or pace, in com
mon time will be twenty-eight inches, reckoning from
heel to heel, and in swiftness at the rate of ninety
steps in a minute.
19. The instructor seeing the men confirmed in their
position will explain to them the principles of this
step-placing himself eight or ten paces from, and
facing to the platoon. He will himselfexecute slowly
the step in the way of illustration, and then com
mand:
1. Platoon, Forward. 2. Common Time. 3. MARCH.
20. At the first command, the men will throw the
weight ofthe body on the right leg, without bending
the left knee.
21. At the third command they will step off smartly,
(but without a jerk) with the left foot, carry it straight
forward (the body moving at the same time) the sole
near the ground the thighs extended, the toes point
ed a little downward and slightly turned out, plant
the foot flat without shock twenty-eight inches from
the right. Next advance the right foot, and plant it
as above, the heel twenty-eight inches from the heel
 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON. 9
ofthe left foot, and thus continue to march without
turning the shoulders, and preserving always the face
direct to the front.
22. To arrest the march the instructor will com
mand:
1. Platoon. 2. HALT.
23. At the second command, which will be given at
the instant, when either foot is coming to the ground
stop short on the foot, then forward and bring up the
other by the side of it without shock.
24. The instructor will indicate to the men from
time to time, the cadence of the step, by giving the
command one, two, observing the cadence of ninety
steps a minute.
25. Common time will be employed only in the first
lessons ofthe school ofthe platoon. As soon as the men
have acquired steadiness , and have become established
in the principles ofshoulder arms, and in the mechan
ism, length and swiftness of the step in common
time, they will be practised only in quick time, dou
ble quick time, and the run.
26. The principles of the step in quick time are the
same as for common time, but its swiftness will be at
the rate of one hundred and ten steps per minute.
27. The instructor wishing the platoon to march in
quick time, will command:
1. Platoon, forward. 2. MARCH.
28. At the second command, the men will step off
with the left foot, in quick time, planting the feet
flat as indicated in No. 21.
Principles ofthe Double Quick Step.
29. The length of the double quick step is thirty
three inches, and its swiftness at the rate of one hun
dred and sixty-five steps per minute.
30. The instructor wishing to teach the men the
principle and mechanism of the double quick step,
will command:
1. Double quick step. 2. MARCH.
31. At the first command, the men will raise their
hands to a level with their hips, the hands closed, the
nails toward the body, the elbows to the rear and close
to the body without constraint.
32. At the second command, they will raise to the
front the left leg bent, giving the knee the greatest
elevation, the part of the leg between the knee and
instep vertical the toe depressed and inclining the
upper part of the body forward, they will then replace
10 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.
the foot in its former position, and with the right ex
ecute what has just been prescribed for the left, this
alternate movement ofthe legs will be continued un
til the command:
HALT.
33. At this command the men will bring the foot
that is raised by the side of the other, and drop at the
sametime the hands, resuming the first position.
34. The men being sufficiently established in the
principles of this step , the instructor will command:
1. Platoon, Forward. 2. Double Quick, 3. MARCH.
35. At the first command the man will throw the
weight of the body on the right leg.
36. At the second command, they will place their
arms as indicated in No. 31.
37. At the third command, they will carry forward
the left foot, the leg slightly bent, the knee somewhat
raised- will' plant their left feet, the toe first, thirty
three inches from the right, and
with the right feet execute what
has just been prescribed for the
left. This alternate movement of
the legs will take place by throw
ing the weight of the body forward
on the foot that is planted and by
allowing a natural oscillating mo
tion to the arms.
38. The double quick step may be
executed with different degrees of
swiftness. Under urgent circum
stances the cadence of this step
may be increased to one hundred
and eighty steps per minute.
39. The men should be exercised
in running, the principles are the
same as for the double quick steps.
The only difference consisting in a
greater degree of swiftness.
40. The instructor will not pass
the men into the manual of arms
until they are well established in
the position of the body, and in the
manner of marching the different
steps.
41. He will then form the men in
single rank, elbow to elbow, and
instruct them in the position of
shoulder arms, as follows:
Fig. 1. 42. (Fig. 1.) The piece in the right
 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON. 11
hand, the barrel to the rear, the thumb above and
forefinger under the guard, the other fingers closed
and embracing the swell of the stock just below the
hammer, the arm nearly straight, the left hand by the
side.
43. The instructor before passing to the next lesson
will cause to be repeated the movements of eyes right,
left and front, and the facings.
Manual of Arms.
44. The manual of arms will be taught first in one
rank elbow, to elbow, and afterwards in two ranks.
45. Each command will be executed in one time or
pause, but this time will be divided into motions, the
betterto make known the mechanism.
46. The manual of arms will be taught in the follow
ing progression: the instructor will command:
Slope- ARMS.
One time and one motion.
47. Bring the piece (by bending
the right arm) across the body, the
barrel resting in the joint of the
right elbow, and place at the same
time the left hand over the right.
Shoulder- ARMS.
One time and one motion.
48. Bring the piece quickly to the
right side into the position ofshoul
der arms, and drop the left hand by
the side.
Present-ARMS.
One time and two motions.
49. (Fig. 2. ) (1st) Bring the piece
erect before the centre of the body,
the rammer to the front, seize it at
the same time with the left hand,
between the lower band and guide
sight, the thumb extended on the
stock and the forearm resting
against the body.
50. (2d) Grasp the small ofthe stock
with the right hand below and
against the guard, the fingers joined
and extended downward, lower the
piece so as to bring the left hand and
elbow horizontal.
Fig. 2.
12 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.
Shoulder-ARMS.
One time and two motions.
51. (1st) Bring the piece to the right shoulder, at the
same time change the position of the right hands so
as to embrace the guard with the thumb and fore
finger, slip up the left hand to the hight of the shoul
der, the fingers joined and extended.
52. (2d) Drop the left hand by the side.
Secure-ARMS.
One time and three motions.
53. (Fig. 3) (1st) Bring the piece
with the right hand perpendicular
to the front, the barrel to the rear,
seize it at the same time with the
left hand at the lower band, raise
this hand as high as the chin, and
grasp the small of the stock with
the right hand.
54. (2d) Turn the piece with both
hands, the barrel to the front, and
place it opposite the left shoulder,
the butt against the hip, the left
hand at the lower band, the thumb
extended on the rammer, the piece
erect and detached from the shoul
der, the left elbow on the lock plate
and the right hand at the small of
the stock.
55. (3d) Pass the piece under the
left arm, drawing the left elbow
well back, the thumb on the ram
mer, the little finger resting against
the left hip, drop at the same time
the right hand by the side.
Shoulder-ARMS.
One time and three motions.
56. (1st) Raise the piece with the
left hand, seize it with the right
hand at the small of the stock, the
Fig. 3. piece erect and detached from the
shoulder, the butt against the hip, the left elbow on
the lock plate.
57. (2d) Carry the piece to the right shoulder with
both hands, change the grasp of the right hand as in
shoulder arms, and slip up the left to the hight ofthe
shoulder, the fingers extended.
58. (3d) Drop the left hand by the side.
 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON. 13
59. The piece being at a secure, the instructor will
cause the men to change hands by the command:
Right, Secure-ARMS.
One time and two motions.
60. (1st) Grasp the piece with the right hand at the
lower band and raise it vertical, at the same time seize
it with the left at the small of the stock.
61. (2d) With both hands carry the piece to the right
side, and reverse it under the right arm, the right
thumb on the rammer, and drop the left hand by the
side.
Shoulder ARMS.
One time and two motions.
62. (1st) Raise the piece perpendicular with the right
hand, and grasp it with the left above the lower band,
turn the barrel to the rear and embrace the guard
with the right hand as in shoulder arms.
63. (2d) Drop the left hand by the
side.
Right shoulder shift-ARMS.
One time and two motions.
64. (Fig. 4.) (1st) Grasp the piece
with the left hand at the lower
band and raise it as high as the
shoulder, turning the barrel to the
right, and place the right hand un
der the butt, the back of the hand
down.
65. (2d) Quit the piece with the
left hand, raise and place it on the
shoulder with the right hand until
the guard touches the breast, the
lock plate upwards.
Shoulder-ARMS.
One time and two motions.
66. (1st) Bring down the piece to
the full extent of the right arm,
and seize it with the left hand at
the lower band.
67. (2d) Embrace the guard with
the right hand as in shoulder
arms and drop the left by the side.
68. The piece being at right shoul
der shift arms the instructor will
Fig. 4.
 14 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.
cause the men to execute left shoulder shift arms by
the command:
Left shoulder shift-ARMS.
One time and two motions.
69. (1st) Bring up the left hand and grasp the piece
under the butt, the fingers downwards, slipping up
the right hand and grasp the small of the stock.
70. (2d) With both hands place the piece on the left
shoulder, the lock down, and drop the right hand.
Shoulder-ARMS.
One time and two motions.
71. (1st) Bring down the piece by extending the left
arm, seize it with the right hand at the small of the
stock, and at the same time with the left at the lower
band, the piece vertical.
72. (2d) With both hands carry the piece to the right
shoulder, embrace the guard as in shoulder arms and
drop the left hand.
Trail-ARMS.
One time and two motions.
73. (1st) With the left hand seize the piece at the
hight of the shoulder, lower the piece and grasp it
with the right between the lock and guide sight, the
barrel perpendicular.
74. (2d) Incline the muzzle forward and drop the left
hand by the side.
Left-TRAIL.
One time and one motion.
75. Elevate the muzzle and pass the piece into the
left hand, grasping it near the guide sight, carry the
piece to the left side and drop the right hand.
76. To resume the former trail the instructor com
mands: Right-TRAIL, which is executed according to
the same principles and by inverse means.
Shoulder-ARMS.
One time and two motions.
77. (1st) Raise the piece vertically with the right
hand to the hight of the breast, and opposite to the
shoulder, the elbow close to the body, seize it with
the left hand below the right, and drop quickly the
right hand and grasp the piece as in shoulder arms.
78. (2d) Drop the left hand by the side.
79. The men being at left trail, to shoulder arms the
instructor commands:
 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON. 15
Shoulder ARMS.
One time and two motions,
80. (1st) With the left hand carry the piece perpen
dicular to the right shoulder and embrace the guard
with the right hand, slip up the left to the hight of the
shoulder.
81. (2d) Drop the left hand by the side,
Order-ARMS .
One time and two motions.
82. (Fig. 5.) (1st) Seize the piece
with the left hand at the hight of
the shoulder, loosen the grasp of
the right hand , lower the piece and
re-seize it with the right hand near
the lower band, the barrel between
the thumb and forefinger in rear
of the barrel, the right hand sup
ported against the hip, the butt
¥

about four inches from the ground ,

83. (2d) Let the piece slip through
the right hand to the ground , drop
the left hand and take position
about to be described .
Position of order arms.
84. The hand low, the barrel be
tween the thumb and forefinger,
the other fingers extended and
joined, the rammer in front, the
muzzle about two inches in ad
vance of the left shoulder, the toe
(or beak) of the butt against and in
line with the toe of the right foot.
85, The men being at order arms,
and the instructor wishing to give
repose, will command:
Platoon- REST.
86. At the command rest, turn the
Fig. 5. piece on the heel of the butt, the
barrel to the left, the muzzle in front of the centre
of the body, seize the piece with the left hand just
above, and slip up the right to the upper band, carry
at the same time the right foot six inches to the rear,
the left knee slightly bent.
1. Attention 2. PLATOON.
87. At the second command the men will resume
the position of order arms.
 16 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.
Ground- ARMS.
One time and two motions.
88. (1st) Turn the piece with the right hand, the bar
rel to the left, advance the left foot about twenty in
ches, bend the body and the left knee, and lay the
piece on the ground.
89. (2d) Raise up, bring the heels together and drop
the hands.
Raise-ARMS.
One time and two motions.
90. (1st) Advance the left foot, bend the body and
left knee and raise the piece with the right hand.
91. (2d) Retake the position of order arms.
Shoulder-ARMS.
One time and two motions.
92. (1st) Raise the piece
vertically with the right
hand to the hight of the
right breast and opposite
the right shoulder, the el
bow close to the body, seize
the piece quickly with the
left hand just below the
right and drop the hand to
embrace the guard , press
the piece against the shoul
der with the left hand.
93. (2d) Drop the left hand.
Arms-PORT.
One time and one motion.
94. (Fig. 6) Throw the piece
diagonally across the body,
the lock to the front, seize it
smartly at the same time
with both hands, the right
at the small of the stock, the
left at the lower band, the
two thumbs pointing to
wards the muzzle , the bar
rel sloping upwards and
crossing opposite the point
of the left shoulder, the
palm of the right hand
Fig. 6. above, and the left hand un
der, the nails towards the
body, the elbows well closed.
 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.
17
Shoulder- ARMS,
One time and one motion.
95. Bring up the piece smartly, retake the position
of shoulder arms, and drop the left hand.
Guard against cavalry- GUARD,
On time and two motions. "
96. (Fig. 7)
(1st) Make a
rol half pace to
awe the right
turning on
both heels,
the feet
square to
84

16 Tw each other,
LE MAD at the same
GU time raise
the piece
slightly
with the
right hand,
and seize it
with the
OW left at the
tail band.
out Drdhaut) 97. (2d) car
demit nur ry the right
wreamed ,bint foot twenty
JAWOD Fulb inchestothe
rear, the
right heel on
the prolong
Twi Ul ation of the
thestars grou MONDO 20 left , the
dragona di Fig, 7. 21 J knees sligh
tly
weight of the body resting on both legs, lower the
bent, the
piece with both hands, the barrel upwards , seize the
piece at the same time at the small of the stock, with
the right hand, supported against the hip, the left el
bow against the body, the bayonet at the hight ofthe
eye.ro od 99 Arriang
nou Shoulder- ARMS. had odr
One time and two motions.
98. (1st) Bring up the piece with the left hand and
retake the position of shoulder arms, atthe sametime
bring the right heel by the side of theleft and face to
the front .
B
18 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.
99. (2d) Drop the left hand.
Load in nine times.
1. LOAD.
100. With the left hand seize the piece at the right
shoulder and place the butt on the ground by the left
side, slipping the hand up to the upper band, at
the same time quit the hold with the right hand and
carry it to the cartridge box.
2. Handle-CARTRIDGE.
101. (Fig. 8.) Seize a cartridge with
the thumb and next two fingers
and place it between the teeth.
3. Tear- CARTRIDGE.
102. Tear the paper down to the
powder, hold the cartridge upright
and place it in front of and near
the muzzle, the back of the hand
to the front.
4. Charge-CARTRIDGE.
103. Empty the powder into the
barrel, disengage the ball from the
paper with thethumb and first two
fingers ofthe left hand and insert
it in the bore, seize the head ofthe
rammer with the thumb and first
finger ofthe right hand , the fingers
closed, the elbows down.
.i£
TO! 5. Draw—RAMMER,
-NIFOLDI One time and two motions.
of 10
e It F 104. (1st) Half draw the rammer
dizik o by extending the right arm, steady
erlending it in this position with the thumb
eill TR ofthe left hand, reseize it with the
ellest Fig. 8. right near the muzzle, the little
finger uppermost, the nails to the front.
-105. (24) Clear the rammer from the pipes by again
extending the arm, turn the rammer, the little end
passing near the left shoulder and place the head on
the ball, the back of the hand to the front.
• 6. Ram- CARTRIDGE.
106. Insert the rammer with both hands, the right
hand uppermost, the back of the hands to the front,
press the ball home and reseize the piece with the lett
hand at the upper band.
 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON. 19
7. Return- RAMMER.
One time and two motions.
107. (1st) Draw the rammer half out and steady it in
this position with the left thumb, reseize it as indi
cated in No. 104. ·
108. (2d) Clear the rammer from the bore by ex
tending the right arm, turn the rammer and force it
in the tubes, pressing it down by placing the little
finger ofthe right hand on the head, the hand closed ,
Slip at the same time the left hand down the barrel
to the extent ofthe arm.
8. PRIME.
One time and two motions.
109. (1st) Raise the piece with the left hand to the
hight of the chin, and seize it with the right at the
small ofthe stock, half-face to the right and place the
hollow of the right foot against the left heel, the left
toe square to the front, bring the piece to the right
side, the butt below
the right forearm ,
an the small ofthe stock
Pilzs against theinches
body and
120 about two be
no low the right breast,
AT slip down the left
hand to the lower
band, the elbow
against the body, the
muzzle at the hight
of the eye.
110. (2d) Half cock
with the thumb of
the right hand, re
move the old cap,
Il take a cap from the
pouch and place it
pon the tube, let
the hammer down
on the tube with the
thumb and forefinger
ofthis hand and seize
550 or at Deofsit, or the small of the
at sesibai pusem tak stock.
9. Shoulder- ARMS.
dalw All
11W up111.quickly,
Bring the piece
atuba29 by geớt ndi ged the position ofretake
shoul
Fig. 9. der arms, and drop
the left hand.
20 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.
READY.
One time and two motions.
112. (Fig. 9) (1st) Retake the position of first motion
ofprime.
113. (2d) Raise the hammer with the thumb of the
right hand and seize the small ofthe stock.
AIM.
114. [Fig. 10]
Raise the piece
with both hands,
press the butt
against the right
shoulder, incline
the head upon
the butt so that
the right the eye
may observe
notch in the
guide sight and
the object aimed
at, the right
thumb extended
on the stock, the
forefinger on the
trigger
115. The rear
rank at the com
mand aim, will
each carry the
right foot about
eight inches to
the right towards
the left heel of
the man next on
his right.
116. After firing
Fig. 10. the men will re
main in that position until the command:
LOAD.
117. Bring down the piece with both hands, face to
the front, and take the position indicated in No. 100.
118. The instructor will cause the loading to be con
tinued by the command, and means indicated in No.
100 and following.
119. If after loading the instructor should wish to
continue the fire, he will give the command ready,
after that of prime, when the man will execute the
second motion of ready; if on the contrary he should
wish to cease firing, he will command:
 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON. 21
Shoulder-ARMS.
120. At this command throw up the piece, retake the
position of shoulder arms, and drop the left hand.
121. When at the position of aim, should the in
structor wish to accustom the men to wait for the
wordfire, he will command.
Recover- ARMS.
122. At this command, throw up the muzzle and re
take the position of ready, except that the muzzle will
be elevated, the barrel nearly vertical, the left hand
against the right breast.
123. The men being in the position of recover arms,
should the instructor wish to bring them to a shoul
der, he will command:
Shoulder-ARMS.
124. At this command place the right thumb on the
hammer and the forefinger on the trigger, let the
hammer down on the tube and take the position of
shoulder arms.
Firings,
125. The firings are either direct or oblique and will
be executed as follows:
The direct Fire.
126. The instructor will give the following com
mands:
1. Platoon, 2. Aim, 3. Fire, 4, Load,
127. These commands will all be executed as has
been prescribed in the manual of arms. At the second
command the men will come to the position of ready,
as heretofore explained . At the third they will aim
according to the rank in which he may find himself
placed, the rear rank inclining forward the upper
part ofthe body, in order that their pieces may reach
as much beyond the front rank as possible.
128. At the fifth command , they will load their
pieces, and return to the position of ready.
129. The instructor will recommence the firings by
the commands:
1. Platoon. 2. Ready. 3. Aim. 4. Fire, 5. Load.
139. To cease firing, the instructor will command:
Cease Firing.
131. Atthis command, the men will cease firing, load
their pieces ifunloaded, and bringthem to a shoulder.
 223

SCHOOL

OF
THE

PLATOON

,
Oblique Firings,
132. The oblique firings will be executed to the right
and left, and by the same commands as the direct
fire, with this difference, the word aim will always be
preceded by the caution ofright (or left) oblique.
Position ofthe two ranks in the oblique fire to the right.
133. At the command ready both ranks will execute
what has been prescribed for the direct fire.
134. At the caution right oblique, the two ranks will
throw back the right shoulder and look steadily at
the object to be hit.
135. At the command aim, each front rank man will
aim to the right without deranging the feet, each rear
rank man will advance his left foot about eight in
ches towards the right heel of the man next on the
left of his file leader, and aim through the in
terval to the right of his file leader, inclining the up
per part of the body forward and bending the left
knee.
Position ofthe two ranks in the obliquefire to the left.
136. At the caution left oblique, both ranks will throw
back the left shoulder, and look steadily to the left.
137. At the command aim, the front rank men will
aim to the left without deranging the feet, each rear
rank man will advance the right foot about eight in
ches towards the left heel ofthe man next on the right
of his file leader, and aim through the interval to the
left of his file leader.
138. In both cases at the command load, the men of
each rank will come to the position of load as pre
scr: bed in the direct fire, the rear rank men bringing
back the foot, which is to the front by the side of the
other, and load as ifisolated.
To fire by file.
139. The fire by file will be executed by the two
ranks, the files of each will fire successively, and
without regulating on each other , except for the first
fire. The instructor will command:
1. Fire byfile. 2. Platoon. 3. Ready . 4. Commencefiring.
140. At the third command both ranks will take the
position prescribed in the direct fire.
141. At the fourth, the file on the right will aim and
fire, the rear rank man in aiming will take the posi
tion prescribed in No. 115.
142. The second file will aim at the instant the first
brings down their pieces to reload, and will conform
 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON. 23
to what has been prescribed for the first file, and so
on from right to left.
143. After the first fire the front and rear rank men
will not be required to fire at the same time.
144. Each man after loading will return to the posi
tion of ready, and continue the fire without com
mand.
145. When the instructor wishes the firing to cease,
he will command:
Cease-FIRING.
146. At this command the men will cease firing; if
they have fired they will load their pieces, and bring
them to a shoulder; if at the position of ready, they will
half cock and shoulder arms; if at aim, they will
bring down their pieces, half cock and shoulder arms.
To Fire by Rank.
147. The fire by rank will be executed by each entire
rank, alternately.
148. The instructor will command:
1. Fire by Rank, 2. Platoon, 3, Ready, 4. Rear Rank,
5. Aim .
6. Fire, 7. LOAD.
149. At the third command the two ranks will take
the position of ready, as prescribed in the direct fire.
150. At the seventh command, the rear rank will
execute what has been prescribed in the direct fire,
and afterwards take the position of ready.
151. As soon as the instructor sees several men of
the rear rank in the position of ready, he will com
mand:
1. Front Rank. 2. Aim. 3. Fire, 4. LOAD.
152. At these commands the men in the front rank
will execute what has been prescribed for the rear
rank, but will not step off with the right foot.
153. The instructor will re-commence the firing by
the rear rank, and will thus continue alternately from
rank to rank, until he shall wish the firing to cease,
when he will command, cease firing, which will be
executed as heretofore explained.
To Fire and Load Kneeling.
154. In this exercise the platoon will be supposed
loaded, and drawn up in one rank, the instructor will
command:
24 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.
1. Platoon Kneeling. 2. Ready. 3. Aim. 4. Fire. 5. LOAD
155. (Fig 11.) At
the 2nd command,
carry briskly the
right foot about
thirty inches to
the rear of the left
heel, and about six
inchesto the right,
drop on the right
knee, sieze the
piece with the left
hand at the lower
band, and with
the right at the
small of the stock,
the left elbow
resting on the
thigh; bring the
right foot around
to the left, and
Fig. 11. seat themselves
comfortably on the right heel, in this position cock
the piece and grasp the small of the stock.
156. At the third command, raise the piece with the
right hand and support it with the left, near the lower
band, the left elbow resting on the left thigh near the
knee; bring the butt against the right shoulder and
aim as heretofore explained.
157. At the fifth command, bring the piece down on
the right side and support it with the left hand near
the muzzle, the butt to the rear, and resting on the
ground, barrel down, raise upon the right knee, carry
the right hand to the cartridge box, (or flask) handle
cartridge, charge cartridge, and draw rammer, to ram
cartridge, place the piece under the right arm, and ram
with both hands if necessary; return rammer, bring
the piece to the front with the left hand, and seize it
at the small of the stock with the right, turn the piece
barrel uppermost, the muzzle at the height of the eye,
the butt resting against the right thigh, half cock, re
move the old cap and prime.
158. To resume the former position the instructor
will command:
1. Shoulder. 2. ARMS.
159. At the second command, the men will raise to
their feet and take the position of shoulder armas,
To Fire and Load Lying.
160, In this exercise the platoon will be in one rank
 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON. 25
and deployed as skirmishers at not less than one pace
distance, with pieces loaded.
161. The instructor will command:
1. Platoon Lying. 2. Ready. 3. Aim. 4. FIRE. 5. Load.
162. At the second command, the men wiil bring
their pieces to an order, drop on both knees, and sup
porting the piece with the right hand, they will place
themselves flat upon their bellies with the aid of the
left; bring the piece down with the right hand, and
seize it with the left near the tail band, the right at
the small of the stock, the butt resting upon the
ground under the right arm, barrel nearly horizontal.
In this position, resting upon both elbows, heels to
gether, they will cock their pieces with the right hand
and seize them at the small of the stock.
163. At the command aim, raise the piece with the
right hand, drop the muzzle to the front, and resting
on both elbows, aim and fire.
164. At the command load, bring the piece down,
turn upon the left side, still resting upon the left el
bow, bring back the piece until the lock is opposite
the breast, the butt resting on the ground; handle and
tear cartridge, then seize the piece with the right
hand at the small of the stock, holding the cartridge
with the thumb and first two fingers; turn upon the
back, still holding the piece with both hands; carry
the piece to the rear, the barrel uppermost, place the
butt between the feet, muzzle elevated. In this posi
tion, load, then turn upon the left side, bring the
piece forward with both hands, rest upon the left el
bow, half cock, brush off the old cap and prime:
165. The instructor wishing the firing to cease will
command:
1. Shoulder. 2. ARMS.
166. At this command the men will execute what is
indicated in No. 159.
Inspection of arms.
167. The men being at order arms, should the in
structor wish to have an inspection of arms he will
command:
Inspection-ARMS.
168. At this command, seize the piece at the upper
band with the left hand and place the butt between
the feet, the barrel to the front, draw the rammer and
insert it in the bore, and resume the position of order
arms.
169. The instructor will inspect the piece of each
man, passing in front; each, when the instructor ar
rives opposite to and facing him, will raise his piece
26 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.
smartly with his right hand, seize it with the left
between the lock and guide sight, the lock to the front,
the left hand at the hight of the chin , the left arm ex
tended, the piece opposite the left eye, drop at the
same time the right hand by the side.
170. The instructor will take the piece with the right
hand at the small of the stock, throw it diagonally
across the body and seize it with the left at the lower
band; after inspection the piece, he will throw up the
muzzle with the left hand, the barrel to his left, and
with the right hand at the small ofthe stock return it
to the man, who will seize it with the right at the
lower band and resume order arms.
171. When the instructor shall have passed to the
third file on the left of the man already inspected, he
will retake the position prescribed at the command
inspection arms, return rammer, and resume the posi
tion of order arms.
172. On general inspections, where the inspecting offi
cer does not wish to examine the piece of each man
minutely, he will so inform the regimental comman
dant who will cause the men to execute what is pre
scribed in No. 167. Then as the inspecting officer ap
proaches the head of each company, the captain will
command shoulder-ARMS, then add arms-PORT.
173. When the instructor arrives opposite the right
file ofa company, the man will turn his piece show
ing both sides of the barrel, causing also the rammer
to ring in the bore at the same time, each man will
excute what has just been prescribed for the leading
file; after the inspector has passed each man will
execute what is prescribed in No. 170, by bringing the
piece down with both hands and place the butt be
tween the feet.
174. After the platoon is well established in the
manual of arms, the instructor will teach them to
mark time and to change step, which will be executed
in the following manner:
To mark time.
175. The platoon marching in the direct step, the
instructor will command:
1. Mark time. 2. March.
176. At the first command which will be given at
the instant either foot is coming to the ground, the
men will make a semblance of marching by advanc
ing first one foot and then the other, always bringing
back the advanced foot and placing its heel by the
side ofthe heel of the other.
177. To resume the direct step the instructor will
command:
 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON. ་ 27
1. Forward. 2. March.
178. At the second command, the men will step off
with the left foot first and retake the step of twenty
eight inches.
To change step.
179. The platoon being in march the instructor will
command:
1. Change step. 2. March.
180. At the second command which will be given at
the instant either foot is coming to the ground, bring
the foot that is in the rear, by the side of that which is
in front, and step off again with the foot that was in
front.
To march backwards.
181. The instructor wishing the platoon to march
backward will command:
1. Platoon backward. 2. March.
182. At the second command the men will step off
smartly with the left foot fourteen inches to the rear,
reckoning from heel to heel, and so on with the feet
in succession until the command halt, which will al
ways be preceded by the caution of platoon. The men
will halt at this command, and bring back the foot in
front by the side ofthe other.
183. This step will always be executed in quick time.
184. The instructor will next teach them the princi
ples of alignments; the touch of elbows in marching
to the front; the principles of the march by the flank;
wheeling from a halt; wheeling in marching and the
change of direction .
185. The instructor will place the men in one rank
faced to the front, and cause them to number offfrom
right to left; he will then post the 2d lieutenant on
the extreme right of the line, and the sergeant the
seventh man from the right. For single rank maneu
ver, the lieutenant and five men on his left, will be
designated the first section , and the sergeant and five
men on his left, the second section.
Alignments.
186. The instructor will at first teach the men to
align themselves man by man, in order the better to
make them understand the principles; he will cause
thefirst two files on the right flank to march two paces
to the front, and having aligned them, will command:
28 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.
1. Platoon, By File. 2. Right-DRESS.
187. At the second command the men will turn the
head and eyes as prescribed in No. 5, then, beginning
on the right, will march in quick time two paces for
ward, shortening the last step so as to find himself
about six inches behind the new line, which he should
never pass. He will next move up by short steps, of
two or three inches, to the side of the man next to
him on the alignments, so that without deranging
the head, the line of the shoulder or that of the eyes,
he may find himself in the exact line of his neighbor,
whose elbow he will touch without opening his own.
188. The instructor seeing the rank well aligned,
will add:
FRONT.
189. At this command the men will turn their eyes
to the front and remain firm .
190. Alignments to the left will be executed by in
verse means.
191. When the men have thus learned to align them
selves man by man, correctly and without jostling,
the instructor will cause the entire rank to align
itself at once, by the command:
Right (or left)-DRESS.
192. At this, the rank, except the two men placed
in the advance as a basis, will move up in quick time,
and place themselves on the new line, according to
the principles prescribed in No, 186,
193, The instructor placed five or six paces in front
and facing the rank, will carefully observe that the
principles are followed, and then pass quickly to the
flank, that has served as a basis to verify it; after see
ing the rank aligned, he will add:
FRONT.
194. Alignments to the rear will be executed on the
same principles, the men stepping back a little beyond
the line, and then dressing up, the instructor com
manding:
Right (or left) backward-DRESS.
195. The men having learned to march with steadi
ness in common time, and to take steps equal in
length and swiftness, will be exercised only in quick
time, double quick time and the run. The instructorwill
cause them to execute successively, at these different
gaits, the march to the front, the facing about in
marching, the march by the flank, the wheels at a
halt and in marching, and the changes of direction.
 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON. 29
196. The instructor will inform the men that at the
command march, they will always move off in quick
time, unless this command should be preceded by that
of double quick.
To March to the Front.
197. The rank being correctly aligned, when the in
structor shall wish to cause it to march to the front, he
will command:
1. Platoon, Forward, 2. Guide right (or left), 3. March,
198. At the word march, the rank will step off
smartly with the left foot; the guide will take care to
march straight to the front, keeping his shoulders
always in a square with that line.
199. The men in marching to the front, will touch
lightly the elbow towards the side of the guide, with
out opening out their own, always yielding to pressure
coming from the side of the guide, and resisting that
coming from the opposite side, maintaining the head
direct to the front, no matter on which side the guide
may be.
200. The men must be instructed to comprehend
that, the alignment can only be preserved in march
ing, by the regularity of the step, the touch of the
elbows, and the maintenance of the shoulders square
with the line of direction.
201. The men being well established in the princi
ples of the direct step or march, they will next be
taught to march obliquely; the rank being in march,
the instructor will command:
1. Right (or left) Oblique, 2. MARCH.
202. At the second command, each man will make a
half face to the right, (or left) and will then march
straight forward in the new direction; as the men no
longer touch elbows, they will glance along the shoul
ders of the nearest file towards the side which they
are obliqueing, and will regulate their step so that
their shoulders shall always be behind that of their
next neighbor on that side, and that his head con
ceals the heads of all the other men in that rank; be
sides this, the men will preserve the same length of
step and same degree of obliquity. To resume the
direct march the instructor will command:
FORWARD, Guide left (or right.)
203. At the word forward, each man will make ahalf
face to the left (or right,) and will then march to the
front, conforming to the principles of the direct
march.
30 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.
204. The instructor will pass the men from quick to
double quick time, and the reverse, observing not to
require them to march obliquely in double quick
time, till they are well established in this step.
205. The platoon being in march, in quick time, the
instructor will command:
1. Double Quick. 2. MARCH.
206. At the command march, which may be given
when either foot is coming to the ground, the men
will step off in double quick, observing the principles
prescribed, and preserve their alignment.
207. In marching in double quick time, the men will
always carry their pieces on the right shoulder, or at a
trail. Ifthe instructor shall wish the pieces carried at
a trail, he will give the command trail arms, before
that of double quick. Ifthe command is not given, the
men will shift their pieces to the right shoulder at the
command double quick; in either case at the com
mand quick time or halt, the men will bring their
pieces to the position of shoulder arms, without com
mand.
208. To resume quick time from that of double quick,
the instructor will command;
1. Quick Time. 2. MARCH.
209. At the word march, given when either foot is
coming to the ground, the men will retake the step in
quick time,
210. The instructor will occasionally cause the men
to mark time, by the command heretofore prescribed .
The men will mark double quick time, without alter
ing the cadence of the step.
211. The platoon being at a halt, the instructor will
cause it to march in double quick time, by the com
mand double quick march. He will also regulate the
step by the command one, two, given as each foot
should be brought to the ground."
212. Ifthe platoon be marching in quick or double
quick time, the instructor should wish to march in
retreat, he will command:
1. Platoon Right About. 2. MARCH.
213. the command march, which will be given
when the left foot is coming to the ground, the men
will bring this foot to the ground, and turning upon
the left heel will face to the rear; bring the right heel
bythe side of the left, and then step off with the left
to the rear.
 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON. 31
The March by the Flank.
214. The rank being at a halt and correctly aligned,
the instructor will command:
1. Platoon, Two Ranks, to the Right. 2. MARCH.
215. At the command march, the lieutenant and the
five men on his left will step one pace to the front,
halt and align themselves by the right; at the same
time the sergeant and five men on his left will face to
the right and step off smartly with the left foot, march
ing in rear of the first section . When the sergeant
arrives opposite to and directly in rear of the lieuten
ant, they will halt, face to the front and close on the
front rank, the sergeant covering accurately the
lieutenant, and No. 2. of the rear rank covering No. 2,
of the front rank, and so on from right to left.
216. The instructor seeing this movement executed,
will command:
1. Platoon Right (or left) Face, 2. Forward, 3. MARCH,
217. At the word face, the men will all face to the
right (or left;) the rear rank touching elbows with the
front rank, will present a column of two men abreast.
218. At the third command the men will step off at
once with the left foot, in quick time, the files keeping
aligned and preserving their intervals.
219. The instructor will cause the following rules to
be observed in marching by the flank:
That the step be executed according to the principles
for the direct step, and that the head of the man who im
mediatelyprecedes, covers the heads of all who are infront
in the same rank.
220. The instructor will habitually place himself
five or six paces on the flank of the rank marching in
file, to watch over the execution of the principles pre
scribed above. He will also place himself sometimes
in its rear; halt and suffer it to pass fifteen or twenty
paces, the better to see whether the men cover each
other accurately.
221. To halt the platoon marching by the flank and
face it to the front, the instructor will command:
1. Platoon. 2. Halt, 3. Front. 4. Right (or left)-DRESS.
222. Atthe second command the rank will halt, and
afterwards no man will stir, although he may have
lost his distance. This prohibition is necessary to
habituate the men to a constant preservation of their
distance.
223. At the fourth command the men will align
themselves, according to the principles heretofore
32 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.
prescribed, taking the touch of the elbow towards the
basis of alignment.
224. When the men have become accustomed to
marching by a flank, the instructor will cause them
to change direction by file, for this purpose he will
command:
1. File Left (or right), 2. MARCH.
225. At the command march, the first file will change
direction to the left, (or right) in describing a small
arc of a circle, and will then march straight forward;
the two men of this file in wheeling, will keep up the
touch of elbows, the man on the side to which the
wheel is made, will shorten the first three or four
steps. Each file will come successively to wheel on
the same spot where that which preceded it wheeled.
226. To cause the platoon to face by the right or left
flank in marching, the instructor will command:
1. Platoon to the Right (or left). 2. MARCH.
227. At the second command, which will be given a
little before either foot is coming to the ground, the
men will turn their body; plant the foot that is raised
in the new direction and step off with the other foot,
without altering the cadence ofthe step.
228. Ifin facing to the right (or left) in marching the
platoon should face to the rear, the rear rank men
will move square to the front, followed by the front
rank, at the prescribed distance.
229. The principles of the march by the flank in
double quick time, are the same as in quick time, the
instructor commanding: Platoon forward, doublequick
march. He will also pay the greatest attention to the
cadence of the step, by repeating the commands one,
two, etc., as each foot should be brought to the ground.
230. The instructor will cause the change of direction
and the march by the flank, to be executed in double
quick time, carrying the piece on the rightshoulder, or
at a trail.
231. The instructor may march the platoon by the
flank without doubling the rank, the principles are
the same.
232. To again reform the platoon in one rank, the
instructor will command: )),
1. Platoon, Single Rank, to the Left. 2. MARCH.
233. At the second command the front rank will
stand fast; the rear rank will face to the left and step
off in quick time. When its right file is uncovered,
the sergeant will command:
 33333
SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON,
1. Halt, 2. Front, 3. Right-DRESS.
234. At the first command the men will halt; at the
command front they will face to the right, and then
dress up on the front rank, as heretofore explained,
WHEELINGS- General Principles.
235. Wheelings are of two kinds; from the halt or on
a fixed pivot, and in march, or on a moveable pivot.
236. Wheeling on a fixed pivot takes place in passing
a corps from the order in line, to the order in column,
or from the latter to the former.
237. Wheels in marching take place in changes of
direction, as often as this movement is executed to the
side opposite to the guide.
238. In wheels from halt, the pivot man, at the
word march, will only turn in his place by marking
time, without advancing or receding, taking care to
keep his shoulders on a line with the marching flank.
239. In the wheels in marching, the pivot man takes
steps of nine or eleven inches, according as the
platoon is marching in quick or double quick time, so
as to clear the wheeling point before the next subdi
vision arrives on the same ground, which is necessary
in order that they may not lose their distance by
being delayed.
240. The men on the wheeling flank will take the
full step oftwenty-eight or thirty-three inches, accord
ing to the gait.
Wheelings from a Halt, or on a Fixed Pivot.
241. The platoon being at a halt, and in single rank,
the instructor will command:
1. Platoon Right Wheel. 2. MARCH.
242. At the command march, the platoon will step
off with the left foot, turning at the same time the
head a little to the left, the eyes fixed on the line of
the eyes of the men to their left; the pivot man will
merely mark time in gradually turning his body, in
order to conform to the movements of the marching
flank. The man who conducts this flank will take
steps of full twenty-eight inches, and from the first
step advance a little the left shoulder; cast his eyes
from time to time along the rank, and feel constantly
the elbow of the man next on his right lightly, but
never push him; the intermediate men will feel lightly
the elbow of the next man towards the pivot, resist
ing pressure coming from the opposite side, each con
forming himself to the marching flank, shortening
his step according to his approximation to the pivot.
с
34 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.
243. The instructor will cause the platoon to wheel
around the circle once or twice before halting, in order
to cause the principles to be better understood.
244. Wheels to the left will be executed on the same
principles, and by inverse means. To arrest the
wheel, the instructor will command:
1. HALT. 2. Left (or right)—DRESS.
245. At the second command, the rank will place
itself on the alignment of the two men established as
a basis, as heretorore prescribed. The instructor will
then add, FRONT.
Wheeling in Marching or on a Moveable Pivot.
246. When the men have been brought to execute
well the wheel from a halt, they will be taught to
wheel in marching .
247. To cause the rank to change direction to the re
verse flank, (to the side opposite to the guide) the in
structor will command:
1. Right (or left) Wheel. 2. MARCH.
248. The first command will be given when the
platoon is yet four paces from the wheeling point; at
the second command the wheel will be executed in
the same manner as from a halt, except that the
touch of elbow will remain towards the marching
flank, (or side of the guide) instead of the actual pivot;
that the pivot man, instead of merely turning in his
place, will conform himself to the movement of the
marching flank, feel lightly the elbow of the next
man, and take steps of full nine inches, thus gaining
ground forward in discribing a small curve, so as to
clear the point of the wheel, the middle of the rank
slightly bending to the rear. As soon as the move
ment commences, the man who conducts the march
ing flank will cast his eyes over the ground which he
will have to pass.
249. The wheel being ended, the instructor will com
mand:
1. Guide Left (or right. ) 2. FORWARD.
250. At the first command, the guide indicated will
take an object, and march straight to the front.
251. At the word forward, which will be given at
the instant the wheel is completed , the pivot man
and all the rank will take steps of full twenty-eight
inches; bring the head direct to the front, and take
the touch of elbows towards the guide.
 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON. 35
Turning or changing direction to the side of the guide,
252. The change of direction to the side of the guide
in marching, will be executed as follows. The in
structor will command:
1. Left (or right) Turn. 2. MARCH.
253. The first command will be given when the rank
is yet four paces from the turning point.
254. At the command march, which will be given at
the instant the rank ought to turn, the guide will face
to the left (or right) in marching, and move forward
in the new direction without slackening or quicken
ing the cadence, and without shortening or lengthen
ing the step. The whole rank will promptly conform
itself to the new direction; to effect which each man
will advance the shoulder opposite the guide, and
take the double quick step; turn the head and eyes to
the side of the guide, and retake the touch of the
elbow on that side, in placing himself on the align
ment of the guide, from whom he will take the step,
and then resume the direct position of the head; each
· man will thus successively arrive on the alignment.
255. The instructor will take great care to not con
found this movement with that of wheeling in march
ing.
Wheeling and changing direction to the side of the guide,
in double quick time,
256. The instructor will cause the various move
ments to be executed in double quick time; the prin
ciples are the same, except that the command double
quick will precede that of march. In wheeling while
marching, the pivot man will take steps of eleven
inches, and in the changes of direction to the side of
the guide, the man on the side opposite to the guide
must increase the gait, in order to bring themselves
into line.
257. The platoon being in one rank, should the in
structor wish to break into column by sections, he
will command:
1. Platoon, by Sections. 2. Right (or left) Wheel. 3. MARCH .
258. At the command march, the platoon will wheel
by sections to the right (or left;) the pivot man of each
section will merely mark time in his place, and come
around with the marching flank; the man on the
marching flank will take the full step of twenty
eight inches, and when he arrives near the perpen
dicular, the chief of each section (that is the officer or
sergeant) will command such section halt, left (or
36 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.
right) dress. The sections being properly aligned, the
instructor will command:
1. Column Forward. 2. Guide Left (or right. ) 3. MARCH.
259. At the command march, the men will step off to
gether in quick time, the guide of the rear section
marching directly in the train of the guide ofthe sec
tion in the advance, and the men all taking the touch
ofthe elbow towards the guide.
260. To change direction, the instructor will com
mand:
1. Change Direction to the Left (or right.) 2. MARCH.
261. The first command will be given when the first
section is about three or four paces from the wheeling
point. At the command march, given at the instant
that the first section should wheel, its chief will com
mand such sections left (or right) wheel, MARCH. The
wheel will be executed as heretofore explained for
the wheel in marching; the next section will come up
and wheel upon the same ground , its chief conform
ing to what has just been prescribed for the chief of
the first.
262. The platoon marching by files, right in front,
will break into column by sections, in the following
manner. The instructor will command:
1. By Sections, Break to the Left. 2. MARCH.
263. At this all the men of the first section will face
to the left, take the touch of elbows to the right, and
move off in the new direction.
264. The second section will continue to march in
the same direction , until it occupies the same ground
where the first broke to the left, when its chief will
give the same command as prescribed for the chief of
first, except that he will repeat the number of his own
section, the men conforming to what has been pre
scribed for the first section.
265. A platoon marching by files, left in front, will
break into column by sections to the right, upon the
same principles, substituting the command right for
left.
266. The platoon being in march by sections, right
in front, if the instructor wishes to form line to the
left, he will command:
1. Platoon Halt. 2. Left into Line Wheel. 3. MARCH.
267. At the first command the men will halt, the
chiefs of sections will instantly align their men; at
the third command each section will wheel left into
 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON. 87
line, each chief halting his section upon arriving near
the line and commanding right DRESS.
268. To form right into line from column ofsections,
the instructor will command:
1. On Right into Line. 2. MARCH.
269. At the command march, the first section will
turn right, and march three or four paces in the new
direction, when its chief will halt and align it by the
right.
270. The second section will continue to march
square to the front, passing in rear of the first section;
its chief will command: second section right turn, march,
which will be executed according to the principles
prescribed in No. 252, except that the men will not
take the double quick step. Each man arriving suc
cessively on the line, will halt and dress by the right,
and then resume their eyes direct to the front.
271. To form front into line from column, the in
structor will command:
1 Front into Line. 2. MARCH.
272. At the second command, the first section will
move three paces forward, and by command of its
chief will halt.
273. The second section, at the command march,
will by command of its chief oblique to the left, and
as soon as its front is unmasked, its chief will com
mand forward, halt, right dress, which will be executed
as heretofore explained, taking care to halt his section
in rear of the line, and then dressing up by short steps
of two or three inches.
274. The platoon being in two ranks, face to the
front and at a halt, should the instructor wish to form
column by fours, he will command:
1. Right, four deep. 2. MARCH.
275. At the first command , the rear rank will step
one pace to the rear.
276. At the word march, both ranks will face to the
right; the odd numbers of both ranks (including offi
cers and sergeants will stand fast, the even numbers
will promptly place themselves on the right ofthe
odd numbers, by a side step to the right, with the
right foot, and one step forward with the left, so that
when the movement is completed they will present a
column of four men abreast.
277. The column may then be put in march by the
command:
38 SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON.
1. Columnforward. 2. Guide left (or right). 3. MARCH.
278. At the word march, the men will step off smart
ly with the left foot, the fours keeping aligned and
preserving their intervals.
279. The change of direction in column four deep,
will be executed by the same commands, and accord
ing to the principles prescribed in No. 248, and fol
lowing, except that the chief of platoon only, will give
the caution left (or right) wheel, at the first command;
at the word march, the leading four will execute the
wheel, followed by the remaining fours of his platoon
wheeling upon the same ground.
280. When the instructor shall wish to halt the col
umn marching by fours, he will command:
1. Column. 2. HALT. 3. FRONT. 4. Right (or left) DRESS.
281. At the second command, the platoon will halt,
and afterwards no man will stir although he may
have lost his distance.
282. At the command front, the platoon will face to
the front, the fo irs will undouble by the even num
ber's promptly placing themselves on the left of the
odd numbers, by a side step to the left with the left
foot and one step forward with the right, the rear
rank closing on the front to its proper distance.
283. Atthe fourth command , each rank will align it
selfby the right (or left) as heretofore explained.
284. To form left four deep, the instructor will give
the same commands, substituting left for right; the
principles are the same, except, that the even num
bers stand fast, and the odd numbers place themselves
on their right; the rear rank stepping to the rear at
the caution of four deep.
285. To halt the column left in front, and face it to
the front, the instructor will give the same com
mands as in No. 279; the men after facing to the front
will execute what is prescribed in No. 281.
286. If in march and in column four deep right (or
left) in front, the command should be given platoon
left (or right) so as to face to their proper front; at the
word march, the platoon will face to the front, and
the ranks will undouble as indicated in No. 281, and
continue the march in two ranks, the rear rank
lengthening the step so as to gain its proper distance.
287. Should the platoon be marching by either flank
at four deep, and by facing right or left they should
face to the rear, the ranks will undouble in like man
ner, except the odd numbers will promptly place
themselves on the left ofthe even numbers, and the
front rank close on the rear.
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 39
288. From either of the above positions, four deep
may be again re-formed on the march by the com
mands and principles prescribed for forming at a
halt.

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.

General Principles.
1. The company being assembled upon its own pa
rade ground will by a signal from the first Lieutenant
(which should be given about fifteen minutes before
the time of forming company) form by platoon, and
in order ofhight from right to left conforming to the
following principles:
2. The officers in charge of platoons by the com
mand such platoon fall in, will cause the men to form
in one rank upon their own ground face to the front,
and at shoulder arms, the tallest men on the right,
then placing themselves before the centre of their
platoons will cause the men to count fives, post the
sergeant on the right of the second five; and com
mand:
1. Platoon. 2. Two ranks to the right. 3. MARCH.
3. This will be executed as prescribed in the school
of the Platoon No. 214 and following. He will next
command:
1. Platoon. 2. To the rear, open order. 3. MARCH.
4. At the second command the sergeant will step off
smartly to the rear four paces from the front rank, in
order to mark the alignment of the rear rank. At
the the third command, the front rank will stand
fast. The rear rank will step to the rear without
counting steps and place themselves upon the align
ment marked for this rank, conforming to what is
prescribed in the school of the platoon, No. 191. The
sergeant will align this rank to the left and parallel to
the front rank. The lieutenant will next add:
1. Order-ARMS. 2. Inspection—ARMS.
5. Atthe second command, they will take the posi
tion of inspection, as prescribed in the school of the
platoon.
6. The lieutenant will then proceed to inspect the
front rank, and the sergeant the rear rank, accord
ing to the principles heretofore explained . This being
executed he will command;
40 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.
1. Shoulder- ARMS. 2. Rear rank close order. 3. MARCH.
7. At the command march the rear rank will close
on the front rank to the prescribed distance; he will
then command:
1. Order- ARMS. 2. REST.
8. At the second command, the men will take the
position of rest, as indicated in the school of platoon.
The lieutenant placing himself on the right, will
await further orders.
Formation ofthe company.
9. The 1st lieutenant after selecting the ground
where the company is to form, will post the company
music in one rank on the line, and face to the front,
he will then place himself on the line about where the
left of the company will rest when formed; and facing
the music will bring his sabre to a carry, as herein
after provided .
10. The 1st lieutenant having taken this position
the music will play quick time unless previously in
structed to play double quick, and the 2d lieutenants
will form their respective platoons on the line in the
following manner:
11. The chief of the platoon that is to take the right
ofthe company will step to the front of his platoon
(the sergeant moving into the front rank and filling
his place for the time) and command:
1. Such platoon. 2. Shoulder-ARMS. 3. Right-FACE.
4. Forward. 5. MARCH.
12. He will then place himself on left of the ser
geant, who will still remain in the front rank and
direct his march on the music, on arriving on the left
and about two paces from the music, he will com
mand:
1. HALT. 2. FRONT.
13. After facing to the front the sergeant will move
upon the alignment and be corrected in his position
by the 1st lieutenant, who still remains at his post.
The lieutenant will then command: Right-DRESS,
which being executed he will add: 1. FRONT. 2. Order
ARMS. 3. REST, and take his place on the right ofthe
front rank, the sergeant stepping back to the right of
the rear rank .
14. The chief of the other platoons will conform to
what has just been prescribed for the first, except that
they will close on the platoon already formed, and
after placing themselves on the alignment will bring
their men to order arms, and rest; then take their
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 41
places in line, each platoon moving out according to
number or precedence will so arrive as to form the
line consecutively without delay.
15. The company being formed the 1st lieutenant
will correct the alignment, pass along the front to
the centre, face to the left and march three paces,
where he will again face the company, and command:
Attention to roll call.
16. At this command the men will still remain at
the position of rest, but will preserve silence and an
swer as their names are called by the 1st lieutenant;
this being executed he will command:
1. Attention company. 2. Shoulder arms. 3. To the rear,
open order.
17. At the first command the men will resume the
position of order arms. At the third the sergeant on
the right of the rear rank and the left file will step off
smartly to the rear four paces, judging the distance
by the eye without counting steps, the lieutenant
will observe that the two markers are on a line para
llel to the front rank, then add:
.
4. MARCH.
18. At this command the front rank will stand fast,
the rear rank will step to the rear and place them
selves on the alignment, conforming to what is pre
scribed in school of platoon No. 194.
19. The 1st lieutenant seeing the ranks aligned will
command:
Present-ARMS.
20. Seeing this executed he will face about to the
captain, who is six paces in front, salute and report
"the company is formed." The 1st lieutenant will then
on intimation from the captain, take post in front of
the left centre of the company.
21. The captain having acknowledged the salute of
the company by touching his hat will, after the 1st
lieutenant has taken his post draw his sabre and com
mand:
Shoulder-ARMS.
22. In active service, the company will be formed at
once by command of the 1st lieutenant, when the
men will form in two ranks at shoulder arms faced to
the front; in this case care should be taken to cause
both officers and men to occupy their relative places
in the company.
23. The company being formed in this manner the
1st lieutenant after correcting the alignment will
42 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.
command: order arms, rest; then call the company
roll or attend to such other duties as may be required.
24. In the following exercises the captain will be
charged with the instruction of the company and will
herein be denominated the instructor.
25. Before closing the ranks the instructor may
cause the company to be exercised in the manual of
arms.
26. To close ranks the instructor will command:
1. Rear rank. 2. Close order. 3. MARCH.
27. At the command march the rear rank will close
on the front and each man cover his file leader.
To fire by company.
28. To cause the fire by company to be executed the
instructor will command:
1. Company. 2. READY. 3. AIM. 4. FIRE. 5. LOAD.
29. At the second command the instructor and 1st
lieutenant will promptly take post as in line of bat
tle. At the fifth command the men will load at will
and then retake the position of ready.
30. The instructor will immediately recommence
the firing by the command:
1. Company 2. AIM. 3. FIRE. 4. LOAD.
31. The firing will be thus continued until the com
mand or signal to cease firing is given or sounded .
32. The instructor will sometimes cause aim to be
taken to the right and left, observing to pronounce
right (or left) oblique before that of aim, which will be
executed according to the principles of oblique firing.
Thefirebyfile.
33. The instructor to cause the fire by file will com
mand:
1. Fire byfile. 2. Company. 3. READY. 4. Commence firing.
34. The third and fourth commands will be execut
ed as prescribed in school of the platoon No. 140 and
following.
35. The firing will be commenced by the right file of
the company, the next file will aim at the instant the
first brings down their pieces to reload, and so on
from right to left.
36. This rule will only be observed in the first dis
charge, after which each file will reload and fire with
out regulating themselves by others, conforming to
what is prescribed in school of platoon, No. 144.
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 43
To Fire by Rank.
37. The instructor wishing to cause the fire by rank
to be executed will command:
1. Fire by Rank. 2. Company. 3. READY. 4. Rear Rank.
AIM. 5. FIRE. 6. LOAD.
38. The fifth and sixth commands will be executed
as prescribed in the school of platoon , No. 149 and fol
lowing.
39. The instructor seeing one or two pieces in the
rear rank at a ready he will command:
1. Front Rank. 2. AIM. 3. FIRE. 4. LOAD.
40. The firing will thus be continued by each rank
alternately until the command or signal to cease fir
ing is given or sounded.
41. The instructor will cause the firing to cease
whether by company, by file or by rank, by sounding
the signal to cease firing and at the instant this sound
ceases the men will cease firing and conform to what
is prescribed in the school of platoon , No. 146.
42. In this school except when powder is used the
signal will be indicated by the command cease firing
which will be pronounced by the instructor when he
wishes the semblance of firing to cease.
43. The fire by file being that which is most fre
quently used against an enemy it is highly import
ant that it be rendered perfectly familiar to the inen.
The instructor will, therefore labor to cause the men
to aim with care and always at some particular object.
To Fire bythe Rear Rank.
44. The instructor will cause the several fires to be
executed by the rear rank, that is, to the rear. To ef
fect this he will command:
1. Company. 2. About-FACE.
45. At the second command the company will face
about. The instructor will move to where his servi
ces are most needed . The lieutenant will correct the
alignment and then resume his position in line in
rear ofthe left centre of the company, which has now
become the right.
46. The instructor will cause to be executed the fire
by company both direct and oblique, the fire by file
and the fire by rank by the commands and means
prescribed in the preceding sections.
47. The fire by file will commence on the left ofthe
company now become the right. In the fire by rank
the firing will commence with the front rank now
become the rear.
44 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.
48. The fire by company, by rank or by file may be
executed with the front rank kneeling by simply ob
serving to pronounce: front rank kneeling, before the
command ready. In this case the front rank will
continue to fire and load kneeling, by the commands
already given for the fire by company, by file or by
rank, until the signal to cease firing is sounded,
when they will rise and bring their pieces to a shoul
der, and resume their places in line.
49. To resume the proper front the instructor will
command:
1. Company. 2. About-FACE.
50. In the preceding lessons the instructor will im
press on the men the importance of always aiming at
some particular object. He will also take care to
make a short pause between the commands aim and
fire to give the men time to aim with accuracy.
51. The instructor will recommend to the company
in the different firings the highest degree of compo
sure or presence of mind, he will neglect nothing
that will contribute to this end.
To Advance in Line
52. The company being in line and the instructor
wishing to exercise it by the front he will assure him
self that the shoulders of the right guide and ser
geant are perfectly in the direction of their respective
ranks, and that the sergeant accurately covers the
guide. He will then place himself twenty-five or
thirty paces in front of them, face to the rear, and
place himself exactly on the prolongation of the line
passing between their heels; having assured himself
on this line he will command:
1. Company- Forward.
53. At this command the right guide will take two
points on the ground in the straight line which would
pass between his own and the heels of the instructor.
These dispositions being made, the instructor will
add:
2. MARCH.
54. At this command the company will step off with
life. The directing guide will observe with the great
est precision the length and cadence of the step,
marching on the two points he has chosen, taking in
succession , and always a little before arriving at the
point nearest to him, new points in the advance, ex
actly in the same line with the first two, and at the
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 45
distance of some fifteen or twenty paces from each
other.
55. The man next to the guide will take special care
not to pass him. To this end he will keep his shoul
ders square and in line with those of the directing
guide; and thus from right to left, the men preserving
the head direct to the front, and keeping up the touch
of the elbow lightly toward the guide.
56. The instructor, with a view to establish the men
in the length and cadence ofthe step, and in the prin
ciples of the march in line, will cause the company to
advance two or three hundred paces at nce, without
halting, if the ground will permit.
To halt the company marching in line and to align it.
1. Company. 2. HALT.
57. At the second command the company will halt.
The lieutenant rectifies the alignment.
Oblique march in line.
58. The company being in the direct march, the in
structor will command:
1. Right (or left) Oblique, 2. MARCH.
59. At the command march, the company will take
the oblique step, observing the principles prescribed
in the school of the platoon, No. 202. The rear rank
men will preserve their distances, and march in rear
of the man next on the right (or left) of their habitual
file leaders. To resume the direct march, the in
structor will command:
FORWARD.
60. At this command the company will resume the
direct march; the instructor will move twenty or
thirty paces in front of the directing guide, and will
place himself facing the company, exactly in the pro
longation of the guide and sergeant. The guide, on
intimation, will then select two points, etc., as here
61. Inexplained.
tofore the oblique march, the men not having the
touch of the elbows, the guide will always be on the
side towards which the oblique is made, without in
dication to that effect being given, and when the
direct march is resumed, the guide will, without indi
cation, be on the side where it was previous to the
oblique. Whenever the men lose the alignment, the
instructor will be careful that they regain it by length
ening or shortening the step, without altering the
cadence or changing the direction.
46 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY,
To mark time, to march in double quick time and the
back step.
62. The company being on the direct march and in
quick time, he will command:
1. Mark Time. 2. MARCH.
63. This will be executed as prescribed in the school
of platoon, No. 176. To resume the direct march:
1. Company Forward. 2. MARCH.
61. To cause the march in double quick time, the in
structor will command:
1. Company. 2. Double Quick. 3. MARCH,
65. The command march will be given at the instant
either foot is coming to the ground. To resume the
march in quick time, he will command:
1. Company. 2. Quick Time. 3. MARCH.
66. The company being at a halt, the instructor may
cause it to march in the back step, by the command:
1. Company Backward. 2. MARCH.
67. The back step will be executed according to the
principles laid down in the school of platoon, No, 182,
But the use of this step being rare, the instructor will
not cause more than ten or fifteen steps to be taken in
succession.
68. The instructor will not exercise the company in
marching in double quick time, till the men are well
established in the length and swiftness of the pace in
quick time; he will then endeavor to render the
march of one hundred and sixty-five paces per
minute, equally, easy and familiar, observing the
same erectness of body and composure of mind as in
quick time.
69. When marching in double quick time, if a sub
division (in column) has to change direction by turn
ing, or has to form line, the men will quicken the
pace to one hundred and eighty steps per minute.
The same swiftness of step will be observed under all
circumstances, when great rapidity of movement is
required.
To march in retreat.
70. The company being halted and correctly aligned,
when the instructor shall wish to march in retreat, he
will command:
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 47
1. Company. 2. About-FACE.
71. The company having faced about, the instructor
will place himself in front of the directing guide, con
forming to what is prescribed in No. 52, and add:
3. Company Forward.
72. At this command the directing guide will pass
quickly into the rear rank, now become the front,
and will conform to what is indicated in No. 52, and
following, the instructor will then add:
4. MARCH.
73. This march will be conducted on the same prin
ciples as the advance in line.
74. The instructor will cause to be executed , march
ing in retreat, all that has been prescribed for ad
vance.
75. The instructor having halted, the company will,
when he wishes, face to the front, by the command
prescribed in No. 49.
76. The company being in march by the front rank,
the instructor will cause the right about to be executed
by the command:
1. Company. 2. Right About. 3. MARCH .
77. At the third command the company will
promptly face about, and recommence the march by
the rear rank,
78. To resume the march by the front rank, the in
structor will give the same command , and regulate
the march by the same means.
79. In marching in double quick time, the distance
between the ranks will be thirty-three inches; the
pieces will be habitually carried on the right shoulder.
80. Whenever the company is halted, the men will
bring the pieces to a shoulder at the command HALT,
and the rear rank will close to its proper distance.
81. When the pieces are carried on the right shoulder
in quick time, the distance between the ranks will be
twenty-six inches. Whenever the instructor brings
the company from a shoulder to this position, the.
rear rank must shorten a little the first steps to gain
the prescribed distance, and will lengthen the steps
onthe contrary, in order to close up when the pieces
are brought to a shoulder.
82. In all cases where the pieces are carried at the
right shoulder or at the trail, they will be brought to a
shoulder at the command halt.
To march by the flank.
83. The company being in line and at a halt, to cause
48 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY .
it to march by the right flank, the instructor will
command:
1. Company Right-FACE 2. Forward. 3. MARCH.
84. At the first command the company will face to
the right; at the command march the company will
step of sinartly in quick time; the lieutenant and
sergeant will direct their march straight forward, the
men of the rear rank marching abreast of their res
pective front rank men, and touching elbows on that
side, all observing the principles laid down in the
school of platoon, No. 218.
85. The march by the left flank will be executed by
the same commands, substituting left for right.
To change direction by file.
86. The company being faced by a flank, and either
at a halt or on the march, to cause it to change direc
tion, the instructor will command:
1. File left (or right.) 2. MARCH.
87. At the command march, the first file will wheel;
if to the left or side of the front rank man, he will
take care not to turn at once, but to describe a small
are ofa circle, shortening a little the first two or three
steps, to give the rear rank man time to conform to
the movement. Ifthe wheel be to the side of the rear
rank man, he will conform himself to the movement
laid down for the front rank man. Each file will
wheel on the same ground where that which preceed
ed it wheeled.
88. The instructor will see that the wheel be execu
ed according to these principals, in order that the
distance between the files may be preserved, and that
there be no check or hindrance at the wheeling
point.
To halt the company marching by a flank andface it to the
front.
1. Company. 2. HALT. 3. FRONT.
89. At the third command the company faces to the
left ifmarching by the right flank, and to the right, if
marching by left. As soon as the company has faced,
the lieutenant will move briskly to where the march
ing flank has halted , establish a basis, and command:
1: Right (or left)-DRESS . 2. FRONT, and then resume
his place in line.
Marching by a flank to form on right (or left) byfile into
line.
90. If the company be marching by the right flank
the instructor will command:
Cal
Fig. 1 . P. 49 Fig. 2. P 50

SI
||||||

NII

NII

ˋˋ

NII,
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANÝ. 49
(Fig. 1.) 1. On right into line. 2. MARCH.
91. At the first command, the lieutenant will pass
quickly to the point where the right of the company
is to rest, to mark the alignment, and place himself
facing the direction the company is marching, will
bring his sabre to a present, and remain in this posi
tion until the company has formed, when he will cor
rect the alignment, and resume his place in line.
92. At the command march, given the instant the
right guide is abreast with the adjutant, the rear rank
will mark time; the guide will turn to the right and
place himselfon the line,his right arm touching lightly
the left breast ofthe lieutenant, the first front rank
man will pass the ground where the guide turned, and
then turn to the right and place himselfby the left
side of the guide, the next front rank man will pass
in rear ofthe first, turn to the right and place himself
on the left of the first, and thus in succession from
right to left, the rear rank will mark time, until the
guide and two men on his left of the front rank has
formed on the line, when they will turn to the right
in succession, conforming to what is prescribed for
the front rank, each directing himself on his file lead
er.
93. If the company be marching by the left flank,
the instructor will cause it to form, on left into line, on
the same principles, substituting in the command
left for right. In either case the instructor will cause
the lieutenant to so select the ground that the m
may have at least six paces to march after turning.
Marching by a flank, to form by company or platoon into
line.
94. The company being in march by the right flank,
will form line, by the command:
1. By company into line. 2. MARCH.
95. At the command march the guide will continue
to move straight forward, the men will advance the
right shoulder and take the double quick step, and
move up into line by the shortest route; as they suc
cessively arrive on the line with the guide, they will
take the step from him, and then turn their eyes to
the front.
96. The men of the rear rank will conform to the .
movements ofth respective file leaders.
97. At the instant the movement commences, the
lieutenant will briskly move up and keep on a line
with the shoulders of the right guide, and outside the
ground, the left of the company will occupy when
formed, in order to prevent the men from passing the
perpendicular. D
50 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.
98. As soon as the company is formed the instruc
tor will command guide left, when the left guide will
promptly select objects on the point of direction, by
the afd of the 1st lieutenant, as hereto explained , the
whole moving forward touching elbows to the left.
99. This movement will be executed while march
ing by the left flank, by the same commands, and by
inverse means. The company being formed the in
structor will command:
Guide Right.
100. The company being in march by the right
flank, the instructor will cause it to form platoons by
the command:
1. By platoons. 2. MARCH.
101. This movement will be executed by each pla
toon according to the above principles, each chief of
platoon without waiting for the other will command,
guide left, at the instant their respective platoons are
formed, when the left file of each platoon will act as
the directing guide, the first taking points ofdirection ,
and the remainder following exactly in his trace.
102. In marching by the left flank, the movements
will be executed by inverse means, each chief of pla
toon giving the command, guide right as soon as their
platoons are formed,
Marching in column by platoons, to march by a flank in
the same direction..
(Fig. 2.) 1. Column, byMARCH.
3. the right flank. 2. File left.
103. At the command march each platoon will face
to the right in marching, and wheel by files to the
left, and then march straight forward; the leading file
of the second platoon will unite with the rear file of
the first, and thus form front to rear.
104. If the company is marching by platoons right
in front and the instructor should wish to march in
retreat by files, he will command:
1. Column, by the left flank. 2. File left. 3. MARCH.
105. This movement will be executed on the same
principles, the left file of the fourth platoon uniting
with the right file of the fifth, the whole moving to
the rear.
To breakfrom a halt into column by platoons.
106. The company being at a halt and faced to the
front, the instructor will command:
3
Fig. 3. P 51
Fig. 4. P 55
LA

Goo
ao

Z
T

00

0000
000000
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 51
(Fig. 3.) 1. Byplatoon, right wheel. 2. MARCH,
107. At the command march, each platoon will
wheel to the right according to the principles pre
scribed for the wheel on a fixed pivot, and when the
man who conducts the marching flank of each pla
toon arrives within one pace of the perpendicular,
its chief will command:
1. Such platoon. 2. HALT.
108. At the command halt, the men will stop short
on the advanced foot, the left guide of each pla
toon will instantly place himself upon the line,
taking care not to leave more space between himself
and the pivot man, then will contain the intermedi
ate files, this done the chief of each platoon will add;
3. Left- DRESS . 4. FRONT.
109. The company will break by platoons to the left
according to the same principle; the chiefs of platoons
on arriving near the perpendicular, will command,
such platoon HALT, and then placing themselves on
the line, command:
1. First, second or third (as the case may be) platoon.
2. Right DRESS , and as soon as the alignment is
ended. 3. FRONT.
To march in column.
110. The company having wheeled by platoons to
the right the instructor will command;
1. Columnforward. 2. Guide left. 3. MARCH.
111. At the second command, the left guide of the
leading platoon will take two points on the ground
in a straight line to the front, at the third the whole
will step off together; the guides of the rear platoons
marching exactly in the trace of the leading one, pre
serving between the latter and himself a distance
precisely equal to the front of his platoon, the men
will each feel lightly the elbow of his neighbor to
112. Athe
wards guide. left in front will be put in march,
column
according to the same principles, substituting in the
command;
Guide rightfor guide left.
113. The instructor wishing to break by platoons to
the right, and move the column forward without halt
ing will caution the company to that effect, and com、
mand:
52 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.
1. Byplatoon. 2. Right wheel. 3. MARCH.
114. At the command march the platoons will wheel
to the right, conforming to the principles herein pre
scribed; when the man who conducts the marching
flank arrives near the perpendicular the instructor
will add:
4. Guide left. 5. FORWARD.
115. At the fourth command, the leading guide will
instantly take points on the ground as before ex
plained, at the fifth, which will be given at the in
stant the first platoon has completed the wheel, all
the platoons will move straight to the front, the men
taking the step of twenty-eight inches, the guides of
the rear platoons placing themselves on, and follow
ing the trace of the leading one, the men touching
lightly the elbows towards the guide.
116. The company may break by platoons to the left,
according to the same principles, substituting guidé
right for guideleft.
117. The instructor placed in front of the company,
will observe whether the movement be executed ac
cording to the principles prescribed above; whether
the platoons after wheeling into column, are perpen
dicular to the line just occupied; and whether the
guide who placed himself where the marching flank
of the platoon has to rest, has left between himself
and the front rank man on the right (or left) the space
necessary to contain the front ofthe platoon.
118. If the company be marching in line to the
front, the instructor will cause it to break by platoons
to the right or left, by the commands prescribed in
No. 113 and following. At the command march, the
platoons will wheel to the right, (or left) in the man
ner already explained, the pivot man will take care
to mark time in his place, without advancing or re
ceding, the guides conforming to what is prescribed
in No. 115.
Remarks on the march in column.
119. If the chiefs and guides of platoons neglect to
lead off and decide the march from the first step, the
march will be begun in uncertainty, which will cause
waverings, a loss of the step, and a loss of distance.
120. If the leading guide take unequal steps, the
march of his platoon, and that which follows, will be
uncertain; there will be undulations, quickenings
and slackenings in the march, and if the same guide
be not habituated to prolong a given direction, with
out deviation he will describe a crooked line, and the
column must wind to conform itself to such line.
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 53
121. If the following guides does not march in the
trace of the preceding one, he will lose his distance at
every moment in endeavors to regain the trace, the
preservation ofwhich is the most important princi
ple in the march in column.
122. The guide of each platoon in column will be re
sponsible for the direction, distance, and step; the
chief of the platoon for the order and conformity of
his platoon with the movements of the guide.
123. The instructor will watch over the execution of
all the principles prescribed; he will also, sometimes,
place himself in rear, align himself on the guides,
and halt, pending some thirty paces together, to veri
fy the accuracy of the guides.
To change direction.
124. The changes of direction of a column while
marching will be executed according to the principle
prescribed for wheeling on the march.
125. Whenever a column is to change direction the
instructor will change the guide if not already
there, to the flank opposite the side to which the
change is tobe made, if to the right he will command,
guide left, ifto the left, guide right, provided the guide
is not already in that position.
126. The column being right in front, and the in
structor should wish to change direction to the right,
he will command, change direction to the right, and im
mediately go himself or send the Ist lieutenant to the
point where the change of direction is to be made.
127. The instructor or lieutenant will place himself
on the direction of the guides, so as to present his
breast to that flank of the column.
128. The leading guide will direct his march on the
marker, so that in passing, his left arm may graze his
breast, when he arrives within four paces the chief
offirst platoon will command, first platoon right wheel,
followed by march the instant the guide is abreast
with the marker; the wheel being nearly ended, the
same chief will command, forward,, and when com
pleted, guideleft, when the platoon will move forward,
the guide taking points on the ground in the new di
rection .
129. The remaining platoons will continue to march
straight forward till up with the marker, when they
will wheel to the right, in succession and retake the
direct march by the same commands.
130. If the column be in march right in front to
change direction to the left the instructor will com
mand guide right. At this command the leading guide
will take points on the ground, and the rear guides
 54 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.
placing themselves in his trace, the men taking the
touch of elbows to the right.
131. The change of direction to the left will then be
executed according to the same principles. as the
change to the right, substituting in the commands,
left for right, and when the change is completed the
instructor will command:
Guide Right.
132. The change of direction will be executed with
the left in front by inverse means.
133. In changes of direction in double quick time
the platoons will wheel according to the principles
prescribed in the school of the platoon No. 256.
134. In order to prepare the men for those forma
tions in line, which can only be executed by turning
to the right or left, the instructor will sometimes
cause the column to change direction to the side of
the guide, by the command:
Head of column left (or right) turn.
135. In this case the chiefs of platoon will command,
left (or right) turn instead of left (or right) wheel,
when each platoon in succession will turn, conform
ing to what is prescribed in school of the platoon No.
253 and 254.
136. It is highly important to preserve distances and
direction, that all the sub-divisions in a column
should change direction precisely at the same point;
it is for this purpose that that point should always be
marked in advance, that the guides may direct their
march upon the marker.
137. Each chief of platoon will take care that his
sub-division arrives at the point ofchange in a square
with the line ofdirection .
To halt the column.
1. Column. 2. HALT.
138. At the second command the column will halt.
The guides will stand fast, although they may have
lost both distance and direction.
139. If a guide having lost distance seek to recover it
after the command he will only throw his fault on
the following guide, who having marched well will no
longer be at his proper distance.
140. The instructor wishing to form line will place
himself about ten paces in advance of the leading
guide, face to him and rectify if necessary the guides
of the rear platoon, then command:
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 55
(Fig. 4.) 1. Left into line, wheel. 2. MARCH.
141. At the command march, the platoons will all
wheel to the left, on the principles of wheel, form a
halt; each chief of platoon on arriving near the per
pendicular will command:
1. Such platoon. 2. HALT.
142. The 1st lieutenant at the instant the move
ment commences will move rapidly to the point
where the right of the company, will rest when in
line, and as soon as the first platoon halts, he will
cause the right guide to step up on the line and then
command, right dress. This being ended he will add,
FRONT, and resume his place in line.
143. If the left be in front they will be formed into
line by the commands, right into line, wheel, which
will be executed on the same principles, and by in
verse means, the 1st lieutenant will go to the point
where the left ofthe company will rest, and command:
Left-DRESS. FRONT, &c.
144. If the column be marching right in front, and
the instructor should wish to form it into line with
out halting the column, he will give the commands
prescribed in No. 140. At the command march, the
left guides will halt short and mark time on their
own ground, conforming to the movements of the
marching flank, the lieutenant and chiefs of platoons
will conform to what is prescribed in No. 142 and fol
lowing.
145. Should the instructor wish to form left into
line without halting, and continue the march in
that direction, he will command:
1. By platoons, left wheel. 2. MARCH .
146. This command will be executed on the same
principles prescribed in No. 141, except that when the
right of platoons arrives near the line the instructor
will command:
3. Guide right (or left). 4. Forward.
147. At the third command the guide designated will
take points of direction, and at the fourth, given at
the instant the wheel is completed, the whole will
move off, touching elbows towards the side of the
guide.
To break the company into platoons and to reform the
company.
148. The company being in march to the front in
line and the instructor should wish to march in the
56 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.
same direction in columns by platoons right in front,
he will command:
(Fig. 5.) 1. Company. 2. By the right flank. 3. Platoons
break to the left. 4. MARCH.
149. At the command MARCH the chief ofthe first
platoon will briskly command: 1. First platoon for
ward. 2. Guide right, when it will continue to move
square to the front; all the remaining platoons at the
command march will face by the right, and march
straight forward, and when the chief of the second
platoon arrives near the trace of the chief of the first,
he will command:
1. Second platoon. 2. By the left flank. 3. March. 4. Guide
right.
150. The word march will be given the instant he ar
rives on the trace of the guide of the first platoon,
when the men of the second platoon will all face to
the left, and at the fourth command given after the
men have faced, take the touch of the elbows to the
right and march directly in the trace of the first pla
toon.
151. The third, fourth, and fifth platoons will break
to the left by the same commands and means pre
scribed for the second. The instructor as soon as the
fifth platoon has faced to the left in column, command
guide left, when the guide of the leading platoon will
take points of direction to the front, and all the re
maining guides place themselves upon his trace.
152. The company may be broken into column, left
in front by inverse means, the chief of the fifth pla
toon at the command march, will command guide left
and move square to the front, and as soon as the men
ofthe first platoon have faced to the right in march
ing, the instructor will command:
Guide right.
153. In this case chiefs of platoons will be careful to
give the command, 1. By the right flank. 2. MARCH, a
little before the left file of their platoons arrive on the
trace of the left guides of the preceding one rather
than to allow them to pass the line, which would un
avoidably cause a loss of distance as well as direction,
and then command, guide left as soon as their men
have faced, which will give time for the left guide to
place himselfon the line without loosing his distance.
154. This movement will be executed at first from a
halt and then on the march. The company being in
column by platoon right in front and at a halt, the in
structor will command:
T
Fig. 5. P 56 Fig. 6. P 60. •
C▸

N
CH
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 57
1. Form Company. 2. MARCH.
155. At the first command the 1st lieutenant will
move briskly to the point where the left ofthe com
pany is to rest, and place himself on the line and
facing the first platoon.
156. At the command march, the chief of first pla
toon will command, right dress and stand fast. The
chiefs of the second, third, fourth and fifth platoons
will briskly command: 1. such platoon, left oblique,
MARCH; when the men of each platoon will take the
oblique step, and as soon as each clears the left file of
the preceding one he will command HALT, then pla
cing himselfon the line,
Right Dress- FRONT.
157. The 1st lieutenant will then correct any errors
in the alignment that may occur and resume his
place in line.
158. To form company on the march the commands
and means are the same except that the leading pla
toon continues to march square to the front, its chief
ccmmanding guide right. The chiefs of the other pla
toons commanding double quick before that of march,
and move upon the line in double quick time, retak
ing the steps from the platoon already formed in
quick time as they successively arrive.
159. The instructor as soon as the company is form
ed will command:
Guide Left.
160. When the company is in column by platoon
left in front, they will be formed by inverse means,
the principles are the same.
Diminishing and Increasing of a Column by Platoons.
161. Platoons will be broken off from the directing
flank only. That is from the left flank when the
right is in front and from the right flank when the
left is in front.
162. The company being in march and supposed to
constitute part of a column right in front, the instruc
tor, in order to pass an obstruction which may arise
on the left of the company, will command:
1. Fifth Platoon, from Left to Rear. 2. MARCH,
163. At the first command the chief of this platoon
will add:
Bythe Right Flank, File Left.
164. At the command, march, the platoon will face
to the right in marching, and wheel by files to the
58 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.
left, the chief ofplatoon directing himself on the left
file ofthe company .
165. If another platoon is to break to the rear, the
same commands will be given both by the instructor
and chief of platoon substituting fourth for fifth
which will be executed as explained above. The pla
toon already in rear will mark time and as the other
platoon faces by the right flank and breaks by file to
the left they will unite with the rear of this platoon,
break by file to the right and then left, and thus con
tinue until the instructor commands:
1. Platoons into Line. 2. MARCH.
166. At this they will re-form on the line, conform
ing to what is prescribed in No. 95, except that the
right file of the leading platoon will unite and form
on the left of the platoon already on the line.
167. These movements will be executed when the
left is in front by inverse means, substituting first for
fifth, left flank for rightflank, and file right forfile left.
To March the Column in route and execute the movements
incident thereto.
168. The swiftness of the route step will be at the
rate of one hundred and ten steps per minute, which
will be habitually maintained in columns in route
when the roads and ground will permit.
169. The company being at a halt in line or in col
umn by platoons, to ause it to march in the route
step, the instructor will command:
1. Column Forward. 2. Guide Left (or right). 3. Route
· Step. 4. MARCH.
170. At the command march, both ranks will step off
together; the rear rank will take, in marching, by
shortening a few steps the distance of one pace (28 in
ches) from the front rank, which distance will be
computed from the breasts of the rear rank men to
the backs of the front rank. The men will without
further command carry arms at will, when they will
not be required to preserve silence or march in the
cadence step, but may march at ease, care being taken
to prevent the ranks from intermixing; the front
rank from getting in advance of the guide or the rear
rank from opening to too great a distance.
171. The company marching in the route step will
change direction without formal commands on à cau
tion or indication from the captain. The rear rank
will come up to change direction in the same man
ner as thefront, rank; each rank will conform itself in
the route step to the principles prescribed for the
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 59
change in closed ranks, except that the pivot man
will take steps, fourteen inches instead of nine, in or
der to clear the wheeling point.
172. To cause the cadenced step to be resumed the
instructor will command.
1. Quick Time. 2. MARCH.
173. At the command march, the men will bring
their pieces to a shoulder, retake the cadence step
from theguide, the rear rank closing to its proper dis
tance.
174. The company marching by the route step, the
instructor will cause it to march by a flank by the
commands:
1. Company by the Right (or left) Flank. 2. File Left (or
right). 3. MARCH.
175. At the command march, the company will face
to the right (or left) and wheel immediately to the left
(or right); all the files will come up in succession to
wheel on the same spot where that which preceded it
wheeled. If there be files or platoons broken off to the
rear they will by wheeling regain their respective
places and follow the movement ofthe company.
176. The company being at a halt and in line, should
the instructor wish to exercise it by fours, he will
command:
1. Right (or left) Four Deep. 2. MARCH.
177. This movement will be executed as prescribed
in the school of platoon.
Counter-march.
178, The company being at a halt, and in line right
in front, to cause it to counter-march, the instructor
will command:
1. Counter-march. 2. Company Right Face. 3. File Left.
4. MARCH.
179. At the word march, the company will step off
smartly; the first file will wheel to the left, march
two paces, and again wheel to the left, then direct its
march along the front rank, so as to arrive behind
and about two paces from where the left of the com
pany formerly rested; this point being marked by
the 1st lieutenant at the instant the movement com
mences. Each file will come up successively to wheel
on thesame ground where the first wheeled, the lead
ing file having arrived near the point where the right
is to rest, the instructor will command:
60 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.
1. Company. 2. HALT. 3. FRONT. 4. Right DRESS.
180. The command halt will be given at the instant
the right file arrives abreast with the lieutenant,
when the men will halt, and at the fourth be aligned
by the right.
181. In a column by platoon the counter-march will
be executed by the same commands and on the same
principles, the instuctor commanding halt, at the in
stant the right file of platoon arrives opposite to
where the left rested before the movement commen
ced, which point should be marked by himself or 1st
lieutenant.
182. In column left in front the counter-march will
be executed by inverse means.
Being in Column by Platoon, to Form Right (or left) into
Line.
183. Being in march and in column by platoon right
in front, the instructor wishing to form into line to
the right, will command:
(Fig. 6.) 1. On Right into Line. 2. Guide Right.
184. At the second command the men will all take
the touch of elbows to the right, the column continu
ing to move straight forward; at the same time the 1st
lieutenant, passing around the rear of the company
will move briskly to the point where the right of the
company ought to rest when in line and place him
self as indicated in No. 91, which line should be so
chosen that the guide of each platoon after turning to
the right will have at least six paces to march before
arriving on the line.
185. The head of the column having arrived nearly
opposite the 1st lieutenant, the instructor will add:
3, MARCH .
186. At this the first platoon will turn to the right,
conforming to the principles prescribed in school of
platoon, No. 253 and 254. Its chief will direct his
march on the 1st lieutenant, and when within one
pace ofthe line, he will command, halt, then placing
himselfupon the line will add:
Right DRESS. FRONT.
187. The second platoon will continue to move
straight forward, until its guide shall arrive opposite
the left file of the first, when its chief will command,
right turn, when this platoon will move on the line,
its guide directing himself on the left file of the first
platoon. On arriving abreast with the rear rank
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 61
its chief will command, halt, right dress, which
will be executed as heretofore explained.
188. The third, fourth and fifth platoons will each
successively conform to what hasjust been prescribed
for the second.
189. A column by platoon left in front will form left
into line according to the same principles and by in
verse means.
To Stack Arms.
190. At this command number three of the front rank
in each platoon will pass his piece before him, seize it
with the left hand near the upper band, and place the
butt a little in advance of his left toe, the barrel to
wards the body, and draw the rammer slightly from
its place; number two of the front rank will also draw
the rammer slightly and pass his piece to number
three, who will seize it with the right hand near the
upper band, and placing the butt a little in advance of
the right toe ofnumber two, the barrel to the front, he
will cross the rammers of the pieces, the rammer of
number two being inside. Number three of the rear
rank will slightly draw his rammer, lean his piece
forward, the lock plate downward; advance the right
foot about six inches, and insert the rammer between
the rammer and the barrel of the piece of his file
leader; with the right hand he will place the butt of
his piece about thirty-six inches in rear of and per
pendicular to the front rank, bringing back his right
foot by the side of his left. Number three of the front
rank will at the same time lean the stack to the rear
and force down all the rammers, The stack being
formed, the remaining men of the platoon will pass
their pieces forward, the barrel down, and rest it on
the191.
stack.
The men of each platoon having taken the first
position without arms, the instructor will command:
1. Break Ranks. 2. MARCH.
192. To again form line and resume arms, the men
of each platoon, at the signal or command to form
company, will withdraw his piece from the stack and
resume his place in line at shoulder arms; the num
bers forming the stack being careful to eze their
pieces at the same time, and by raising the stack
foosen the rammers, thereby avoiding danger of the
pieces falling.
 62 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.
INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS .
General Principles.
1. By the term skirmishers, will herein be under
stood, any company or body of infantry, thrown out
and actually deployed into open files or loose order.
This term will only be applied to the companies
whilst so extended; the moment that they are reas
sembled or reformed into closed files, they will resume
their habitual denomination of 1st or 2d company ,
etc., as the case may be.
2. Skirmishers will be thrown out to clear the way
for and to cover the movements of the main corps to
which they belong; consequently they may be thrown
out to the front, to a flank, to the rear, or in the
several directions as may be deemed necessary.
3. When skirmishers are thrown out for this pur
pose, they will regulate their movements so as to keep
the main body eonstantly covered.
4. Movements of skirmishers, though made in loose
files, must be subject to such rules as will give to their
commander the means of moving them in any direc
tion, with the greatest promptitude; nevertheless it is
not expected that these movements will be executed
with the same precission as in closed ranks, because
such exactness would materially interfere with their
prompt execution.
5. Each company or body of skirmishers will always
have a reserve, the strength of which will vary accord
ing to circumstances. If the body thrown out be
within sustaining distance of the main corps, a re
serve of one or two platoons will be sufficient for each
company, whose duty will be to furnish the line with
cartridges, relieve the fatigued, and serve as a rallying
point. If at too great a distance, a whole company or
companies may be employed as a reserve for the same
purpose.
6. The reserves will be placed behind the centre of
the line of skirmishers , the company reserves at one
hundred and the principal reserve at two hundred
paces, or according to circumstances. The reserves,
while holding themselves within sustaining distance
of the line, should be, as much as possible , in a posi
tion to afford each other mutual protection , and will
profit by any accident the ground may present, to
conceal themselves from the view ofthe enemy.
7. The movements of skirmishers will be executed
in double quick time, the run being resorted to only in
cases of urgent nécessity, the skirmishers carrying
their pieces in the manner most convenient to them.
 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 63
8. The movements will be habitually indicated by
the sounds of the bugle, the officers, and if necessary,
the sergeants will repeat and cause the commands to
be executed, as soon as they are given; but to avoid
mistakes when signals are used, they will wait until
the last bugle note is sounded , before commencing the
movement.
9. When skirmishers are required to move rapidly,
the officers will see that the men economize their
strength, keep cool, and profit by all the advantages
which the ground may offer for cover.
Deployments.
10. A company may be deployed as skirmishers in
two ways: forward and by a flank; the deployment
forward will be adopted when the company is behind
the line on which it is to be established as skir
mishers; and by a flank when it is already on that
line.
11. Whenever a company is to be thrown out as
skirmishers, the left file of the platoons to be deployed
will be detached as a guard for the captain, and the
platoons counted in fours, irrespective of officers or
sergeants, and divided in the centre, that is, between
two and three of each rank, forming groups of four
men, who will be careful to know and sustain each
other. When the entire company is to be deployed,
the left files of the fourth and fifth platoons will form
a guard for the 1st lieutenant.
12. A company may be deployed on its right, left or
centre file, or on any other designated file. In this
manner skirmishers may be thrown forward with
the greatest possible rapidity on any ground they
may desire to occupy, the interval depending on the
extent of ground to be covered; but in general groups
of four men, should not be removed more than thirty
paces from each other; the distance between men of
the same group, when deployed, will be four paces; in
no case will they lose sight of each other.
13. A chain of skirmishers ought generally to pre
serve their alignment, but no advantages the ground
may offer for shelter will be sacrificed to obtain this
regularity.
To Deploy Forward.
14. A company being at a halt, when the captain
shall wish to deploy it forward on left file of third
platoon, holding the fourth and fifth platoon in re
serve, he will command:
(Fig. 7.)1. Three Right Platoons, as Skirmishers.
64 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.
2. On Left Group take Intervals. 3. MARCH (or double
quick-MARCH.)
15. At the first command, the sergeants of the
platoons designated, will promptly place themselves
one pace in rear of the centres of their respective
platoons; and the files composing the guard will
briskly form two paces in rear of the second platoon ;
the captain will indicate to the sergeant of the left
group the point on which he wishes him to direct his
march; at the same time the first lieutenant, placing
himself before the centre of the fourth and fifth
platoons, will command:
1. Reserve. 2. About- FACE. 3. Forward. 4. MARCH.
16. At the fourth command the reserve will step two
or three paces to the rear, so as to unmask the left
flank of the third platoon, when it will be halted by
the 1st lieutenant, and faced to the front.
17. At the command march, the left group of four
men, conducted by the sergeant of the third platoon,
will direct itself on the point indicated; all the other
groups of fours, throwing forward the left shoulder,
will move diagonally to the front in double quick
time, so as to gain to the right the space of twenty
paces, which will be the distance between each group.
18. At the instant the movement commences, the
sergeants will move rapidly to the right of the left
group offours in their respective platoons, to conduct
them, placing themselves abreast with the front
rank; when the second group from the left shall ar
rive on a line with and twenty paces from the first; it
will march straight forward, keeping constantly on
the same alignment, and twenty paces from that
group; the third and all the others will conform to
what has just been prescribed for the second, all ar
riving on the line successively, the right guide of the
company with the last group.
19. The left guide having reached the point where
the left of the line should rest, the captain will com
mand:
1. Skirmishers. 2. HALT.
20. At the command halt the lieutenants and ser
geants in charge of each group will stand fast; the
men will deploy in double quick time at four paces
from each other, to the left, No. 1 of the front rank
placing himself four paces on the left of the officer or
sergeant, and No. 2 twelve paces, the rear rank men
placing themselves four paces on the left of their file
leaders, and on the same line. If any groups be not in
Fig. 7.

100 &
A
-- ADD
DU
Со
M
 INSTRUCTION FOR SKÍRMISHERS . 65
line at the command halt, they will move up briskly,
conforming to what has just been prescribed.
21. The deployment being executed, the lieuten
ants, sergeants and men will instantly take the posi
tion of ready, kneeling, as prescribed in the school of
platoon , No. 155 and facing the front.
22. The captain will give a general superintendance
to the whole deployment, and then place himself
about forty paces in rear of the centre of the line, he
having with him a bugler, and the men detached
as a guard.
23. As soon as the skirmish line is extended, the 1st
lieutenant will march the reserve by the shortest
route to a point about one hundred paces in rear of
its centre, then conform to all the movements of the
line.
24. Skirmishers will be particulary instructed to
take advantage of any cover which the ground may
offer, and should lie flat on the ground when ever
such a movement will protect them from the fire of
the enemy alignments always yielding to this impor
tant advantage.
25. Deployments may be made on the right, or on
the right or left of the centre platoon, upon the same
principles, and by the same commands, substituting
the indication right (or left) of centre platoon , for that
of left file.
26. In whatever manner the deployment may be
made, the men in each group of fours will always de
ploy at four paces from each other, and upon the offi
cer or sergeant on the right of the front rank of each
group. The deployments by groups will habitually
be made at twenty paces interval; if a greater or less
interval be required, it will be indicated in the com
mand.
27. When a company thrown out as skirmishers is
so near the main body, as to render a reserve un
necessary the entire company will be extended, in
the same manner, and according to the same princi
ples, as for the deployment ofthree platoons. In this
case the captain will move about twenty paces to the
right of the centre and about forty paces to the rear of
the line, having with him a bugler, and the men indi
cated in No. 11; the first lieutenant will place himself
equi-distant between the captain and the left file, and
about thirty paces in rear of the line, he having with
him the guard indicated No. 11, will if necessary re
peat commands from the captain and generally su
perintend the movements of the left wing of the
skirmishers.
E
66 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.
To Deploy by a Flank.
28. The company being at a halt, when the captain
shall wish to deploy it by a flank, holding the first
two platoons in reserve, he will command:
(Fig. 8.) 1. Three left platoons as Skirmishers. 2. By
the right flank take intervals. 3. MARCH, (or double
quick) MARCH.
29. At the second command, the lieutenants and
sergeants ofthe platoons designated will move brisk
ly to the front and place themselves one pace in ad
vance ofthe right file of their respective groups, the
captain will indicate to the chief of the third platoon
the point on which he wishes him to direct his
march; the 1st lieutenant placing himself in front of
the first and second platoons, will execute what is
prescribed in Nos. 15 and 16.
30. At the word march, all except the left group will
face to the right and commence the movement, the
officers and sergeants placing themselves abreast with
the right file of their respective groups, will conduct
them to the right, the left group will stand fast until
the second group from the left has halted, when it
will deploy to the left as indicated in No. 20, the sec
ond group will halt at twenty paces from the one on
the left, the third at twenty paces from the second and
so on to the right; as each group halts they will face to
the front, (the officers and sergeants briskly placing
themselves on the right) and deploy as has been al
ready explained.
31. The chiefs of groups will pay particular atten
tion to the deployments of their respective groups,
and will be instructed to judge distances by the eye
without counting steps, thus rectifying any errors
that may be committed."
82. As soon as the movement commences, the 1st
lieutenant will face the reserve about and march to
the rear, as indicated in No. 23.
33. The deployment may be made by the left flank,
according to the same principles, substituting left
flank for right flank in the commands.
34. If the captain should wish to deploy the com
pany upon the right or left group of the centre pla
toon, he will command:
1. Such platoons (or company) as skirmishers. 2. On right
(or left) group ofthird platoon take intervals. 3. By the
right and left flanks. 4. MARCH.
35. At the third command the officers and sergeants
will conform to what is prescribed in No, 29, except
that those on the left of the group designated will
 8.
Fig P
66

000
00
67
P
9.
Fig
0000DDDDDD
Q
a s

7 B
 16

ANA
AS
JE
Ze
at

19
 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 67
place themselves in front of the left file, and if there
is a reserve the 1st lieutenant will execute what is pre
scribed in Nos. 15 and 16.
36. At the fourth command the group designated
will stand fast, but will deploy as soon as there is
room on its left; all on the right of this group will
face to the right, and those on the left will face to the
left, the two wings will move off in opposite direc
tlons, the two groups nearest that which stands fast
will halt at twenty paces from this group, all the
others halting at twenty paces from the group in
their rear, and each deploying as indicated in Nos. 20
and 21.
37. The entire company may be deployed upon the
same principles, and upon any named group whatso
ever.
To extend intervals.
38. This movement, to extend a line of skirmishers,
will be executed on the principles prescribed for de
ployments. If the line be at a halt, and the captain
should wish to extend interval to the left he will
command:
(Fig. 9.) By the left flank (soMARCH.
many paces) extend inter
vals. 2.
39. At the command march, the right group will
stand fast, all the others will face to the left, and
each group will extend its interval, to the specified
distance indicated in the commands, by the princi
ples prescribed in No. 30; the men of the same group
preserving between each other, the distance of four
paces, unless the advantages of the ground should
makeit necessary to close nearer. The intervals refer
to the space between the groups, and not between
men ofthe same group.
40. Ifthe line ofskirmishers should be marching to
the front. and the captain wishing to extend it to the
right, he will command:
1. On left group (so many paces) extend intervals.
2. MARCH.
41. At the word march, the left group will continue
straight forward, conducted by its sergeant, all the
other groups will throw forward the left shoulder,
and taking the double quick step will extend their
intervals, to the specified distance and then move
straight forward.
42. Intervals may be extended from the centre
group or from any designated group, upon the same
principles.
68 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.
To Close Intervals.
43. Ifa line of skirmishers be at a halt, should the
captain wish to close intervals to the left he will com
mand:
1. By the left flank (so many paces) close intervals.
2. MARCH,
44. At the command march, the left group will stand
fast, the others will face to the left, and close to the
prescribed distance, facing to the front as they suc
cessively attain the distance indicated.
45. If the line be marching to the front, the inter
vals may be closed upon the same principles prescrib
ed for extending intervals in No. 40 and following,
only by inverse means, substituting close for that of
extend, in the commands.
46. When intervals are to be closed in order to re
inforce a line of skirmishers, so as to cause two com
panies to occupy the same ground previously occu
pied by one; the new company will deploy, so as to
finish its movement at about twenty paces in rear of
the right or left of the old company, the men ofthe
new company will successively move upon the line.
as they shall be unmasked bythe men ofthe old com
pany; the reserves of the two companies uniting be
hind the centre of the line.
Manner ofrelieving a company deployed as skirmishers.
47. When a company of skirmishers is to be reliev
ed, its captain will be advised of the intention; the
new company will execute its deployment, finishing
its movement at about twenty paces in rear of the
line.
48. At this distance the men of the new company
will advance in double quick time, by command of
its captain a few paces beyond the old line and halt;
the new line being formed, the old company will as
semble on its reserve, observing not to get into groups
of fours until beyond the fire of the enemy.
49. If the company to be relieved be marching in re
treat, the company relieving them will deploy by a
flank, as prescribed in No. 28 and following; the old
skirmishers will continue to retire in order, and hav
ing passed the new line, will assemble upon their re
serve.
To advance and retreat in line.
50. When a company deployed as skirmishers is
marching to the front, the guide will be habitually in
the centre, without any particular command being
given to that effect, but if the guide should be on
 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 69
either flank, the command guide right (or left,) will be
given after that of forward.
51. To cause a line of skirmishers to advance the
captain commands:
1. Skirmishers. 2. Forward. 3. MARCH.
52. This command will, if necessary be repeated by
all the chiefs of platoons with the greatest prompti
tude, when the line will move to the front; the guide
charged with the direction will move on the point in
dicated to him; the men will hold themselves aligned
on this guide, and preserve their distances towards
him. To arrest the march the captain commands:
1. Skirmishers. 2. HALT.
53. At this command the line will instantly halt,
and take the position indicated in No. 21. The chiefs
of platoons will promptly rectify any errors in the
alignment, and after taking every possible advantage
the ground may offer for protecting the men, will re
sume their places in line.
54. To march in retreat the captain will command:
1. Skirmishers in retreat. 2. MARCH.
55. At the command march, the skirmishers will in
dividually face about, and march to the rear, con
forming to the same principles prescribed for march
ing to the front, officers and sergeants using every
possible exertion to preserve order, and prevent skir
mishers from closing their distances or intervals.
56. To halt the skirmishers while marching in re
treat the captain commands:
1. Skirmishers. 2. HALT.
57. At this command the skirmishers will immedi
ately halt and face to the front, chiefs ofplatoons con
forming to what is indicated in No. 53.
To Change Direction.
58. Ifthe captain should wish to change direction,
he will command:
1. Skirmishers, right (or left) wheel. 2. MARCH.
59. At the command march, the right (or left) guide
will mark time in his place, the left (or right) guide
will move in a circle to the right (or left) and regulate
his movements by casting his eyes along the line,
soas to observe their direction, and the nature of the
ground to be passed over, skirmishers will regulate
their gait and the length of step by their distance
from the pivot, often looking to the marching flank so
as to preserve direction and intervals.
70 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.
60. When the wheel is completed the captain will
add:
3. Forward. 4. Guide right (or centre.)
61. A line of skirmishers marching in retreat will
change direction by the same commands, and accord
ing to the same principles.
To march by a flank.
62. The march by a flank will be conducted upon
the same principles, and by the same commands as
the march by a flank in closed files; except that the
skirmishers will preserve their distances and groups
their intervals.
63. The men will be instructed to understand that
the signals, or command, forward means that they
shall march on the enemy. In retreat, that they will
retire by facing about, and, by the right or left flank,
that they must face to the right or left, whatever may
be their positions.
64. Should it be necessary to change direction while
marching by a flank, the change will be made by file;
the captain commanding file right (or left) MARCH,
which will be conducted as indicated in school ofthe
company, for the change of direction in closed files,
skirmishers always observing to preserve their dis
tances.
65. The reserve will conform to all the movements
of the line of skirmishers, and be, habitually held at
about one hundred paces in rear of its centre, always
in position to second its operations.
66. When the officer in charge of the reserve shall
wish it to advance he will command, reserve, forward
guide left, MARCH. If in retreat, he will command, re
serve in retreat MARCH, guide right. In this case at the
word march, the men will all face about and march to
the rear.
67. The skirmishers or reserve, when marching by
a flank, or in retreat, will, at the command, halt
promptly face the enemy; skirmishers taking the po
sition of ready kneeling, as indicated in No. 21.
The Firings,
68. Skirmishers will fire either at a halt or march
ing, to cause the fire to be executed at a halt, the cap
tain will command:
Skirmishers commence firing.
69. At this command, the men ofthe front rank will
aim and fire, then reload their pieces rapidly and hold
themselves in readiness to fire again; the rear rank
men will, as soon as their right hand men (or file lea
 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 71
ders) have reloaded, aim, fire, and reload; and thus
the men of each rank will continue the fire alternate
ly, conforming to this rule, thus one or the other
shall always have their pieces loaded.
70. Chiefs of platoons will see that their men do not
remain after firing to reload in the same place unless
protected by the nature of the ground; and will also
caution them to be calm, to aim with accuracy, and
endeavor to estimate correctly the distances between
them and the enemy, and thus deliver their fire with
greater certainty.
To Fire Marching.
71. This fire will be executed , by the same com
mands, as prescribed for the fire at a halt.
72. The line being on the march, at the command
commence firing, the front rank men will halt, take
the position of ready, kneeling, aim, fire and reload
their pieces before moving forward; the rear rank
men will select a cover ten or twelve paces in ad
vance, and move rapidly to it, halt, take the position
Just indicated, select their objects, aim and fire; the
front rank after reloading will move rapidly forward
pass the rear rank about ten or twelve paces, select a
cover, halt, fire and reload as before explained; and
thus each rank will continue the fire until the com
mand or signal to cease firing is given or sounded,
when the rank in rear will finish loading and resume
their place. If instead of cease firing, the command
halt should be given , the rank in rear will move upon
the line and continue firing, as prescribed for the fire
at a halt.
73. Ifthe line be marching in retreat at the com
mand commence firing, the front rank men will halt,
face the enemy, aim and fire, then move rapidly to
the rear; the rear rank will continue in retreat, select
a cover and halt about twelve paces beyond the
ground where the front rank halted and facing the
enemy will retain their fire and position, until the
front rank has passed them in retreat, and had suffi
cient time to reload. After firing they will move ra
pidly to the rear, pass the front rank ten or twelve
paces, select a cover, halt, and reload. The front rank
after passing the rear rank ten or twelve paces will
select a cover, ha face the enemy, and conform to
what has just been prescribed for the rear ránk, and
thus alternately until the command cease firing, or
halt is given, when they will conform to what is pre
scribed in No. 72.
74. If the company be marching by the right flank
at the command, commence firing, every front rank
72 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.
man will face to the enemy, step one pace forward
(out of the line) halt and fire; the rear rank continu
ing to move forward, as soon as the front rank has
fired, they will place themselves behind their respec
tive rear rank man, and reload whilst marching,
when they have finished loading the rear rank men
will face the enemy, step out of the line, aim and fire;
then execute what has been prescribed for the front
rank men, by placing themselves behind them, and
thus alternately. To facilitate this movement, chiefs
ofplatoons and sergeants will, at the command, com
mencefiring, promptly place themselves abreast with
the centre file of their respective groups on the re
verse flank from the enemy, and two paces outside
the line, and marching in this position will regulate
the fire of each rank alternately, as above indicated .
75. At the command cease firing, officers and ser
geants, and rear rank men if in front, will resume
their respective places.
76. Ifthe line be marching by the left flank, the fire
will be executed according to the same principles,
the rear rank commencing the fire.
77. Should a line of skirmishers be firing at a halt,
at the command, forward, march, the rank whose
pieces are loaded will move forward at the command;
the other remaining in their positions, will finish
loading, then move to the front, continuing the fire
as indicated in No. 72.
78. Ifthe command in retreat is given, when firing
at a halt, advancing, or by a flank, the rank whose
pieces are discharged will move to the rear; the other
will remain faced to the enemy, aim and fire whilst
the one in retreat is reloading, and then retire, load
ing as heretofore explained, and continue the fire.
79. Skirmishers will be habituated to load their
pieces, whilst marching, and should be practiced to
fire and load kneeling, sitting and lying, much liberty
being allowed in these exercises in order that they
may be executed in the manner most convenient,
andwith the least possible fatigue.
80. At the signal to cease firing, officers and ser
geants in charge of groups will see that the order is
promptly obeyed; the men who may not be loaded
will reload their pieces; if the line be marching it will
continue the movement, the men who happen to be
in rear will briskly move to their places.
81. All officers in charge of skirmishers will watch
over them, with the greatest possible vigilance , and
in all the firings will see that perfect order and si
lence is preserved, and that the men do not wander
imprudently; they will in all cases cause them to
 O :COMDA pat
an and
e

TORTHOT 21
8.

ALOE
 And
tod
19 wha +30 •+ ~
Id atthe

16

HOW
 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 73
take advantage promptly of any shelter that the na
ture ofthe ground may offer to protect them from the
fire of the enemy. Should intervals be momentarily
lost when several men near each other, find a com
mon shelter, officers will see, on quiting such posi
tions, that they immediately resume their intervals
and places in line, and in no case allow them to
crowd needlessly together, and thus expose them
selves to the fire ofthe enemy.
The Rally.
82. Skirmishers are rallied to resist cavalry, or to op
pose an enemy with better success; rallies will inva
riably be made in double quick time, or at a run, and
with bayonets fixed; when ordered to rally the men
will fix bayonets without command.
83. Should a line of skirmishers marching, or at a
halt, be merely disturbed by scattered horsemen, it
will not be necessary to rally on the reserve.
84. If the horsemen should advance to charge the
line of skirmishers, the captain will command:
(Fig. 10.) Rally by groups.
85. At this command the line will halt if marching
and the men of each group will rally in the following
manner:-the officer or sergeant in charge of each
group will stand fast; the men will face toward their
respective group chiefs, and moving briskly, No. 1 of
the front rank will close upon his chief and face to
the front; No. 1 of the rear rank, will instantly place
himself in rear of his file leader and face to the rear;
No. 2 ofthe front rank will next come up, and place
himselftouching elbows with No. 1 of the front rank
faced to the front; No. 2 of the rear rank will follow
and take his place in rear rank, faced to the rear, the
officer or sergeant will then face to, and side step
about eight inches to the right, and command:
Guard against cavalry, Guard.
86. At this command the men of each group will
take the position of guard against cavalry, as indi
cated in school of the platoon , No. 96. The right feet
of the men in each group will be brought together for
mutual support, and in this position they will load
and fire as occasion may offer, without moving their
feet.
87. The captain and 1st lieutenant if the whole
company is deployed will cause the men constituting
their guard to form a square, or a compact circle
around them according to circumstances; if there bę
a reserve they will form a square ifnecessary.
74 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.
88. Ifthe captain should judge the squares too weak
and still wishing to hold his position by strengthen
ing his line, he will command:
(Fig. 11.) Rally by Platoons.
89. At this command, the officer and sergeant of
each group, belonging to the same platoon, will
promptly repeat the command, and lead off by files
from the right of groups diagonally to the rear, so as
to meet each other at a point about ten paces in rear
ofthe line; the officer, on arriving within two paces
of his sergeant, will break by file to the right, and
then describe a complete circle to the left, followed by
the men of his group, in one rank; the sergeant will
unite with the last file of this group and, followed by
the men of his own group, will continue the march
in the circle; the officer, on arriving upon the same
ground where he broke by file to the right, will
promptly command: HALT. Guard against cavalry.
GUARD; when the men will close into a compact circle
and take the position indicated, facing outwards.
90. The captain will move rapidly where his ser
vices may be most needed. The officers and sergeants
will observe that the rally is made in silence and with
promptitude, If the reserve be threatened, it will
form a square, or circle, around its chief.
91. To rally on the reserve, the captain will com
mand:
(Fig. 12.) Rally on Reserve.
92. At this command the captain will move rapidly
on the reserve; the 1st lieut. will immediately cause
the reserve to form the front of a circle, and take the
position of ready; the skirmishers of each platoon
moving rapidly, will direct their march on the re
serve. taking care to close in groups as they arrive
near; then complete the formation of the circle com
menced by the reserve, forming the first front, closing
in rapidly, without any regard to their particular
places in line; the circle being formed, the men will
face outward at the command halt, and take the posi
tion ofready.
93. When a whole company is deployed as skir
mishers, the captain may cause it to rally by com
pany, by the command or signal:
Rally by Company.
94. At this command they will habitually rally on
the centre platoon, (unless the captain should desig
nate some particular platoon in his command, ) and
into a compact circle in two ranks, facing outward
 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 75
upon the same principles as prescribed for the rally
on the reserve. To again form line, the captain com
mands:
Reduce- Circle.
95. At this command, chiefs of platoons will reform
their men on the right and left of the centre platoon,
in their respective places. Should the command as
skirmishers MARCH be given, they will immediately
deploy by the right and left flanks, upon the same
line previously occupied; on the contrary, at the com
mand halt, the company will be aligned by the 1st
lieutenant, and may be put in march in column by
platoon or otherwise, and return to the main body, in
quick or double quick time.
96. If while deployed as skirmishers the captain
should find it necessary to rally on the regiment, he
will command:
Rally on the Regiment.
97. At this command the skirmishers of each platoon
and the reserve will unmask the front of the regi
ment and direct themselves by files in double quick
time towards its nearest flank, and form in its rear;
after forming, it will place itself on the right or left of
the regiment, according as it may be a right or left
flank company; but if not a flank company, it will
not resume its place in line unless by direct order
from the commanding officer.
The Assembly.
98. A line of skirmishers will assemble on its reserve
when there is no longer danger from the enemy. To
effect which, the captain commands:
Assemble on the Reserve.
99. At this command the reserve will be formed in
the precise order in which it stood before the deploy
ment. The skirmishers will assemble by groups of
fours, and direct themselves on the reserve in quick
time; on arriving, each group will resume its particu
lar place in line. The company being thus formed,
will rejoin their regiment.
100. Skirmishers may be assembled on the centre,
or upon the right or left group of the line, either
marching or at a halt; for this purpose, when the line
is marching, the captain will command:
Assemble on right group of third platoon.
101. At this the chief of third platoon will continue
to march straight forward. All the skirmishers on
76 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.
the right of the group designated will throw forward
the right shoulder, and moving in double quick time,
will close on this group, forming in two ranks as
they successively arrive, and then move straight for
ward in quick time; and in like manner, all those on
the left of this particular group, will throw forward
the outer shoulder, and close to the right, moving
diagonally towards the guide. At the instant the
groups close, the sergeants will move briskly to their
respective places, on the right of their platoons, in the
rear rank.
102. To assemble on the right or left, files will be
executed in the same manner; also the assembly,
while marching in retreat, except that the front rank
men will form and march in rear of the rear rank
men, and when the company is halted it will face to
the front. To assemble a line of skirmishers at a halt,
and on the same line they occupy, the captain will
give the same commands; the men will face towards
the point designated, reform groups while marching,
and thus arrive on the file that served as the point of
formation, the sergeants observing what is prescribed
in the preceding section .
To Deploy a Regiment as Skirmishers.
103. The regiment being in line of battle, and sup
posed to contain ten companies, should its com
mandant wish to deploy it on the right of the seventh
company, holding the two right companies in re
serve, he will signify his intention to the lieutenant
colonel, and through his aide to the major command
ing the companies designed for the reserve, indicating
to the lieutenant- colonel, at the same time, the direc
tion he wishes to give to the line, also the point where
the right of the seventh company will rest when de
ployed.
104. The lieutenant-colonel will then move rapidly,
and place himself about ten paces in front of the
right guide of the seventh company, and indicate to
him the point on which he is to direct his march, and
to the chief of that company the direction to be given
the line. The colonel will then command:
(Fig. 13.) 1. Regiment as Skirmishers. 2. On right of
Seventh Company, take intervals. 3. MARCH.
105. At the second command, majors will indicate to
their captains to detach the two left (or right) pla
toons of their companies as a reserve for each bat
talion; the major of the two right companies and the
first lieutenant will promptly execute what is pre
scribed in Nos. 15 and 16; the second battalion and the
..
Py
 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 77
right company of the third will face to the right by
command of their respective chiefs; at the same time
the fifth battalion and the left company of the fourth
will face to the left.
106. At the command march, the movement will
commence by the seventh and sixth companies, de
ploying forward; the seventh on its right file; the
sixth on its left file; the right guide of the seventh
marching on the point indicated to him bythe lieuten
ant-colonel.
107. The companies that have faced right and left
will move offin that direction ; the fifth company will
take an interval of one hundred and twenty paces,
counting from the left file of the sixth, when its chief
will deploy it forward on its left file; the fourth and
third companies will each take an interval of one
hundred and twenty paces, counting from the left file
of the company immediately in its rear, when each
will deploy forward on its left file.
108. The guides who conduct the groups on which the
the deployment is made, will direct their march about
twenty paces to the right of the right files of the com
panies already deployed, thus allowing for the deploy
ment of their respective groups on their left.
109. The eighth, ninth and tenth companies will each
take an interval of one hundred and twenty paces,
counting from the right file of the company imme
diately next, on its right, when their chiefs will de
ploy forward on the right file of their respective com
panies; the guides of these companies will direct their
march on the outer file of the company already de
ployed. Each company as they successively arrive
will align themselves on those already formed.
110. The reserves of each battalion will unite in rear
of the center of their respective battalions and be
established as echelons, in respect to each other; that
is the reserve of the fourth battalion, will take post
about one hundred and fifty paces in rear of the left
file of the seventh company; that of the third, one
hundred and forty, and that . of the second, one hund
red and thirty paces in rear of the centre of their re
spective battalions; that of the fifth at one hundred
and sixty paces in rear of the centre of that battalion ,
the reserves thus united will be formed as a company,
and commanded by the senior 1st lieutenant.
111. The major commanding the regimental reserve
on receiving orders to that effect, ploys his battalion
into column by company at half distance, and then
conducts it by the shortest route to the position indi
cated by the commanding officer.
112. The colonel, superintends the general deploy
 78 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.
ment and when completed, will move to a point,
where his view may best embrace all the parts in order
to direct their movements, being attended by the lieu
tenent-colonel, aide-de-camp, and one or two buglers.
113. The majors, after superintending the deploy
ment of their respective battalions, will place them
selves about eighty paces in rear of their centre, at,
tended by their battalion adjutants and one bugler,
whose duty will be to repeat signals, when necessary,
from the commanding officer; the music and color
without its guard, will be detached and left behind
with the regimental reserve.
114. If instead of deploying forward it should be de
sired to deploy by the flank, the seventh and sixth
companies will be moved forward ten or twelve paces,
halted, and then deployed by the flank, the seventh
on its right and the sixth on its left file; each of the
other companies will be marched by the flank, and as
soon as the last file of the company next towards the
direction has taken its interval, it will be moved upon
the line established by the seventh and sixth, halted
and deployed upon the same principles.
115. The regiment being in column, by companies
or battalions, will be deployed as skirmishers, by the
same commands and on the same principles; the
sixth and seventh, or the companies charged with
the direction, moving forward ten or twelve paces,
then deploying either forward orby a flank.
116. Reserves are placed in echelons, in order that
they may, in the event of a rally, protect themselves
without the danger of injuring each other. And bat
talion reserves are united to diminish the number of
echelons.
117. The colonel will cause a single battalion to de
ploy as skirmishers, on the same principles. In this
case, the regiment being in line, he will command:
1. First (or such) Battalion-as skirmishers. 2. On right
(or such)file-take intervals. 3. MARCH.
118. Atthe first command the major of the battalion
indicated in the command will promptly direct his
captains to detach the two left (or right) platoons as a
reserve from their companies; the 1st lieutenants
briskly executing what is prescribed in Nos. 15 and 16,
at the same time the lieutenant-colonel will indicaté
to the directing guide the point where the right (or
left) of the line is to rest when deployed.
119. At the command march, the major will move his
battalion forward ten or twelve paces, then command:
1. Battalion on right (or left) file offirst company-take
interval. 2. MARCH.
 "
རྩངས
།
COMM
P 79
 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 79
120. At this command the right company will de
ploy forward, its directing guide moving on the point
indicated by the lieutenant-colonel; the left company
will (ifthe first company deploys on its right file) face
by the left flank and take an interval of one hundred
and twenty paces from the right guide of the first,
then face by the right flank and deploy forward on
its right file; if the right company deploys forward on
its left file, the left company will deploy forward at
the same time, on its right file.
121. The reserved as soon as the movement com
mences will unite in rear of the battalion, and under
the direction of the senior lieutenant will follow the
movement of the skirmishers holding themselves at
about one hundred and fifty paces in rear of their
centre.
122. If the regiment should be in column by com
pany, or battalion, right or left in front; the colonel
may deploy the advance battalion forward on its cen
tre file or by its right and left flanks, on the same
principles.
123. From the foregoing examples rules may be ta
ken for all cases, whether by company, battalion, re
giment or brigades. In regimental or battalion skirm
Ishing, the extent of ground occupied by each com
pany is second at one hundred and twenty paces;
this interval is intended for three platoons only; the
two remaining platoons being detached as a reserve,
should the entire companies of a battalion be deploy
ed, the extent of ground thus occupied by each com
pany will be two hundred paces.
(Fig. 14.) The Rally.
124. The colonel may cause all the various move
ments prescribed for the company to be executed by
the battalion and regiment, by the same commands,
and according to the same principles. When he may
wish to rally the regiment he will cause the rally on
the regiment, to be sounded, and place the reserves in
opposition to protect this movement.
125. The battalions deployed as skirmishers, at this
signal will rally in squares, in their respective re
serves; each battalion reservé will join the first front
of the square, its chief throwing a platoon perpendi
cular to the rear from each flank, as a basis. The
skirmishers will form themselves rapidly into groups
on their officers and sergeants and then direct them
selves on their respective reserves in double quick
time diagonally towards each other so as to unite by
platoon with the greatest possible rapidity while
marching; the platoons of the right company will di
80 INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.
rect themselves on the right flank, and those ofthe
left company on the left flank of their respective re
serves, in this manner the third and second platoons
of right company and first and second of left will ar
rive first and form the the central fronts, and the
first platoon of the right, and third ofthe left company
will form the fourth front; the major and captains
will superintend the rally, and as each platoon ar
rives will assign them their positions and cause them
to face outwards.
126. The rally being effected the majors will profit
by any interval of time the enemy may allow, for
putting his battalion in safety, either in marching
upon the regimental reserve, or by seizing an advan
tageous position for this purpose the squares may be
removed by the right, left, first or fourth fronts, the
major commands: by such front, MARCH; when the
men will all face the direction given, the designated
front and move off together in a square.
127. If instead, the major should wish to break into
close column by platoons double, and march to the
rear, he will command:
1. On fourth front into column at half distance. 2. By
platoons doubled. 3. MARCH.
128. At the first command the captains will briskly
pass out and place themselves in front of their respec
tive platoons, comprising the fourth front, the fourth
front will stand fast, the three platoons, comprising
the right front, will face to the right, those composing
the left will face left, and those comprising the first
will face about, by command ofthe chiefs of platoons.
129. At the command march, the fourth front will
move straight forward; the platoons of the right front
will break by files to the right, and those of the left
front by files to the left and move on a line meeting
each other; on arriving within one pace of each other
the chiefs of all the platoons of the right front, will
command, by the right flank, march, and at the same
time chiefs of the left front will command, by the right
flank, march, when they will unite in the centre and
move off in the direction of the fourth front, as soon
as the two rear platoons of the right and left fronts
have united, those of the first front, will move for
ward in the trace of the fourth.
130. Ifin marching in this manner it should become
necessary to form a square, the major will command:
Form Square, MARCH.
131. At the command march, the fourth front will
halt, the platoons of the right and left fronts will
 MANUAL OF THE SABRE. 81
wheel left and right upon their former lines; those of
the first front will close up, halt and face about. As
the officers pass inside, the major may command,
guard against cavalry, guard, and if necessary cause
the front threatened, to fire by rank with the front
rank kneeling.
132. The battalion being again put in march on ar
riving near the regimental reserve will re-form in its
rear without regard to its number or designations,
but take positions in rear of the battalions already
formed.

MANUAL OF THE SABRE FOR

OFFICERS .
To Draw Sabre.
Two Motions.
1. (Fig. 1.) (1st.) Turn the head
slightly to the left, without de
ranging the position ofthe body,
seize the gripe with the right
hand, and draw the blade about
six inches out of the scabbard ,
pressing at the same time thé
Scabbard against the left thigh,
with the left hand, which seizes
it at the upper ring.
2. (2d.) Draw the sabre briskly
byextending the right arm fully;
carry the blade the back against
the hollow of the right shoulder,
the wrist resting against the
right hip, the little finger outside
the gripe, the arm slightly bent.
Present Sabre.
One Motion.
3. (Fig. 2.) Carry the sabre be
fore the centre of the body, the
arm half extended, the point
elevated; the blade perpendicu
Fig. 1. lar and between the eyes, the
guard at the hight of the shoulder, and about six in
ches from the chin, the edge to the left, the thumb ex
tended on the right side of the gripe, the little finger
by the side of the others.
F
82 MANUAL OF THE SABRE.
To Carry Sabre.
One Motion.
4. (Fig 3.) Carry the sabre to the
right shoulder, the edge to the front,
the back resting against the hollow
of the shoulder, the right hand
against the hip, the little finger out
side the gripe.
To Salute with the
Sabre. X
Three Motions.
5. (1st.) At the dis
tance of six paces
from the personage
to be saluted, bring
the sabre to present.
6. (2d.) Drop the
point of the sabre to
the ground by ex
tending the right
arm, at the same
W time turn the edgeto
the right, and bring
the right hand
against the right
thigh, the back ofthe
hand to the front,
and remain in this
position until the
person to whom the
salute is rendered
Fig. 2. shall have passed, or Fig. 3.
shall be passed six paces.
7. (3d.) Raise the sabre smartly and resume the
carry.
8. In a salute of the line, tendered the commandant
and upon similar occasions, officers will execute the
first and second motions, and remain in that position
until the salute is acknowledged by the touch ofthe
hat or cap, when they will promptly take the posi
tion ofcarry sabre.
Inspection ofthe sabre.
Three Motions.
9. (1st.) The sabre being at a carry, each officer at
the instant that the inspector arrives in front ofhim,
will bring his sabre to a present.
 COLOR SALUTE. 83
10. (2d.) Turn the wrist inwards to show the other
side of the blade, and back to a present.
11. (3d.) Retake the position of carry sabre,
Return Sabre.
Two Motions.
12. (1st.) Bring the sabre to a present.
13. (2d.) Carry the wrist opposite to and six inches
from the left shoulder, lower the blade and, pass it
across and along the left arm, the point to the rear;
turn the head slightly to the left and fix the eyes on
the opening in the scabbard, return the blade, turn
the head to the front, and drop the hands.

COLOR SALUTE .
1. In the ranks the color bearer, either at a halt or
in march, will carry the heel of the color-lance sup
ported in a boot atthe right hip, the right hand habit
ually at the hight of the shoulder on the lance to
hold it steady.
To Salute,
2. Slip the right hand along the lance to the hight
ofthe eye, seize it with the left near the heel, raise it
out of the boot and bring it before the centre of the
body, then with both hands drop the point forward
to an angle of about forty-five degrees from the per
pendicular and wave the color from right to left, and
again from left to right.
3. The salute being ended, replace the lance in the
boot, drop the left hand by the side, and slip the right
down to the hight of the shoulder.

INSTRUCTION FOR CHIEF OF MUSIC.

The music ofa regiment is composed of one fifer and
one drummer to each company, and one bass drum
mer to each battalion; they are enrolled in the com
panies, and subject to duty on all occasions where
their respective companies are called into requisition,
2. To the "Chief ofMusic" will be assigned their in
struction in all the beats and signals pertaining to ac,
tive service, and maneuvre; he will make selection
of suitable persons to fill all vacancies that may oc
cur, assign them to companies, and generally to have
the entire control of all the musicians and instru
84 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.
ments belonging to the regiment; he will also have
the selecting and purchase of requisite amount of in
struments for his regiment, and be required to keep
the same in constant repair; to this end he will draw
upon the several companies for all necessary funds,
and will make report of all his receipts and disburse
ments to his regimental commandant annually.
3. When a regiment assembles for parade, the mu
sic will first report to their respective companies,
then conform to what is prescribed in school of bat
talion No. 3, and regimental evolutions No. 6 and 13.
After being massed, should the regiment be put into
column for maneuvre, the musie will be conducted
in silence to their position , as indicated basis of in
struction, and will habitually hold themselves on that
flank, observing strictly to play only while the regi
ment is on the march. The chief of music may adopt
such signals as will enable him to move forward to the
rear, or by either flank in lieu of the tardiness of
wheeling.

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.

1. The following examples are drawn up for the for
mation and maneuvre of a separate battalion while
acting as isolated ,
Manner of Forming the Battalion in Line.
2. The battalion being assembled for parade, the ad
jutant on intimation tothat effect from the major will
cause the assembly to be beat or sounded, when each
company will be formed and the roll called, as pre
scribed in the school of the company.
3. The companies being formed, the adjutant will
cause the music of each company to unite,then post
them on the line in two ranks faced to the front, and
about four paces to the right of the ground to be oc
cupied by the right guide of the battalion; he will
then move briskly on the line to a point where the
left ofthe first company will rest when formed, halt,
face about, and align himselfon the front rank ofthe
music, then facing to them will take the position of
present subre.
4. At the instant the adjutant takes this position
the music will play and the first company be put in
march by the right flank; if the company should be
in front of the line thus marked, the captain will
direct the march around the left, passing in rear of
the adjutant, then move parallel to the line; if in rear
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 85
of the line, he will direct the march on the adjutant
and when within four paces will break by files to the
right.
5. When the right guide of the company arrives at
about four paces from the music, the captain will
command:
1. Company. 2. HALT. 3. FRONT.
6. At the instant the company faces to the front,
the captain and left guide will each move upon the
line; the captain at the point where the right of his
company is to rest, faced to the left, the left guide on
the line faced to the front, and touching lightly the
breast of the adjutant with his left arm, they being
assured in their positions by the adjutant, the cap
tain will add:
4. Company. 5. Left-DRESS. 6. FRONT. 7. Order- ARMS.
7. At the command front, the adjutant will face
about and move briskly on the line to a point where
the left of the second company should rest, halt, face
about and align himself on the front rank of the com
pany already formed; at the last command the cap
tain and 1st lieutenant will take post as in line.
8. The second company will approach the line as
prescribed in No. 4 and be halted and faced to the
front when its right guide is nearly abreast with the
left file of the first company; at the command front,
the right guide will place himself upon the line touch
ing elbows with the left guide of the first company,
the captain will move in rear of the adjutant, face to
the line and add:
Company Right-DRESS. FRONT. Order—ARMS.
9. The last command being executed, the captain
and 1st lieutenant will take post as in line; the adju
tant will move briskly to the right flank of the bat
talion and three or four paces in advance of the right
guide, then facing the line will command:
1. Attention Battalion. 2. Shoulder-ARMS. 3. Tothe rear
Open Order. 4. MARCH.
10. At the third command the 1st lieutenants will
move briskly around the outer flanks of their respec
tive companies and step off four paces to the rear,
counting from the front rank, then facing each other
will thus mark the alignment for the rear rank.
11. At the command march, the rear rank will step
offsmartly to the rear, pass a little the markers, halt,
without command, and be aligned by the lieutenant
of the first company on that of the second, by the
86 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.
command left-DRESS; the rank being aligned, he will
add FRONT, and each resume their places in line.
12. The adjutant seeing the last movement executed
will march along the front to the centre, face the
line and command, battalion, present-ARMS, then
facing about to the major, who is eight or ten paces
in front, will salute (the captains and 1st lieutenants
facing to the front and saluting at the same time) and
report, "the battalion is formed." The major will ac
knowledge the salute by touching his hat or cap when
the officers will bring their sabres to a carry and re
main faced to the front; the adjutant on intimation
to that effect will take his post as in line.
13. The major after drawing his sabre will com
mand: 1. Attention Battalion. 2. Shoulder-ARMS; at the
first command captains and 1st lieutenants will
promptly face the line, when the major will add such
other manual exercises as he may think proper, con
cluding with order-ARMS, REST.
14. At the command rest, captains and 1st lieuten
ants will promptly face tothe front, takethe position
ofrest and await further orders, and on the contrary
on a caution from the major for any particular move
ment they will instantly face to their men and ob
serve its execution. To close the ranks the major will
command:
1. ATTENTION Battalion. 2. Rear rank Close Order.
3. MARCH.
15. At the command march the rear rank will close
to its prescribed distance, each man covering accu
rately his file leader.
16. The major wishing to execute the firings will
cause the officers to take posts as in line of battle, for
this purpose he will command:
1. Officers posts in rear. 2. MARCH.
17. At this command the major and officers in front
will promptly take post as in "line of battle" passing
around the outer flanks of their companies.
18. The music, if on the flank, will face about and
march eight or ten paces to the rear, then face to the
right and passing in the rear of the line will halt op-.
posite the left file of the right company, and face to
the front; the major will then command:
1. Battalion load at will. 2. LOAD.
19. The major will next cause to be executed the
fire by company, the fire by battalion, the fire by file
and the fire by rank.
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 87
20, The fire by file will always be direct; the fire by
company, by rank or by battalion may either be
direct or oblique; when the firings are to be oblique
the major will give the caution at every round, right
(or left)-oblique, before that of aim.
21. The fire by company will be executed alternately
by the right and left companies; the right company
will fire first; the captain of the left will not give his
commands until he shall see two or three pieces in
the right at a ready; the captain of the first, after the
first discharge will observe the same rule in regard to
the second, and thus alternately.
22. The fire by file will commence on the right of
each company at once and be executed as indicated in
school ofthe company, No. 33, and following.
23. To cause the fire by company to be executed the
major will command:
1. Fire by company. 2. Commence Firing.
24. At the second command the captain of the first
company will cause the firing to commence by the
commands:
1. First company (or company A). 2. Ready, 3. Aim.
4. Fire. 5. Load.
25. The captain of the second company on seeing
two or three pieces in the right company at a ready
will cause his company to fire by the same commands,
observing to precede the command, company by that
(ofsecond, or company B, ) and thus the firing will con
tinue until the command or signal to cease firing, is
given, when the men of each company will execute
what is prescribed in school ofthe platoon No. 131.
26. To cause the fire by battalion the major will
command:
1. Fire by battalion. 2. Battalion. 3. READY. 4. AIM.
5. FIRE. 6. LOAD.
27. To fire by file the major will command:
1. Fire by file. 2. Battalion. 3. READY. 4. Commence
Firing.
28. At the fourth command the firing will com
mence on the right of each company as prescribed in
school of the company, No. 33 and following.
29. To cause the fire by rank the major will com
mand:
1. Fire by rank. 2. Battalion. 3. READY. 4. Rear rank,
5. AIM. 6. FIRE. 7. LOAD.
30. This fire will be executed on the same principles
88 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.
prescribed in school of the company, No. 38 and fol
lowing.
31. When the major shall wish the battalion to fire
to the rear he will command:
1. Face by the rear rank. 2. Battalion. 3. About- FACE.
32. At the first command the officers and music will
pass briskly around the flanks and place themselves
before the front rank, faced to the rear, each opposite
to his place in line ofbattle; at the third the battalion
will face about.
33. The battalion having faced about the major will
cause all the firings to be executed by the same com
mands as if faced by the front rank.
34. The companies "though faced about" will pre
serve their former letters or designation as first and
second company .
35. The fire by file will commence on the left ofeach
company, now become the right, and the fire by rank
by the front, now become the rear,the ranks preserv
ing their denominations.
36. To resume its proper front the major will com
mand.
1. Face by thefront rank. 2. Battalion. 3. About-FACE.
37. At this the battalion will resume its proper
front, the officers and music passing to their proper
places in line of battle.
38. The major in order not to fatigue the men will
occasionally cause arms to be ordered, and command:
Battalion- REST; then resume their proper posi
tions, he will command: Attention BATTALION and
proceed with the exercises.
Different modes ofpassing from Line into Column.
39. The battalion being in line or line ofbattle they
will habitually break into column by company; they
may also break by platoon, and in either case right
or left in front. In the following exercises the bat
talion will be supposed in line, with the music eight
or ten paces in rear ofthe centre of the battalion.
40. To break by company to the right, the major
will command:
1. By company, right wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. (or double
quick MARCH,
41, At the first command the 1st lieutenants, will
promptly place themselves without the point where
the left of their respective companies will rest when
the wheel is completed to mark the line, observing to
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 89
place themselves on a supposed line drawn between
the heels of the right guide and those of the sergeant,
covering him.
42. At the command march, each company will
wheel to the right, upon the principles prescribed for
the wheel from a halt; when the left guide who con
ducts the marching flank arrives near the 1st lieu
tenant, captains will command:
1. Such company. 2. HALT.
43. At the second command, the company will halt;
the left guide will promptly place himself on the
alignment faced to the front, and touching lightly the
right breast of the lieutenant with his left elbow, the
captain will observe that there is only sufficient
room between the right and left guides to contain the
intermediate files and then add:
3. Left-DRESS. 4. FRONT.
44. A battalion in line may break into column by
platoons, on the principles prescribed in school of the
company, No. 106 and following. It may also break
by company or platoons to the left according to the
same principles and by inverse means.
45. The music will conform to the direction and
movements of the battalion, holding itself unless in
passing defiles, or in column in route at from four to
ten paces in rear of centre, according to the extent of
front occupied by the battalion in column,
46. The major will not be required in seperate bat
talion evolutions to have any fixed place, but will
move where his services are most needed.
47. If the major should wish to move the column
forward after wheeling without causing it to halt, he
will caution the battalion to that effect, and then
command:
1. By company, right wheel. 2. MARCH.
48. At the second command the music will play and
the companies will wheel to the right on fixed pivots,
when the marching flanks arrive near the perpen
dicular, the major will command:
3. Forward. 4. Guide Left. 5. MARCH.
49. At the fourth command the left guide of the
leading company will instantly take points of direc
tion, aided by the battalion adjutant; at the fifth,
given at the instant the first company has completed
the wheel, the company will move straight forward,
the men touching elbows to the left; the guide ofthe
first marching on the points indicated, and the guide
of the second following in his trace.
90 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.
To breakto the rear by the right or left into column and to
advance or retire by the right or left of companies.
50. The major wishing to break by the right to the
rear into column by company, he will command:
1. By the right of companies to the rear into column. 2.
MARCH, (or double quick MARCH.)
51. At the first command the captains will com
mand: 1. Such company. 2. Right-FACE, and move
briskly to the right of his company, placing his breast
lightly against the left arm of the left guide of the
company next on the right of his own.
52. At the word march each captain will command:
file RIGHT, when the first file of each company will
wheel to the right and march perpendicular to the
rear. The other files coming up successively to wheel
on the same spot.
53. The captains will stand fast, see their companies
file past, and at the instant the last file shall have
wheeled, each captain will command:
1. Such company. 2, HALT. 3. FRONT. 4. Left-DRESS.
51. At the instant the company faces to the front, its
left guide will place himself so that his left arm may
touch lightly the right breast of the captain.
55. At the fourth the company will align itself on its
left guide, the captain so directing it that the new
line may be perpendicular to the old one.
56. The battalion being in line and marching to the
front, the major wishing to break into column by
company to the rear by the right, he will command:
1. By the right of companies to the rear into column.
2. MARCH.
57. At the first command the captains will instantly
give the caution: Such company. By the right flank.
File right, and move briskly to the right of their com
panies; at the word march, each company will face to
the right, then move off by files to the rear; the cap
tains will stand fast, and as the last file of their com
panies arrives abreast with them each will command:
By the left flank guide left-MARCH, when each com
pany will face to the left and move off in column.
58. To break to the rear by the left the major will
give the same commands, substituting left for right,
the movements will be executed on the same princi
ples, and by inverse means.
59. The battalion being in line and at a halt, ifthe
major should wish to advance or retire by the right of
companies, he will command.
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 91
1. By the right of companies to the front (or rear).
2. MARCH.
60. At the first commandthe captains will instantly
command: 1. Such company. 2. Right FACE, and move
briskly to the right of their companies. At the com
mand march, each captain will add: file left, and plac
ing himselfon the left of his leading guide will con
duct his company perpendicularly to the front.
61. As soon as the movement commences the major
will command: guide right (or left) when the guides
will dress to the right or left according to the indica
tion given, observing to preserve accurately his dis
tance.
62. If the battalion be in march and the major
should wish to advance or retire by the right of com
panies, he will give the same commands prescribed in
No. 59. In this case at the first command the captains
will each command: 1. Such company. 2. By the right
flank. 3. File left (or right, if tothe rear), and at the word
MARCH, place themselves on the left of their leading
guides and conduct their companies to the front (or
rear).
63. To advance or retire by the left of companies the
movements will be executed by the same means and
commands substituting left for right.
64. Should the major wish to advance or retire by
platoon from the right of companies the line being at
a halt, he will command:
1. Byplatoonsfrom the right of companies. 2. To thefront.
3. MARCH.
65. At the first command the chiefs offirst platoon
in each company will caution their platoons to stand
fast. The captain will face to the line and command:
1. Such company. 2. Right-FACE, when all except
the first platoon will face to the right.
66. At the word march, the first platoon in each com
pany will move straight forward, the platoons that
have faced to the right will move off in that direction
and when the chief ofthe second platoon arrives near
the trace of the first he will command: 1. Second pla
toon, by the left flank- MARCH, when the men ofthis
platoon will face tothe left and move forward, follow
ing the first; the third platoon will come up and break
to the left on the same ground and so on from right to
left.
67. If the battalion be in march and the major
should wish to advance by platoons from the right of
companies he will give the same commands prescrib
ed in No. 64. The captains at the first command will
each instantly command:
92 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.
1. Such company by the rightflank. 2. Platoons break to
left.
68. At the word march, given by the major the first
platoon in each company will move straight forward,
the others having faced by the right flank at the com
mand march, will move forward and break to the left
successively upon the same ground the first platoon
occupied, then follow in the trace of the first.
69. Ifthe battalion be advancing by the right or left
of companies by file or by platoons, to form line to
the front the major will command:
1. By companies into line. 2. MARCH.
70. At the command march, briskly repeated by the
captains, each company will form into line; as pre
scribed in school of the company No. 95, and follow
ing.
71. Ifthe battalion be retiring by the right of com
panies and the major should wish to form line facing
the front, he will first cause the companies to face
about while marching and form line by the same
commands and means prescribed in No. 69, and fol
lowing.
72. The major will cause the foregoing movements
to be executed in double quick time, by preceding the
command march, with that of double quick.
Toploy the battalion into close column by companies.
73. To ploy the battalion into column by company
right in front, the major will command:
1. Close column by companies at half distance, right in
front. 2. MARCH .
74. At the first command, the captain of the first
company will caution it to stand fast; the captain of
the second will command: 1. Second company. 2.
Right-FACE, then hastening to the right of his com
pany will break two files to the rear.
75. At the word march, the second company will
step off briskly by file to the rear, and on gaining a
distance equal to half its breadth, the captain will
command: 1. file left, and halting himself, at the point
where his company wheels by files to the left, and as
the last file wheels he will add: 2. HALT. 3. FRONT. 4.
left DRESS.
76. At the third, the left guide will place himself
promptly on the direction, and at a distance equal to
halfthe breadth of the company, in rear of the left
guide of the first, being corrected in this position by
the 1st lieutenant. At the fourth, the company will
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 93
align themselves on this guide as heretofore ex
plained.
77. To ploy the battalion into column in front ofthe
first company, the major will give the same com
mands, substituting left for that of right in front. In
this case, the captain of the second company will
cause files to break to the front, and then file right,
and form his company in front of the first, on the
same principles and at the same distance.
78. To ploy the battalion into column on left com
pany, right or left in front will be executed on the
same principles and by inverse means.
To march in Column at full distance.
79. The battalion being in column, by company at
full distance, if the major should wish to put it in
march, he will indicate to the leading guide two dis
tinct objects in front, on the line which the guides
ought to follow, the guide placing his shoulders in a
square with that line, will take the most distant ob
ject as the point of direction, and the other as an in
termediate point.
80. These dispositions being made, the major will
command:
1. Column forward. 2. Guide left. 3. MARCH.
81. At the command march the column will step off,
conforming to what is prescribed in school of the com
pany, No. Ill and following, the leading guide always
maintaining himself in the direction, by marching
steadily on the two points indicated.
82. The guide of the rear company will be responsi
ble for both step and distance, marching in the trace
ofthe first.
83. The battalion being in march, the major will
cause the about to be executed while marching; to this
effect he will command:
1. Battalion Right-about. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right.
84. At the command march, the companies will face
to the right-about in marching, and the column will
then move forward in the opposite direction; the
captains and 1st lieutenants will remain behind the
front rank.
85. When the major shall wish to march by the front
rank, he will give the same commands prescribed
in No. 83, substituting guide left for that of guide right.
He will also exercise the battalion in marching by
the flank, while in column by companies, which will
be conducted on the same principles as prescribed for
the advance or retire, by the right or left of com
panies.
 94 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.
To change direction in column at full distance.
86. The battalion being in column at full distance,
and marching in the cadenced step, if the major
should wish to change direction, he will cause
the adjutant to establish himself as a marker, at
the point where the change ought to commence,
presenting his breast to the marching flank of the
column; the adjutant, no matter to which side the
change of direction is to be made, will take post on the
opposite side, remaining there until the last subdivi
sion has marched past him. The leading subdivision
being within a few paces of the marker, the major
will command:
Change direction to the left (or right.)
87. At this, the captain of the leading company, if
the change is to the left, will command: guide right.
The right guide will then direct himself so as to graze
the breast of the marker with his right arm, and on
arriving near this marker, the captain will command:
such company left wheel, MARCH. At the word march,
given at the instant that the guide is abreast with the
marker, the company wheels to the left, on the princi
ples préscribed for the wheel on the march. The
wheel being completed, the captain will command:
guide left,forward, that is, if the guide was left previous
to commencing the change of direction.
88. The chief ofthe next company will execute what
has just been prescribed for the first.
89. In a column of several battalions, the adjutant
of the first will be replaced by the adjutant of the
second battalion , as soon as the last subdivision of his
battalion has passed, and thus from front to rear.
90. If the change of direction is to be made to the
right, each captain will command: guide left, (provided
the guide is not already there,) and after the wheel is
completed, guide right, forward.
91. The column being in march, if the major should
wish to halt it, he will command:
1. Column. 2. HALT.
92. At the second command, briskly repeated by the
captains, the column will halt, the men themselves
rectifying their positions in the ranks, the guides
will stand fast, though they may have lost direction
or distance.
93. The major, wishing to form line, will execute
what is prescribed in school of the company, No. 140,
and then command:
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 95
1. By companies left into line wheel. 2. MARCH.
94. At the first command, each captain will caution
his company to wheel to the left. At the word march
the companies will wheel to the left, as prescribed for
the wheel from a halt; the captains, when the march
ing flanks of their companies arrives within three
paces of the perpendicular, will command:
1. Such Company. 2, HALT.
95. The adjutant will take the position prescribed
for the 1st lieutenant, school of the company, No.
142, and at the instant the companies halt, the right
guide of each will place himself upon the line, and
be corrected by the adjutant; he will then com
mand:
1. Battalion. 2. Right DRESS. 3. FRONT
96. At the second command, the men of each com
pany will align themselves to the right on their
guides. At the third, they will turn their heads tothe
front, and the officers resume their places in line.
97. The major will exercise the battalion in all the
different formations prescribed in the school of the
company, both in quick and double quick time, to
gether with the rules for skirmishing, the principles
and commands are the same, simply substituting in
the commands battalion for that of company, and com
pany for that ofplatoons.
98. The adjutant will execute what is prescribed
for the 1st lieutenants, except in skirmishing. The
captains in columns of companies, will repeat all
the commands prescribed for chiefs of platoons, when
in column by platoons, substituting in the commands
company for that ofplatoon, and in marching in column
by platoon, will have a general superintendence over
all the movements oftheir company.
99. Captains will not repeat the commands march
and halt only in cases of changing direction, and in
different formations, where these commands will
apply to their companies individually, unless the
major should be at too great a distance to be heard
distinctly.
100. The men will consequently be instructed, in
moving from a halt, that at the command march,
given by the major, to all step offat once, and at the
command halt, to stop short on the advanced foot and
bring up the other by the side ofit.
The change of direction in column at half distance.
101. A column at half distance being in march, will
change direction by the same commands and means
96 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALI .
ON
prescribed for a column at full distance; but as the
distance between companies is less, the pivot man
will take steps of fourteen inches instead of nine, and
seventeen inches instead of eleven, according to the
gait, in order to clear the wheeling point; accordingly
the marching flank will describe the arc of a larger
circle, in order to facilitate this movement.
Deployment of a column at half distance.
102. The column being at a halt right in front, and
closed to half distance, should the major wish to de
ploy the column on the right company, he will com
mand:
1. On the first company deploy column. 2. MARCH.
103. At the first command the adjutant will move
briskly on the line, to a little beyond where the
left of the second company will rest as a marker.
The captain of the first company will caution his
company to stand fast. The captain of the second
company will command: 1. Second company left FACE,
and place himself by the side of his left guide.
104. At the command march, the chief of the right
company will command: 1. First company. 2. Right
dress. 3. FRONT. The left company will be put in
march, the left guide conducting it parallelly to the
line; the captain will stand fast and see the company
file past, and when its right guide shall be abreast
with him he will command: HALT. FRONT. FORWARD.
Guide right, MARCH; then placing himself in front of
the company will halt it four paces in rear ofthe line,
and align it on the right company.
105. To deploy column on rear company, the prin
ciples are the same, the major substituting in
command second (or rear) for that offirst company. the
106. In this case the rear company will stand fast;
the adjutant will mark the point where the
right of the line is to rest; the first company will face
to the right, the captain placing himself abreast with
the right guide; his company will then file past him
and when the left guide is abreast with him, he will
command: HALT. Right-FACE. Forward--MARCH;
when the company will face to the right, and after
passing the line three or four paces, he will command :
1. Company HALT. 2. About FACE. 3. Left DRESS.
107. At the second command the company will face
about, then at the third will align themselves to the
left on the rear company.
108. After the battalion is sufficiently established in
the above movements, they will execute them with
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 97
out halting, that is the captain of the left company,
instead of halt, front, and then forward, will com
mand: Bytheright flank, march, and the captain of the
first, instead of halting and facing to the right, will
command: By the right flank, and after passing the
line three or four paces, add:
Right-ABOUT, HALT, Left- DRESS .

REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
Manner offorming a regiment in line.
1. On occasions ofgeneral or regimental parade, the
regiment will he formed in line in the following
manner.
2. Thirty minutes before the line should be formed
the aide-de-camp (who is herein charged with the
duties of regimental adjutant) will cause the "assem
bly" to be sounded, when each company will be form
ed upon its own ground, and roll called, as prescribed
in school of the company.
3. The adjutants will then promptly form their re
pective battalions as indicated in school of the battal
ion, No. 3 and following.
4. At the same time that the battalions are forming,
the aide-de-camp will select the ground where the
regiment is to form in line, and cause "to the color" to
be sounded.
5. At this signal the lieutenant-colonel, aide-de
camp and chief of music will move briskly upon the
line, and take post as follows: The lieutenant-colonel
with sabre at a carry, on the line, faced to the front,
and four paces to the right of the ground to be occu
pied by the right file of the first battalion; the aide
de-camp on the line about where the left of the first
battalion will rest when formed, and facing to the
lieutenant-colonel; the chief of music on the line
faced to the front, and ten paces to the right of the
lieutenant-colonel, each with sabre at carry.
6. As soon as the sound to the color has ceased, the
majors will put their respective battalions in march
by the right flank, or in column by platoons right in
fro it, and headed by their music, will direct their
march in rear and opposite to their places in line,
each will successively halt opposite their places in
line, and face to the front, and observe that they are as
in echellon in respect to each other, from right to left;
that is, the first battalion will halt opposite to, and
four paces in rear of the ground it is to occupy when
Q
98 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
in line, the second halting opposite to, and eight
paces in rear, and thus from right to left.
7. The first battalion after halting and facing to the
front by command of its chief, the right and left
guides will move briskly upon the line, and be cor
rected in their position by the aide-de-camp, the ma
jor will place himself on the line on the right of the
right guide, and command:
1. First battalion. 2. Right-DRESS.
8. At the second command the battalion will move
forward by files from the right, and place themselves
on the alignment between the right and left guides,
dressing to the right; the alignment being executed
he will next add: 3. FRONT. 4. Order- ARMS; when the
battalion and company officers will take post as in
line.
9. As soon as the aide-de-camp has established the
right and left guides of the first battalion, he will face
about, and briskly move on the line, halt and face
about at the point where the left of the second bat
talion is to rest, will await the arrival of this battal
ion and correct the position of its markers, and thus
from right to left.
10. The aide-de-camp having taken this position
the major of the second battalion will command:
1. Second battalion, forward. 2. Guide right. 3. MARCH.
11. At the command march, the battalion will move
forward, its right guide directing himself on a point,
four paces to the left of the last file of the battalion
already formed; on arriving within four paces, the
major will command: HALT; at this the battalion will
halt, and the right and left guides will move on the
line as prescribed for the guides ofthe first battalion;
the adjutant will observe that the right guide is at
exactly four paces from the left file of the battalion
on his right; the major will then command, and cause
tobe executed what has just been prescribed for the
first battalion , from this position , after which the offi
cers will take their positions as in line.
12. The chiefs of the remaining battalions will suc
cessively cause to be executed what has been pre
scribed for the second; each moving upon the line as
soon as that which preceded it has halted.
13. The music of each battalion will remain at their
head and play only when their battalions are in
march, and as their respective battalions are halted
within four paces of the ground they are to occupy in
line, they will cease playing, face by the right flank;
the music of the first will place themselves on the left
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 99
of the chief of music; that of the second and remain
ing battalions after facing by the right flank, will
march in silence in rear of the battalions already
formed, to the position occupied by the chief of mu
sic, who will as they successively arrive cause them to
form in three ranks and faced to the front, the entire
music of the regiment being consolidated, the chief
will take his post three paces in front of their centre,
and in line with the company officers.
14. The extreme left battalion having formed on the
line, the aide- de-camp will remain on its left flank,
the colonel will take his post in front and the surgeon
in the rear; the lieutenant-colonel will move four
paces to the front, face the line and command: 1 .
Attention regiment. 2. Shoulder-ARMs, and correct the
alignment if necessary, then march along the front
to the centre, face to the right and pass the line of
majors six or eight paces, halt, face about, and add:
3. Örder-ARMS . 4. Parade-REST. 5. Music-BEAT OFF,
when it will commence on the right, move ten paces
forward, wheel to the left and beat along the line
from right to left in common time, then facing about,
will beat from left back to its place on the right, in
quick time.
15. The music having ceased, the lieutenant-colonel
will command:
1. Regiment-ATTENTION. 2. Shoulder-ARMS. 3. To the
rear, open order. 4, MARCH.
16. At the first command, majors and company offi
cers will face about to the line; at the third, 1st lieu
tenants will promptly execute what is prescribed in
school of the battalion No. 10, except that they will
face to the front and be corrected in their positions by
the aide-de-camp; at the fourth, the rear rank will
step off smartly to the rear, pass the line of markers,
haft without command and be aligned by the aide
de camp ,
17. The aide-de-camp on seeing this rank aligned
will command: FRONT; he will then quit the left
flank, move twelve paces forward, face to the right,
march along the line to the centre of the left wing,
halt and face to the front; the surgeon and other staff
officers, whose positions have not been prescribed)
will close to thirty paces in rear ofthe centre, the 1st
lieutenants will move to their posts in line.
18. The instant these officers take their posts, the
lieutenant colonel will command: Present--ARMS,
when the line will present arms, officers facing about
and saluting; seeing this executed he will face about
to the commanding officer, salute and report "the
regiment is formed."
100 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
19. The colonel having acknowledged the salute of
the line the officers will, bring their sabres to a carry
and the lieutenant-colonel on intimation will take
post as in line.
20. The colonel after saluting, will draw his sabre,
and command:
1. Regiment. 2. Shoulder-ARMS. 3. Rear rank close or
der. 4. MARCH.
21. At the first command the officers will face about
to the line; at the fourth the rear rank will close on
the front rank, to the prescribed distance, each man
covering accurately his file leader.
22. The ranks being closed the colonel may cause
the manual ofarms to be executed, ending with order
arms.
23. The colonel may next cause loading at will, and
the firings to be executed, for this purpose he will
command :
1. Officers, post in rear. 2. MARCH,
24. At this command the officers will execute what
is prescribed in school of battalion, No. 17, except
that the colonel, and field officers will pass through
the intervals between the battalions; the music will
promptly take post as in line.
25. The fire by company, and the fire by le will
always be direct; the fire by battalion, by wing, by
regiment and by rank, may be either direct or ob
Jique, when the firing is to be oblique the colonel will
give the caution, right or left oblique, at every round
before that of aim.
26. The fire by company will be executed alternate
ly by the right and left companies of each battalion as
if the battalion were alone, conforming to what is pre
scribed in school of the battalion , No 21.
27. The fire by battalion will be executed by the odd
and even numbered battalions alternately; the odd
numbered will fire first; the majors of the even num
bered will not give their first commands until they
see two or three pieces in the odd numbered at a rea
dy; the majors of the odd numbered battalions will,
after the first discharge, observe the same rule in re
gard to the even numbered.
28. The fire by file, will commence on the right ofall
the companies at once, and will be executed as pre
scribed in school of the company, No. 35.
29. The color guard will not fire, but reserve itself
for the defence of the color.
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 101
The Fire by Company.
30. To cause the fire by company to be executed, the
colonel will command:
1. Fire by Company. 2. Commence Firing.
31. At the second command the captains ofthe odd
numbered companies will commence the fire by the
commands prescribed in school of battalion , No. 24;
the captains of the even numbered companies will
give in their turn the same commands, conformingto
what is prescribed in school of the battalion , No. 25.
32. When the colonel shall wish to execute the fire
by battalions, he will give the same commands, ob
serving to substitute battalion for company,
33. In this case the majors of the odd numbered
battalions will commence the fire, by the same com
mands prescribed in school of the battalion, No. 24,
except that they will substitute battalion for that of
company; the majors of the even numbered battalions
will in their turn give the same commands; and thus
the fire will continue until the signal or command to
cease firing is given, when each will execute what is
indicated in school of the platoon, No. 146.
34. To cause the fire by wing the colonel will com
mand:
1. Fire by wing. 2. Right wing. 3. READY. 4. AIM.
5. FIRE. 6. LOAD..
35. This fire will be executed alternately by the
wings.
The fire by regiment.
36. This will be executed by the commands last pre
scribed, substituting for the first two: 1. Fire by regi
ment. 2. Regiment.
The fire by file.
87. To cause this to be executed the colonel will
command:
1. Fire byfile. 2. Regiment. 3. READY. 4. Commence
firing.
38. At the fourth command, the fire will commence
on the right of each company, as prescribed in school
ofthe company, No. 35.
The fire by rank.
39. To cause the fire by rank to be executed the
colonel will command;
 102 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
1. Fire by rank. 2. Regiment. 3. READY. 4. Rear rank.
5. AIM. 6. FIRE. 7. LOAD.
40. This fire will be executed as explained in school
ofthe company No. 38 and following; the colonel will
observe the progression prescribed for the two ranks,
which should fire alternately .
To fire bythe rear rank.
41. When the colonel may wish to cause the regi
ment to fire to the rear, he will command:
1. Face by the rear rank. 2. Regiment, 3. About-FACE.
42. At the first command the officers and music will
all briskly pass through the intervals and place them
selves before the front rank and faced to the rear,
each opposite his place in line of battle; at the third
the regiment will face about, when the colonel may
cause the different firings to be executed, by the same
commands as if faced by the front rank.
43. The companies, battalions and wings, though
faced about will preserve their former designations ,
as first, second or third companies or battalions, and
right and left wings.
44. The fire by file will commence on the left of each
company, now become the right, and the fire by rank
by the front rank, now become the rear, the ranks pre
serving their denominations.
45. To resume the proper front the colonel will com
mand:
1. Face by the front rank. 2, Regiment. 3. About-FACE.
4. Officers and Music. 5. Posts in line. 6. MARCH.
46. At the third command, the regiment will face to
the front; at the sixth, the surgeon and such officers
as are not will briskly resume their relative positions
in line; the music passing through an interval will
briskly take position as indicated in No. 24.
47. The music on occasions of maneuvres, when the
regiment is first formed, should the colonel wish, in
stead of executing the different firings, to put the regi
ment in march; the chief ofmusic at the first prepara
tory commands will instantly face the music about,
and marching in quick time, will promptly take post
as in line, then conform to the movement ofthe
regiment,holding themselves always at about fifteen
paces in rear or to the right or left of their posi
tions, whether the regiment is in march to the front,
or in column right or left in front.
t Movements from line.
48. The regiment being in line, will habitually break
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 103
into column by company; it may also break by pla
toons or battalion upon the same principles.
49. To break into column by company to the right,
the colonel will command:
(Fig. 17.) 1. By companies, right wheel. 2. MARCH.
50. At the first command the captains will face
about to their companies and briskly caution it to
wheel to the right; the 1st lieutenants will promptly
place themselves on the line where the left oftheir
companies will rest after the wheel is completed, and
facing to the right guide of the company, will thus
mark the line, observing to place themselves exactly
on the prolongation of a supposed linedrawn between
the heels ofthe right guide and the sergeant covering
him.
51. At the command march, each company will
wheel to the right according to the principles pre
scribed for the wheel from a halt; when the left guide,
who conducts the marching flank, shall arrive with
in three paces of the 1st lieutenant, the captain will
command:
1. First (or such) company. 2. HALT. 3. Left-DRESS.
4. FRONT.
52. At the second command the company will halt,
the left guide will instantly move upon the line faced
to the front, and place himself, touching lightly the
right breast of the lieutenant with his left arm.
53. The captain will observe that there is only suffi
cient room between the right and left guides to con
tain the intermediate files, and at the third command
the company will promptly align themselves on the
left guide.
54. The majors will give a general observance to the
wheelings of their respective battalions, correcting
any errors that may occur, but will not repeat the
commands unless the colonel should be at too great a
distance to be distinctly heard by the captains.
55. The regiment may break into column by bat
talions on the same commands, the colonel substitut
ing in the command battalion for that of company.
56. In this case the adjutant will mark the point
where the left of the battalion is to rest, and the
wheel will be conducted by the major, who will ob
serve what is prescribed for the captains when break
ing into column by company.
57. To break into column by platoons, the principles
prescribed in school of the company, No. 107 and fol
lowing, will be observed.
58. The line may be broken into column by platoon,
104 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
company or battalion left in front, on the same prin
ciples, and by the same commands, substituting left
for right.
59. When a regiment breaks by battalion to the
right, and there is an odd company, the captain of
this company; after wheeling will cause it to oblique
to the left, halt it at company distance from the pre
ceding battalion place his left guide on the direction
of the column, and align his company to the left;
should the line break to the left, this odd company
will be in front, in this case the captain will cause
it to oblique to the right, halt it at battalion distance
from the battalion immediately in its rear, place his
right guide on the direction of the other guides, and
align his company to the right.
60. Should the colonel wish to move the column
forward after wheeling, without halting, he will cau
tion the regiment to this effect, and command:
1. By companies, right wheel. 2. MARCH,
61. At the first command the captains will execute
what is prescribed in No. 50; at the second the music
will play, and the companies will wheel to the right
on fixed pivots; when the left guides arrive near the
perpendicular the colonel will add:
3. Forward. 4. Guide left, 5. MARCH.
62. At the fourth command the guide of the leading
company will instantly take points of direction, in
dicated to him by the lieutenant-colonel; at the fifth,
given at the instant the wheel is completed, the com
panies will cease to wheel and march straight for
ward, touching elbows to the left, the guide of the
leading company marching on the points indicated,
and the guides of the others following directly in his
trace.
To break bythe right or left to the rear into column,
63. To break to the rear by the right into column by
companies, the colonel will command:
(Fig. 18.) 1. By the right of companies, to the rear into
column. 2. MARCH..
64. This executed as prescribed in school of
the battalion , No. 51 and following; the majors will
observe that the captains align their companies on a
line perpendicular to the one just occupied.
65. To break to the rear into column while on the
march to the front, the colonel will give the same
commands; the captains will command and cause to
 e
8
Fis
nd
‫מ‬
U.

ute
iste
the

ling
.in
ifth,
com.
for
ofthe
ated,s
nhi

NR.
nn by
er into
100lof
rs will
esona
on the
same
auseto
 P 103 P 104

HIJIJIJIJ
6 小

!!
!
!

&
! !!!

Fig. 17. Fig. 18.

 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. '105
be executed what is indicated in school of the battal
ion , No. 57.
66. To break to the rear into column by battalions,
right in front, the colonel will indicate in the com
mands: Bythe right of battalions instead of companies;
the majors will each command, and cause to be ex
ecuted what has been prescribed for the captains.
67. To break to the rear into column left in front,
the colonel will command:
1. By the left of companies (or battalions) to the rear into
column. 2. MARCH.
68. This will be executed on the same principles,
and by inverse means; the captains (or majors) com
manding, leftface, file-LEFT, and move briskly to the
left of their companies (or battalions) then after the
last file has wheeled, add:
HALT. FRONT. Right- DRESS. FRONT.
To advance or retire by the right or left ofcompanies or
battalions.
69. The regiment being in line, and at a halt, should
the colonel wish to advance or retire by the right of
companies he will give the same commands prescrib
ed in school ofthe battalion, No.59, the captains observ
ing what is indicated in school of the battalion , No. 60.
70. As soon as the movement is executed the colonel
will command: guide left, (right) or (centre), when the
leading guides will conform to the direction in
dicated.
71. Should the colonel wish to advance by the right
ofbattalions he will substitute in the commands bat
talions for that of companies; the majors will command
and cause to be executed what has been prescribed
for the captains in advancing by the right ofcompan
ies.
72. To advance or retire by the right or left of com
panies or battalions, while marching, the same com
mands and principles prescribed in school of the
battalion, No. 62 and following, will be observed.
73. To re-form line, either advancing or retiring, the
colonel will observe the principles, and give the same
commands indicated in school of the battalion, No. 69
and following.
Toploythe regiment into column in mass.
74. This movement will be executed either by com
pany or battalion, on the right or left company or
battalion, or on any intermediate company or bat
talion, right or left in front,
106 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
75. To ploy the regiment into column in mass by
battalion, in rear of the first, the colonel will com
mand:
(Fig. 19.) 1. Column in mass by battalions right infront.
2. On first battalion into column. 3. MARCH.
76 At the second command, the majors will all face
to the line; that ofthe first will caution his battalion
to stand fast; the chiefs of all the others will prompt
ly command: 1. Such battalion . 2. Right-FACE, then
moving to the right flank of his battalion , will break
two files to the rear; the first will break the whole
depth ofthe two ranks, the second less.
77. At the third command, the chief ofthe first bat
talion will command: 1. First battalion. 2. Left-DRESS,
at this the left guide will place himself on the direc
tion indicated by the lieutenant-colonel, and this
battalion will align itself to the left, when the major
will add: FRONT, and the officers will resume their
places as in line."
78. All the other battalions, at the command march,
each conducted by its major, will step off together to
take their places in column; the first will gain in
wheeling by files to the rear, the space of ten paces,
which should separate its guide from the guide of the
first battalion, so that when the column is formed
the battalions will be separated eight paces; the chief
of this battalion on arriving on the direction of the
left guide of the first, will himselfhalt, cause his bat
talion to file left past him; the guide will direct his
course parallel to first battalion , when the last filehas
made the wheel to the left, the major will command:
1. Second battalion. 2. HALT. 3. FRONT. 4. Left-DRESS.
79. At the third command the battalion will face to
the left, the left guide will promptly place himself on
the direction and ten paces in the rear of the left
guide of the first; the adjutant will place himself
a like distance in rear of the right guide and face to
the left.
80. At the fourth the battalion will align itself on
the left guide as heretofore explained, when the ma
jor will add: FRONT, and the officers will resume their
posts as in line.
81. The third, fourth and fifth battalions will direct
themselves diagonally towards, but a little in rear of
the points at which they are to enter the column; at
about six paces from the left flank of the column, the
head of each will incline a little to the left in order to
enter the column parallel, observing to leave a dis
 LUTIONS. 107
guide and that ofthe
n the direction ofthe
his battalion to file
cause to be executed
for the chief of the
vill place themselves
ide to direct the align
ve that his battalion
preceeds him, which
and place himself be
anybattalion should
ich will only happen
ef, such battalion will
it his fault may not be
tend the movement,
S promptly command
escribed principles.
Incing himself in suc
les of the right wing,
on as they arrive, and
outside the left flank
aide-de-camp will in
of the left wing on the
his position six paces
ntre ofthis wing. In
tion, they will merely
more should fail to
the preceding battal
ont ofthe first battal
ne commands, substi
at. (Fig. 20. )
echiefs of battalions
bed in No. 76, except
four battalions will
nstead of to the rear.
hiefofthe first battal
en the right guide
in No. 77, and the bat
op offtogether to take
of the directing bat
prescribed in No. 78,
That, when halted , its
alting, ten paces in
ae battalion already
106 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
75. To ploy the regiment into column in mass by
battalion, in rear of the first, the colonel will com
mand:
(Fig. 19.) 1. Column in mass by battalions right in front.
2. Onfirst battalion into column. 3. MARCH.
76 At the second command, the majors will all face
to the line; that of the first will caution his battalion
to stand fast; the chiefs of all the others will prompt
ly command: 1. Such battalion. 2. Right-FACE, then
moving to the right flank of his battalion , will break
two files to the rear; the first will break the whole
depth of the two ranks; the second less.
77. At the third command, the chief ofthe first bat
talion will command: 1. First battalion. 2. Left-DRESS,
at this the left guide will place himself on the direc
tion indicated by the lieutenant-colonel, and this
battalion will align itself to the left, when the major
will add: FRONT, and the officers will resume their
places as in line."
78. All the other battalions, at the command march,
each conducted by its major, will step off together to
take their places in column; the first will gain in
wheeling by files to the rear, the space of ten paces,
which should separate its guide from the guide of the
first battalion, so that when the column is formed
the battalions will be separated eight paces; the chief
of this battalion on arriving on the direction ofthe
left guide of the first, will himselfhalt, cause his bat
talion to file left past him; the guide will direct his
course parallel to first battalion, when the last file has
made the wheel to the left, the major will command:
1. Second battalion. 2. HALT. 3. FRONT. 4. Left-DRESS.
79. At the third command the battalion will face to
the left, the left guide will promptly place himself on
the direction and ten paces in the rear of the left
guide of the first; the adjutant will place himself
a like distance in rear of the right guide and face to
the left,
80. At the fourth the battalion will align itself on
the left guide as heretofore explained, when the ma
jor will add: FRONT, and the officers will resume their
posts as in line.
81. The third, fourth and fifth battalions will direct
themselves diagonally towards, but a little in rear of
the points at which they are to enter the column; at
about six paces from the left flank of the column, the
head of each will incline a little to the left in order to
enter the column parallel, observing to leave a dis
>
 100

106
75. To o1
battali
mand:
(Fig. 19
76 A 1
tothe 1
to sta
lyoco l
m vin
two fi
depth
77.
talion
at thi
tion
batta
will
plac
78.
each
tak
wh
wh
firs
the
of
lef
tal
Co
111
1.
-.--
P PWC.

t}
ti
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 107
tance of ten paces between its guide and that of the
guide ofthe preceding battalion.
82. Each chief on arriving on the direction of the
guides will himself halt, allow his battalion to file
past him, then command and cause to be executed
what has just been prescribed for the chief of the
second.
83. The chiefs of battalions will place themselves
two paces outside of the left guide to direct the align
ment, that he may better observe that his battalion
may be parallel to that which preceeds him, which
being done he will add FRONT and place himself be
fore the centre of his battalion,
84. If after the commandfront any battalion should
not have its proper distance, which will only happen
through the negligence of its chief, such battalion will
remain in its place, in order that his fault may not be
propagated to others.
85. The colonel will superintend the movement,
and will observe that the majors promptly command
and cause to be executed the prescribed principles.
86. The lieutenant-colonel placing himself in suc
cession in rear ofthe left guides of the right wing,
will assure them on the direction as they arrive, and
then move to his post six paces outside the left flank
of the centre of this wing; the aide-de-camp will in
like manner assure the guides of the left wing on the
direction, and then move to his position six paces
outside the left flank of the centre of this wing. In
assuring the guides on the direction, they will merely
act as observers, unless one or more should fail to
cover accurately the guides of the preceding battal
ions.
87. To ploy the regiment in front ofthe first battal
ion the colonel will give the same commands, substi
tuting left for that of right in front. (Fig. 20. ),
88. At the second command the chiefs of battalions
will conform to what is prescribed in No. 76, except
that the chiefs of the last four battalions will
cause files to break to the front instead ofto the rear.
89. At the third command the chief ofthe first battal
ion will add: Right-DRESS, when the right guide
will place himself as prescribed in No. 77, and the bat
talion align itselfto the right.
90. The other battalions will step offtogether to take
their places in column in front of the directing bat
talion, each will direct itself as prescribed in No. 78,
and will enter in such a manner that, when halted, its
guide may find himself, after halting, ten paces in
advance of the right guide of the battalion already
established in the column.
108 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
91. Each chief of these battalions will conduct his
battalion until his right guide shall be nearly on the
line ofdirection of the guides previously established,
he will then command: 1. HALT. 2. FRONT; at the in
stant the battalion halts the right guide will face to
the rear, place himself ten paces in front of the guide
of the battalion next his own, and cover him accu
rately, then facing about to the front, the chief will
add:
3. Right- DRESS. 4. FRONT.
92. The lieutenant-colonel moving on the line in
front ofthe guide of the first battalion will assure the
other guides of the right wing on the direction as they
successively arrive, then place himself on the right
flank and six paces from the centre of the right wing,
now in the rear; the aide-de- camp will assure the
guides of the left wing on the direction , then place
himself on the right flank opposite to, and six paces
from the centre ofthe left wing.
93. The colonel will move forward, observing that
the majors promptly cause to be executed the pre
scribed principles, and when the movement is com
pleted will move to a point on the right flank where
his commands may be most distinctly heard.
91. The chief and music will follow up the move.
ment, halting on the left flank opposite to, and at the
prescribed distance from the centre of the regiment,
facing the direction given the column.
95. To ploy the regiment in rear or in front of the
fifth battalion , the colonel will command;
1. Column in mass by battalion left (or right) in front. 2.
On fifth battalion into column. 3. MARCH.
96. These movements will be executed on the same
principles prescribed for the ployments on first bat
talion right (or left) in front, but by inverse means;
the fifth battalion on which the regiment ploys will
stand fast, and at the instant the movement com
mences its chief will establish the right or left guide
on the direction indicated by the lieutenant-colonel,
and command:
Right or left- DRESS.
97. The preceding examples embraces all the princi
ples necessary to complete the formation either right
or left in front.
98. To ploy the regiment on an intermediate bat
talion, the colonel will command;
.21 g
Fi 1P09

4
J

|||||
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 109
(Fig. 21.) 1. Column in mass by battalion, right (or left)
in front. 2. On third (or such) battalion into column
8. MARCH.
99. At the instant the movement commences the
chief of the directing battalion will conform to what
is prescribed for the chief of directing battalion, No.
78 or 89.
100. The battalions which in the order in line are on
the right of the directing battalion will, by command
of their respective chiefs, face to the left; those which
are on the left will face to the right, if in the indica
tion the right is to be in front, those battalions on the
right of the directing one will ploy on its front, and
those on the left in rear. Ifthe left is to be in front,
the movement will be the reverse.
101, In all the ployments on an intermediate bat
talion when the right is to be in front, the lieutenant
colonel will assure the position of the guides in front
of the directing battalion, and the aide- de-camp those
in rear. When the left is to be in front, the reverse.
102. When the regiment can execute promptly, and
with understanding, and the majors become familiar
with their relative commands, the colonel may cause
all the preceding examples to be executed in double
quick time, simply adding in the caution , double quick
before that of march, the principles are the same.
103. Ifthe regiment be in march, those movements
will be executed by a combination of quick and
double quick time, and invariably in rear of a flank
battalion.
104. To ploy the regiment in rear of the first battal
ion , while in march, the colonel will give the same
commands prescribed in No. 75, the chief of first bat
talion will command: first battalion, forward, guide left,
when the left guide will move on the point indicated
by the lieutenant-colonel, and this battalion will con
tinue to march straight forward in quick time.
105. At the second command the chiefs of the re
maining battalions will promptly give the caution: 1.
Such battalion. 2. By the rightflank. 3. Double quick.
106. At the command march, briskly repeated by
these majors, their battalions will face to the right
and move off in double quick time, breaking to the
right. To take their places in column, the chiefs ofbat
talions will move rapidly to the right of his battalion
to conduct it, the adjutant moving in front of the
leading guide; the files will observe to preserve accu
rately their distances and march with a uniform step.
107. The second battalion will immediately enter
the column, marching parallel to the first; its chief
will allow it to file past him, and when the last file is
abreast with him he will command:
 110 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS .
1. Second battalion by the leftflank. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide
left.
108. At the command march, the battalion will face
to the left; at the third the left guide will march
on the trace of the left guide of the first bat
talion, the men touching elbows to the left; the major
will move briskly before the centre of his battalion,
and when his left guide arrives at the prescribed dis
tance in rear of the left guide of the first battalion, he
will add: 4. Quick time-MARCH, at this the second
battalion will change step to quick time.
109. The chiefs of the remaining battalions will con
form to and cause to be executed what has just been
prescribed for that of the second, observing to gain as
much ground as possible towards the head of the
column.
110. If the regiment had been previously marching
in line at double quick time, should the colonel wish
to resume that gait, will, when the last, or rear, bat
talion has gained its distance, command:
Double quick-MARCH.
111. To ploy the regiment into column in rear ofthe
left flank battalion , while on the march , the same
principles will be observed,
112 The colonel may cause the regiment to ploy into
column at full or half distance, either from a halt or
while marching in line, on the same priuciples and
by the same command, substituting for the first com
mand:
Column at full (or half) distance by battalion.
113. To ploy the regiment into column by compan
ies in either of the foregoing examples, the colonel
will give the same commands, substituting company
for that of battalion; the captains will give the com
mands, and cause to be executed what has been pre
scribed for the majors, substituting company for that
ofbattalion, the majors will give a general superin
tendance to the ployments oftheir respective battal
ions, into column by company, but will give no com.
mand, unless one or both captains should fail to
command, and execute promptly the prescribed prin
ciples.
114. In this movement the lieutenant-colonel and
aide-de-camp will assure the guides oftheir respective
wings on the direction as prescribed for the ploy.
ments by battalion,
To march in column atfull distance.
115. The regiment being in column at full distance,
either by company or battalion, right (or left) in front,
the colonel will command:
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 111
1. Column forward. 2. Guide left (or right). 3. MARCH.
116. At the second command the leading guide aid
ed by the lieutenant- colonel will instantly take
points on the ground in the direction the column is
to move as heretofore explained.
117. At the third the column will step off together,
the guides of the rear subdivisions conforming to
what is prescribed in school of the company, No. 111 .
118 The column being in march, the colonel will
frequently cause the march by a flank to be executed,
for this purpose he will command:
1. Bythe right (or left) flank. 2. MARCH.
119. At the command march, the column will face to
the right (or left) and move off in that direction, and
as soon as the men have faced, the colonel will add:
3. Guide left, (right) or (centre), when the right (or left)
guides of each subdivision will align himself on the
guide indicated, and continne to march straight for
ward, preserving accurately his interval from the
company or battalion next towards the directing
guide.
120. To resume the former direction the colonel will
command:
1. By the left (or right)flank. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right
(or left).
121. To cause the column to face about while march
ing, the colonel will command:
1. Regiment, right about. 2, MARCH. 3. Guide right.
122. At the second command the companies will all
face to the right about, then march straight forward
in an opposite direction , the chiefs of companies or
battalions will remain behind the front rank; the
aide-de-camp will give a point of direction to the
leading guide, and the remaining guides will march
in his trace.
123. The colonel will hold himself habitually on the
directing flank, he will look to the step and observe
that all the principles prescribed for the march in
column in school of the company are complied with;
the lieutenant-colonel will remain abreast with the
centre of the right wing now in rear, the aid-de-camp
aftergiving a point of direction to the leading guide,
will place himself abreast with the centre of the left
wing, now in front.
124. To resume the march by the front rank, the
colonel will command;
 112 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS .
1. Regiment right about. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide left.
125. This will be executed on the same principles
indicated in No. 122, as soon as the companies have
faced about, the lieutenant-colonel will give a point of
direction to the leading guide and then resume his
place opposite the centre of the right wing.
126. The column by company being in march, the
colonel will cause it to diminish front by platoons,
from front to rear, by the principle indicated in No.
162 and following, in school of the company.
127. To increase front he will command: form com
panies (or battalions) as the case may be, which will be
executed by the same command and means indicated
in school of the company, No. 166.
128. The column by company right in front being in
march, should the colonel wish to change direction to
the right and break into column by platoons, at the
same time, for the purpose of passing a defile he will
command:
1. Head of column. 2. By platoons break to the right.
3. MARCH.
129. At the command march, the leading company
by command of its chief, will wheel by platoons to
the right, and move forward in this direction, the re
maining companies will continue to march straight
forward, and as they successively arrive near the
ground where the first company broke into column
by platoons, their chiefs will command: by platoons,
right wheel; then add: guide left, forward, and move off
in the trace of the preceding platoons.
130. At the instalit the movement commences the
lieutenant-colonel will mark the ground where the
leading company wheels, and each company will
come up successively to break to the right on the
same ground.
131. The regiment being in column by platoon and
in march, the colonel may cause it to change direc
tion to the left and form company at the same time
by the command:
1. Head ofcolumn. 2. By companies break to the left.
3. MARCH.
132. At the second command the chief of the leading
company will briskly give the caution: such company
by platoons, left wheel; at the word march all the pla
toons of this company will wheel left into line, and
as the wheel is nearly completed the captain will add:
quide right, forward, when this company will move
direct to the front.
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 113
133. The chief of the next company will continue to
march.his company by platoons passing in rear of
the first, and when his right guide shall arrive near
the trace of the guide of the first company; he will
command and cause to be executed what has just
been prescribed for the captain of the first, and thus
from right to left.
134. The adjutant of the leading battalion will mark
the point where the first company broke to the left,
and remain in position until the second company of
his battalion has completed the wheel by platoons,
when he will be relieved by the adjutant of the next
battalion , and so on from right to left.
135. As soon as the movement is executed the
colonel will add: guide left, and move abreast with
the centre of the regiment; the majors will each ob
serve that their captains successively give their rela
tive commands and cause to be executed the pre
scribed principles .
136. These movements may be executed in dimin
ishing from column by battalion into column by com
pany or platoons, and then break by battalions to the
left, the commands and principles are the same, sub
stituting battalion for that of company.
Column in Route.
137. A column in route, ought never to have a depth
greater than the front it occupies when in line; but as
a column in route may have to pass bridges or other
narrow defiles, rendering it necessary to diminish
the front of subdivisions, it becomes important to
give rules and means by which the column may for
any length of march, preserve the ease of the route
step, without elongation from front to rear.
138. A column in route will be habitually formed by
platoon; but while marching through an open coun
try, or to and from parade grounds, it may be formed
by company, right in front.
139. The column being by platoon (or company) and
the want of space rendering a further diminution of
front necessary; the chiefs of companies will succes
sively command:
1. By the rightflank. 2. File left. 3. MARCH.
140. The companies marching by a flank will pass
the defile, and as soon as the breadth of the way may
permit, the captains will successively command:
1. By platoon (or company into line.) 2. MARCH,
141. At the command march the subdivisions indi
cated will form themselves into line, and for want of
H
114 - REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. --
space sufficient to contain the files of a platoon (or
company) those that are not able to enter will follow
(by a flank) the last files of their subdivisions.
142. The column marching in this order, the files in
rear will be caused to enter the line as soon as the
breadth ofthe way may permit.
143. The leading subdivisions will follow the wind
ings of the pass or defile; the following subdivisions
will not occupy themselves with the direction, but all
in succession, pass over the trace of the subdivisions
which precede them.
144. Changes of direction will always be made with
out command, but ifthe change be of importance, a
caution from their respective chiefs of companies, or
platoons may be given.
145. To render all these movements familiar to
troops and to habituate them to march in the route
step without elongating the column from front to
rear; commanders will occasionally conduct his regi
ment through narrow passes in order to make it per
ceive the utility of the principles prescribed above.
Remarks on the column in route.
146. The lesson relative to the column in route is by
its frequent application is one ofthe most important
that can be given to troops. If it be not well taught
and established on right principles the rear of the
column in route will be obliged to run to regain dis
tances, or else the front will be forced to halt till the
rear has accomplished that object; thus rendering the
march much slower and more fatiguing than if it
were executed according to fixed rule.
147. The ordinary progress of a culumn in route
should be on good roads orground at the rate of one
hundred and ten steps per minute, which rate may be
maintained by columns of almost any depth; but
over bad roads, or mountainous districts the progress
cannot be so great, and must therefore be regulated
accordingly.
148. The most certain means of marching while in
route, is to preserve always a regular and equal move
ment, and ff obstacles cause one or more subdivisions
to slacken or shorten the step, to cause the primitive
rate ofmarch to be resumed the moment the difficul
ty is passed.
149. A subdivision of a column ought never to take
more than the prescribed distance from the one im
mediately preceding it, but it will be necessary some
times to lessen that distance.
150. Thus the head of a column encounters an ob
stacle which obliges it to relax its march; all the fol
LA
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 115
lowing subdivisions will preserve the habitual step,
and close up in mass if necessary, on the subdivision
nearest the obstacle, distances will afterward natur
ally be regained as each subdivision shall successive
ly pass the obstacle, yet if the obstacle be too great to
be overcome by one subdivision whilst the next is
closing up, so that distances cannot be recovered
without running, the chief of the column will halt the
leading subdivision at a distance sufficient to contain
the whole column closed in mass. He will then put
the column in march, the subdivisions taking dis
tance bythe head of column, observing to commence
the movements, so that the last may not have to halt
after clearing the obstacle.
151. Subdivisions will always step out well in ob
liquing, both in forming companies or platoons;
when either is done in succession it is highly impor
tant that none slacken or shorten the step whilst
that which preceded it is engaged in the movement;
the observance of this principle can alone prevent an
elongation of a column.
152. When a command has to move rapidly over a
given distance, the foregoing movements will be ex
ecuted in double quick time; but when the distance
is great the chief of the column will observe the fol
lowing rules, that is, to march in double quick time, ten
minutes, and in quick time, (route step) five minutes,
and thus alternately.
153. If the ground is uneven he will reserve the
double quick for those parts ofthe ground most favor
able to this march.
154. A column marching alternately in double quick
time, and the route step, in the manner stated, can
easily accomplish long distances in a very short space
of time; but when the distance to be passed be not
greater than one or two miles, it should be accom
plished when the ground is favorable, without chang
ing the rate of march, that is in double quick time.
To change direction in column at full distance.
155. The column being in march in the cadenced
step, should the colonel wish to change direction to
the left (or right) he will indicate his intention to the
lieutenant colonel (if the right is in front) or to the
aide-de-camp, (ifthe left is in front) who will briskly
move to the point where the change is to be made,
and post the adjutant ofthe leading battalion there as
a marker presenting the breast to the flank of the
column; this marker if the change is to be made to
the right, will be posted on the left, outside the line
of direction given by the left guides, and faced to the
 116 RÉGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
direction to be given the column after the change is
made, if the change is to be made to the left he will
be posted on the right and faced to the left, present
ing his breast to the right guides ofthe column.
156. The leading subdivision on arriving near this
marker, the colonel will command:
(Fig. 22.) Head of column to the left (or right.)
157. At this the chief ofthe leading subdivision will
briskly command: 1. Guide right (or left), ifthe guide
is not already there, this guide will direct his march
so as to graze the breast of the marker, as this sub
division approaches within four paces of the marker
its chief will command: 2. Such company (or battalion)
left or right wheel, and at the instant the right (or left)
guide grazes the breast of the marker he will add: 3.
MARCH; when this company will wheel to the left (or
right) on the principles indicated for the wheel on the
march and move off in the new direction .
158. The following subdivisions will each come up
to wheel on the same ground, their chiefs will com
mand and cause to be executed what has just been
prescribed for the chief of the first subdivision.
159. The marker after the first or leading battalion
has completed the change of direction , will be brisk
ly relieved by the adjutant of the next battalion, im
mediately following his own , and in like manner so
from front to rear.
160. The colonel will observe that all the principles
prescribed for the change of direction in school ofthe
company, No. 128 is complied with, the adjutant, or
aide- de-camp, (according as the right or left is in
front) placing himself ten or fifteen paces in front of
the leading guide, after the wheel is made will indi
cate to him points of direction, which should be per
pendicular to the course the column was marching
previous to the change being made.
161. To halt the column while in march the colonel
will command:
1. Column. 2. HALT.
162. At the second command the column will halt,
and no guide will stir though he may have lost both
distance and direction .
163. The column being halted, right in front, when
the colonel shall wish to form it on left into line, he
will indicate to the lieutenant-colonel to rectify the
positions of the left guides, for this purpose he will
move briskly ten or twelve paces in front of the lead
ing guide and face to him; this guide and the follow
I
 P 117

Fig. 22. P 116

<

IT 17

Fig. 23.
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 117
ing one will fix their eyes on the adjutant, in order to
promptly conform themselves to his directions.
164. The lieutenant- colonel having placed these two
guides on the direction will command: Guides cover.
165. At this the following guides will promptly place
themselves on the direction, covering the first two in
file, and each at a proper distance from the guide im
mediately preceding; the aide-de- camp passing rapid
ly in rear of the column will assure them in their
positions, the captains (or majors) will then com
mand:
Such company (or battalion) left-DRESS.
166. At this each company (or battalion) will incline
to the left, and dress on its left guide; the captains (or
majors) will place themselves two paces outside of his
guide, previous to giving the command left dress, and
promptly align their companies parallel to that which
precedes his own, then command: FRONT.
167. This being executed, the colonel will command:
(Fig. 23.) 1. On left into line, wheel. 2. MARCH.
168. At the first command , each chiefof subdivision
will briskly give the caution , such company leftwheel,
guide right.
169. At the command march, each company will
wheel left, on the principles prescribed for a wheel
from a halt, when the marching flanks shall have ar
rived within three paces of the line the chiefs will
command:
1. Such company. 2. HALT. 3. Right DRESS. 4. FRONT.
170. At the command halt, the right guides will
briskly move upon the line, being corrected in their
positions by the adjutants, when each company will
align itself to the right as heretofore explained.
171. A column halted left in front will be formed on
right into line on the same principles and by inverse
means.
To close the column to half distance.
172. A column by company being at full distance, at
a halt and with the right in front, to cause it to close
to half distance on the leading company, the colonel
will command;
1. Close column at half distance. 2. MARCH,
173. At the first command the captain ofthe leading
company will caution it to stand fast, and as soon as
the movement commences, will align it by the left.
174. At the word march all the companies except the
first, will march straight forward , and as each in suc
118 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS .
cession arrives at a distance precisely equal to halfits
breadth, it will be halted by command of its chief, the
left guide will place himself on the direction of the
guides which precede, and the captain will align his
company to the left as heretofore explained.
175. The lieutenant- colonel, a few paces in front of
the leading guide, and faced to the rear, will assure
following guides as they successively arrive on
the direction
the .
176. If the column be in march, the colonel will
cause it to close by the same commands, in this case
the leading company will continue to march straight
forward; all the others will move in double quick
time, by the command of their respective chiefs, and
on gaining their distance, retake the step in quick
time.
177. If the column be marching in double quick
time, at the first command the captain of the leading
company will command: quick time, all the other
chiefs will caution their companies to continue their
march in double quick.
178. At the command march, the leading company
will march in quick and all the others in double
quick; as each arrives at half distance from the com
pany which precedes, its chief will command: quick
time, march.
rear company has gained its distance
When the command
179.colonel
the will :
Double quick-MARCH.
To Close Column on tenth or rear company.
180. The column being at a halt, should the colonel
wish to close to half distance on tenth, or rear com
pany, he will command:
1. On tenth (or rear) company, close column at half dis
tance. 2. Regiment about FACE. 3. Forward, guide right.
4. MARCH .
181. At the second command all the companies ex
cept the tenth (or rear) will face about, the guides re
maining in the front rank now in rear.
182. At the third all the captains will place them
selves two paces outside of the directing flank oftheir
companies.
183. At the fourth the tenth company will stand
fast, its chief aligning it by the left; the other com
panies will put themselves in march, and as each ar
rives at half distance from the one established before
it, its captain will halt it and face it about.
181. At the moment each company halts, the left
guide remaining faced to the rear, will place himself
 · REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS . 119
promptly on the direction of the guides already es
tablished and at exactly half distance, then facing
about the captain will align his company by the left.
183. The aide-de-camp placing himself a few paces
in rear ofthe left guide of the tenth company will as
sure the others on the direction as each company suc
cessively halts.
186. Ifthis movement be executed in double quick
time, each captain on arriving near the ground where
the company is to rest, will himself halt and com
mand:
Such company right about—HA LT.
187. The column being in march, should the colonel
wish to close it on the rear company, he will com
mand:
1. On tenth (or rear) company, close column at half dis
tance. 2. Regiment right about. 3. MARCH. 4. Guide
right.
188. At the first command, the captain ofthe tenth
company will caution it to remain faced to the front,
the captains of the others will caution them to face
about.
189. At the third command the captain of the tenth
will halt his company and align it to the left; the cap
tains of the other companies will at the same com
mand, place themselves two paces outside the direct
ing flank, their companies will all face about, and as
each arrives at half distance from the company alrea
dy established, its chief will command:
Such company right about—HALT,
190. The instant the company halts, the guide on
the directing flank will execute what is prescribed in
No. 186, and his captain will align his company by
the left.
191. A column by battalion at full distance, will
close to half distance, on the same principles and by
the same commands, the colonel substitutingfifth (or
rear) battalion for that of tenth company, the majors
will command and cause to be executed what has just
been prescribed for the captains.
192. A column by company or battalion being at full
or halfdistance, may be closed in mass by the same
means and commands, substituting column, close in
mass for that ofclose column at halfdistance; each chief
of subdivision will conform to all that has just been
prescribed, except that he will not halt his subdi
vision until his guide shall be within eight paces from
the guide next preceding.
120 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
193. In a column left in front these movements will
be executed on the same principles.
To march in column at halfdistance, or closed in mass.
194. A column at half distance or closed in mass
being at a halt, will be put in march by the colonel,
by the same commands prescribed for a column at
full distance, the means of direction will also be the
same.
195. A column at half distance or closed in mass
will be exercised in marching to the rear and by a
flank, by the same commands and principles pre
scribed in No. 118 and following.
Tochange direction in column at half distance.
196. A column at half distance being in march, will
change direction by the same commands and accord
ing to the same principles as a column at full dis
tance; but as the distance between subdivisions is
less, the pivot man in each subdivision will take steps
of full fourteen inches instead of nine, and seventeen
inches instead of eleven according to the gait, in order
to clear the wheeling point, and the marching flank
will describe the arc of a larger circle in order to
facilitate the movement.
To change direction in column closed in mass.
197. A column by battalion closed in mass, being in
march, will change direction by the front of subdivi
sions; the colonel after having caused a marker to be
posted at the point where the change ought to com
mence, will command:
(Fig. 24.) 1. Regiment right wheel. 2. MARCH .
198. At the command march, the leading battalion
will wheel as if it were part of a column at half dis
tance; at the instant this battalion commences the
wheel all the others will at onee conform to its move
ment in the following manner: The left guide of each
battalion advancing the left shoulder slightly, and
lengthening a little the step, will incline to the left,
observing at the same time to gain ground to the
front, so as to keep an interval of eight paces between
himselfand the guide of the preceding battalion, as
soon as he shall cover this guide accurately, he will
cease to incline, and march in his trace.
199. Each battalion will regulate its movements by
its guide; the men will feel lightly the elbow towards
the guide and advence a little the left shoulder , at the
moment the movement commences, each file in in
clining will gain less ground as they approach the
 JE
ill

ass
hel,
at
the
ass
ya
pre

will
ord
dis
ns is
Steps
teen
order
Hank
erto

ng ini
div
to he AAA
com.

alion
Ifdis
esthe
nove.
Teach
, and
eleft,
to thne
twee
on, as
ewill
mts bys
ward
atthe
in in
ch the
Fig. 24. P 120

Fig. 25. P 121

 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS . 121
pivot, and the pivot will only gain ground forward,
sufficient to maintain between his own, and the pre
ceding battalion, the same distance that separates
their marching flanks.
200. The colonel seeing the wheel nearly completed
will command:
1. Guide left. 2. FORWARD.
201. At the second command, which will be given
at the instant the leading battalion has completed
the wheel, it will resume the direct march, the other
battalions will conform themselves to this move
ment, and if any guide find himself not covering his
file leader he will by degrees recover or bring him
selfon his trace by advancing the right shoulder.
202. The column right in front willchange direction
to the left on the same principles, the colonel com
manding:
1. Regiment, left wheel. 2. MARCH,
203. The column being left in front the colonel will
cause it to change direction to the right, or left, by the
same commands and according to the same princi
ples,
To change direction from a halt,
204. A column by battalion closed in mass being at
a halt, when the colonel shall wish to give it a new
direction, and in which position it is to remain, he
will cause it to execute this movement by the flank of
battalions, in the following manner.
205. The column having the right in front, when the
colonel shall wish to cause it to change direction by
the right flank, he will indicate to the lieutenant
colonel the point of direction to the right, this officer
will briskly post two markers, (the adjutant of the
first battalion and one 1st lieutenant) on the direc
tion, distant from each other a little less than the
front ofthe first battalion , the first marker (1st lieu
tenant) in front of the right file of this battalion, this
being executed he will command:
(Fig. 25.) 1. Change direction by the right flank. 2. Regi
ment right FACE. 3. Forward MARCH,
206. At the second command the column will face
to the right, and each chief of battalion will place
himselfby the side of his left guide.
207. At the command march, all the battalions will
step off at once, the right guide of the leading battal
ion will direct himself from the first step parallelly to
the markers, placed in advance on the new direction;
the chiefof this battalion will stand fast and see it file
122 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
past, and as soon as the left guide shall have passed,
he will command:
1. First battalion . 2. ĦALT. 3. FRONT. 4. Left DRESS.
208. At the fourth command this battalion will align
itselfon the two markers.
209. The right guides ofthe following battalions will
each conform himself to the direction of the right
guide of the battalion preceding his own in the
column, so as to enter on the new direction parallelly
to that battalion and at the distance of eight paces
from its rear rank .
210. Each chief of battalion on arriving opposite the
left marker will himself halt, see his battalion file
past, then halt and align it by the same commands
and means prescribed in No. 207.
211. The change of direction by the left flank will be
executed according to the same principles and by in
verse means.
Being in column at halfdistance or closed in mass to take
distances.
212. A column at half will take full distance by the
head of column when it has to prolong itself on the
line; if on the contrary, it has to form itself into line
on the ground it occupies, it will take distances on
the leading or on the rear subdivision, according as
the one or the other may find itself on the ground
where the right or left of the regiment is to rest when
in line.
213. The column being by company (or battalion) at
halfdistance and at a halt, should the colonel wish to
cause it to take full distance by the head of column,
he will command:
Bythe head of column take wheeling distances.
214. At this the chief of the leading company (or bat
talion) will command.
1. First company (or first battalion)forward. 2. Guide left.
3. MARCH, (or double quick MARCH.)
215. At the command march, the leading subdivision
will move forward, and when the second company
shall have nearly its wheeling distance, its chief will
command:
1. Second company or battalion forward. 2. Guide left.
3. MARCH.
216. At the command march, which should be given
at the instant this company has attained its wheeling
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 123
distance, it will step off smartly, taking the step from
the leading company.
217. Each of the other companies will successively
execute what has just been prescribed for the second.
218 In column by companies the majors will see
that each company puts itself in march at the instant
it has attained its full distance.
219. Should the column be in march, the colonel
wishing to take distance by the head of column, will
command:
1. By the head of column, take wheeling distance.
2. MARCH.
220. At this the chief of the leading company will
command:
1. First company double quick. 2. MARCH.
221. At the second command the leading company
will move off in double quick time, the chiefs ofthe
other companies will in succession , as they attain
their distances, cause their companies to move in
double quick time, as soon as the rear company has
its distance, the colonel will add:
3. Column, quick time. 4. MARCH.
222. If a column at half distance be marching in
double quick time, the colonel will give the same com
mands as in No. 219, the leading company will con
tinue the same gait, the chiefs of the othercompanies
will briskly command, quick time MARCH, and as
each successively gains its distance he will add, double
quick MARCH, and move forward in the trace ofthe
preceding company.
To take distance on rear company.
223. Should the colonel wish to take distances on
the rear company, he will signify his intention to the
lieutenant-colonel and aide- de - camp, these officers
will briskly post three markers on the direction to be
given the line; the aide-de- camp will post the first
abreast with the left guide of the rear company, the
second towards the head of the column at company
distance from the first, the lieutenant- colonel will
post the third, the adjutant ofthe leading battalion,
correctly on the prolongation of the other two and a
little beyond the point to which the head of the
column will extend, the three facing to the rear; these
dispositions being made, the colonel will command:
124 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
1. On rear company, take wheeling distance. 2. Column
forward. 3. Guide left. 4. MARCH, (or double quick
MARCH.)
224. At the third command the captains will all
place themselves two paces outside of the directing
flank; the chief of the rear company will caution it to
stand fast.
225. At the fourth command, the rear company will
stand fast; its chief will align it bythe left on the first
marker, then command FRONT, at this the marker
will retire and the left guide of this company will take
his place.
226 At the same command all the other companies
will step offbriskly, the leading guide directing him
selfa little within the third marker; when the ninth
or company next the rear has arrived opposite the
second marker, its chief will halt and align it on this
marker in the same manner prescribed for the tenth
or rear company .
227. When the chief of the eighth company sees
that there is sufficient space between his own and the
ninth company for it to wheel into line, he will com
mand, HALT; the left guide will instantly face about
and promptly place himself on the direction , and the
moment he shall be assured in his position by the
aide-de-camp, he will face about, and the captain will
align his company to the left, then add, FRONT.
228. The chiefs of the other companies will each con
form to what has just been prescribed for the eighth,
or third company from the rear,
229. The majors of each battalion will briskly follow
up the movement and see that each company halts at
the prescribed distance, the aide-de camp will assure
the guides of the left wing, and the lieutenant-colonel
those of the right wing on the direction, the colonel
giving a general superintendance to the whole move
ment.
To take distances on the head of the column.
230. To take distances on the leading company the
colonel will cause three markers to be established on
the line, in the manner just prescribed, except that
the first will be abreast with the left guide ofthe lead
ing company, the second at company distance in rear
of the first, and the third without the point where the
rear of the column will extend , the three faced to the
front, in this case the lieutenant- colonel will post the
two first, and the aide- de-camp the third, the colonel
will then command:
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS . 125
1. On first company take wheeling distance. 2. Regiment
about- FACE. 3, Column forward. 4. Guide right. 5.
MARCH.
231. At the second command all the companies, ex
cept the first, will face about, the guides will remain
in the front rank, now become the rear.
232. At the fourth the captains will place themselves
two paces outside their guides.
233. At the fifth the captain ofthe first company will
align it as prescribed in No. 225, on the first marker.
234. At the same time all the remaining companies
will put themselves in march, the guide ofthe rear
one will direct himself a little within the third mar
ker, when the second company shall have arrived
opposite the second marker its captain will halt it,
cause it to face about, and then align it on this mar
ker onthe principles prescribed in No. 225.
235. At the instant the third company shall have its
wheeling distance its chief will halt it, and face it
about, as soon as this company has faced about the
left guide will briskly place himself on the direction
of the preceding guides and at precisely company dis
tance, when the captain will align his company by
the left on this guide.
236. The chiefs of the remaining companies will suc
cessively conform to what has just been prescribed
for the chief of the third company.
237. The various movements will be executed ac
cording to the same principles in a column left in
front.
238. They will also be executed in like manner in a
column closed in mass; but should the colonel wish
to only open the column to half instead of wheeling
distance, he will substitute in the commands the in
dication halffor that of wheeling distance.
239. In column by battalion , distance will be taken
according to the same principles.
Being in column by company closed in mass to form bat
talions.
240. The column by company being closed in mass
right in front and at a halt, to cause it to form battal
ions, the colonel will command:
(Fig. 26.) 1. Form battalions. 2. MARCH.
241. At the first command the captains of the left
companies, in each battalion, will command,such com
pany leftface, and place themselves by the left guide,
the chiefs ofall the right companies will caution them
to stand fast; the adjutants will move rapidly, with
 126 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
out the point, and on the prolongation of the line
where the left of their respective battalions will rest
when formed and facing to the right will mark the
alignment.
212. At the second command all the left companies
will step off at once (the right companies standing
fast) their captains standing fast will see their com
panies file past, and as soon as the right guide of their
company is nearly abreast with them, they will com
mand:
1. Such company. 2. HALT. 3. FRONT.
243. The second command will be given at the in
stant
company the right guide has cleared the left of the right
, the third immediately after the second.
211. The company having faced to the front, the
files, if there should be intervals between them, will
incline to the right, the left guide will place himself
on the alignment faced to the front and be corrected
in his position by the adjutant who will retire as soon
as this guide is posted, the captain placing himself
outside the guide, will then align his company be
tween this guide and the right company by the com
mand:
Right- DRESS.
245. At this the left company will dress forward on
the alignment of the right company, and when ex
ecuted he will add: FRONT.
216. The majors will superintend the general execu
tion of the formation of their respective battalions
and, when completed, place themselves before its
centre.
247. If the column by company be in march instead
ofat a halt, should the colonel wish to form battalions,
he will command:
1. Form battalions. 2. MARCH.
248. At this the chiefs of the right companies will
briskly command such company, mark time; the
chiefs of the left companies will at the same time
command: such company by the left flank- MARCH,
and placing himself abreast with the left guide of the
right company will see his company file past him,
and when it has cleared the column he will add:
By the right flank-MARCH.
249. Each of the left companies after facing by the
right flank will move on the alignment ofthe right
companies, and as soon as the battalions are formed
the colonel will command:
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 127
3. Forward. 4. Guide left. 5. MARCH.
250. At the fifth command, the column will resume
the gait at which it was marching previous to the
commencement of the movement.
Being in column at half orfull distance to form battalions.
251. Ifthe the column be at a halt, and at halfor full
distance, battalions will be formed by the same com
mands, and by the same principles prescribed in No.
240, and following, except that after the command
front. the captains will add, forward, MARCH, and
upon arriving near the rear rank of the right com
pany, he will command: HALT, Right- DRESS, FRONT,
which will be executed as indicated in No. 245.
252. Ifthe left be in front the movement will be ex
ecuted by inverse means; the right companies con
forming to what is prescribed for the left companies
when the right is in front.
253. Ifthe column be marching at full distance right
in front, should the colonel wish to form batlalions,
he will command:
1. Form battalions. 2. MARCH.
254. At the first command the chiefs of all the right
companies will caution them to continue to march
straight forward, adding, guide right, the chiefs of all
the left companies will briskly command:
Such company left oblique, double quick.
255. Atthe command march, briskly repeated by the
chiefs ofthe left companies, the right companies will
continue to march straight forward, the left compan
ies will oblique to the left in double quick time, and
at the instant the right guide has cleared the column,
the chiefs of left companies will command, forward,
and on approaching the rear rank of the right com
pany add, quick time, MARCH, when they will retake
the step in quick time and move upon the alignment
of the right companies, this being executed the
colonel will add, guide left.
256. In marching in column at half distance, battal
ions will be formed by the same commands and prin
ciples indicated in Nos. 247 and 248.
257. The last movement being considered as the
element of deployments much attention will be given
to its correct execution, that the files when marching
by a flank preserve accurately their distances, and
that the captains observe to halt their companies a
the instant his right guide has cleared the column.
128 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS .
Manner ofpassing from column into line atfull distance.
258. The column being at a halt right in front, to
form it on left into line after rectifying the positions
of the left guides, the colonel will command:
1. On left into line, wheel. 2. MARCH.
259. At the first command the 1st lieutenants will
briskly place themselves on the direction of their left
guides at a point about where the right of their com
panies will rest when in line. and facing to this
guide will be assured on their direction by the lieu
tenant-colonel.
260. At the command march each company will
wheel to the left, on the principles prescribed for the
wheel from a halt, and as the right guides arrive with
in three paces of the new line, each captain will com
mand, such company HALT, right DRESS, which will be
executed as heretofore explained .
261. The lieutenant-colonel placed on the extreme
right will observe that each company is accurately
aligned by its chief, and in cases of error may order
such company forward or back as the case may be,
then command, FRONT and resume his place in line.
262. A column left in front will form on right into line
according to the same principles, the 1st lieutenant
moving on the line at a point where the left of their
companies will rest when in line, and facing to their
right guides
263. A column by battalion will form itself into line,
either with the right or left in front, by the same com
mands and principles, in this case the majors will
command and cause to be executed what has been
prescribed for the captains, and the adjutants what
has been indicated for 1st lieutenants.
261. If the column be in march and the colonel
should wish to form line and continue to move for
ward, without halting, he will command:
1. By companies, left wheel. 2. MARCH.
265. At the command march, each company will
wheel left on a fixed pivot, and as the right of each
company arrives near the line the colonel will com
mand:
3. Forward. 4. Guide centre. 5. MARCH.
266. At the fourth command the color bearer will
take points of direction as heretofore explained; at
the fifth given at the instant the wheel is completed
the companies will march directly to the front, touch
ing lightly towards the centre.
ww
 Fig. 27. P 129
1

Fig. 26. P 125

0 ^

D
FTT

<.. <<<

7
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 129
To form by inversion right (or left) into line.
267. Should a column right in front be under the
necessity of instantly forming a line faced to the re
verse flank, the colonel will command:
1. By inversion, right into line, wheel. 2. MARCH.
268. At the second command, each company will
whee Ito the right as prescribed for a wheel from ahalt,
and be halted and aligned to the left by its chief on
the same principles indicated in No. 260 and following.
269. A column left in front will form by inversion
left into line, according to the same principles.
270. Ifthe regiment is to move forward after wheel
ing by inversion into line, the colonel will add the
commands prescribed in No. 265.
A column atfull distance on right into line.
271. A column by company right in front at full dis
tance having to form itself on right into line, the
colonel will indicate to the lieutenant-colonel a little
in advance of the point where the right of the line is
to rest when formed, who will briskly move to that
point, and post a marker, (the adjutant of leading
battalion) facing the direction the column is march
ing, he will then place a second marker (a 1st lieuten
tenant) on the direction and at about battalion dis
tance from and facing to the first marker; the colonel
will then command:
(Fig. 27. ) 1. On right into line. 2. Guide right.
272. At the second command the right will become
the directing flank, the right guide of the leading
company will march straight forward up to the turn
ing point, the following guides marching in his trace.
273. The leading company on arriving near the first
marker, its chiefwill command:
1. First company. 2. Right turn. 3. MARCH.
274. At the command march, this company will turn
to the right, its right guide will direct his march on
the first marker, so that when in line his breast will
rest lightly against the left elbow of this marker,
when at three paces from the line, the captain will
command:
1. First company. 2. HÁLT. 3. Right-DRESS . 4. FRONT.
275. At the second command the company will halt,
the files not yet in line will come up briskly, the
right guide will place himself on the line touching
the left elbow of the marker; at the third the com
I
130 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
panywill align themselves on this guide, and at the
fourth the captain will resume his place..
276. The second company will continue to march
straight forward, passing in rear of the first, and as it
approaches opposite the left flank of the first com
pany, its chief will command, and cause to be ex
ecuted what has just been prescribed for the first.
277. At the instant this company is formed the adju
tant and the left company 1st lieutenant of the next
(second) battalion will move briskly on the line, the
first will place himself four paces tothe left of the last
file of the second company and facing to the right
will cover accurately the two markers already estab
Hished; the 1st lieutenant near the point where the
left of the second battalion will rest, facing to the
right and covering the adjutant; the remaining bat
talions will in like manner successively execute
what hasjust been prescribed for the second.
278. The third company will continue straight for
ward, until opposite the adjutant, when it will turn
to the right as has been explained, and thus from
right to left, the odd numbered companies forming on
their adjutant, and the even numbers on the last file
of the odd numbers,
279. The lieutenant-colonel moving briskly along
the line will observe that the adjutants cover accu
rately, and when the line is formed will correct any
errors that may occur, then command FRONT, when
the markers will resume their places in line.
280. The colonel will give a general superintendance
to the movement, passing along the front, will be
always opposite the company about to turn, that he
may better judge of the correctness of their move
ments.
281. A column left in front will be formed on left
into line according to the same principles.
282. In order that the foregoing movements, (right
or left into line) may be executed with regularity, the
first marker should be posted, so that the guide of
each company after turning may have at least ten
paces to march before arriving upon the line.
283. In the first exercises this line will be estab
lished on a line parallel to that of the column; but
after the officers become familiar with the move
ments the colonel may chose oblique directions
order to habituate the regiment to form line in any
direction; in this case, where the line forms a sensible
angle with the direction ofthe column, the colonel,
before beginning the movement, will cause the head
of the column to change direction parallel with this
line; all the other subdivisions will come up succes
12102
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 181
sively and change direction at the same point, by
this means all the guides ofthe column after turning
will have about the same number of steps to take, in
order to come up on the line.
284. In executing this movement, should the column
wish to commence firing, he will instruct the captain
of the leading company to this effect; this captain,
after forming on the line will place himselfbehind
the centre of his company, and as soon as the next
captain shall have commanded front, he will com
mence the fire by file, by the commands prescribed in
school of the company, at the command fire byfile,
the first marker will retire; the captain of the second
company will commence firing as soon as the captain
of the third has commanded front, and thus in con
tinuation from right to left; the guides or markers,
who may be in front of companies, will retire at the
caution from the captains offirebyfile,
285. In all successive formations when firing is tobe
executed by file, the same principles will be observed;
this fire will always be executed by the command of
each captain,
Movementfrom column atfull distance, forwardinto line.
286. The column being by company, at full distance
right in front, and at a halt, to form it forward into
line, the colonel will first conform to what is pre
scribed in No. 271, and then command:
(Fig. 28.) 1. Front into line. 2. MARCH.
287. At the first command the chief of the leading
company will briskly give the caution , first company
forward, guide right, the chiefs of all the remaining
companies will rapidly command:
1. Such company. 2. Left halfwheel.
288. At the command march, briskly repeated, the
first company will move forward, halt at three paces
from the line, and be aligned upon the markers by its
chief; all the remaining companies at the word march,
will make a half wheel to the left on fixed pivots,
and when the wheel is nearly completed, the captains
will add:
3. Forward. 4. Guideright. 5. MARCH.
289. At the fourth command the men will touch to
the right; at the fifth, given at the instant the wheel
is completed, the company will cease to wheel, and
march straight forward, the right guides of each com
pany will follow the file immediately before him.
290. When the second company shall arrive opposite
Fig. 24. P 120

Fig. 25. P 121

ARARA
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 121
pivot, and the pivot will only gain ground forward,
sufficient to maintain between his own, and the pre
ceding battalion, the same distance that separates
their marching flanks.
200. The colonel seeing the wheel nearly completed
will command:
1. Guide left. 2. FORWARD.
201. At the second command, which will be given
at the instant the leading battalion has completed
the wheel, it will resume the direct march, the other
battalions will conform themselves to this move
nent, and if any guide find himself not covering his
file leader he will by degrees recover or bring him
self on his trace by advancing the right shoulder.
202. The column right in front will change direction
to the left on the same principles, the colonel com
manding:
1. Regiment, left wheel. 2. MARCH,
203. The column being left in front the colonel will
cause it to change direction to the right, or left, by the
same commands and according to the same princi
ples,
To change direction from a halt,
204. A column by battalion closed in mass being at
a halt, when the colonel shall wish to give it a new
direction, and in which position it is to remain, he
will cause it to execute this movement by the flank of
battalions, in the following manner.
205. The column having the right in front, when the
colonel shall wish to cause it to change direction by
the right flank, he will indicate to the lieutenant
colonel the point of direction to the right, this officer
will briskly post two markers, (the adjutant ofthe
first battalion and one 1st lieutenant) on the direc
tion, distant from each other a little less than the
front ofthe first battalion, the first marker (1st lieu
tenant) in front of the right file of this battalion, this
being executed he will command:
(Fig. 25.) 1. Change direction by the right flank. 2. Regi
ment right FACE. 3. Forward MARCH,
206, At the second command the column will face
to the right, and each chief of battalion will place
himselfby the side of his left guide.
207. At the command march, all the battalions will
step offat once, the right guide of the leading battal
ion will direct himself from the first step parallelly to
the markers, placed in advance on the new direction;
the chiefof this battalion will stand fast and see it file
122 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
past, and as soon as the left guide shall have passed,
he will command:
1. First battalion. 2. HALT. 3. FRONT. 4. Left DRESS.
208. At the fourth command this battalion will align
itself on the two markers.
209. The right guides ofthe following battalions will
each conform himself to the direction of the right
guide of the battalion preceding his own in the
column, so as to enter on the new direction parallelly
to that battalion and at the distance of eight paces
from its rear rank.
210. Each chief of battalion on arriving opposite the
left marker will himself halt, see his battalion file
past, then halt and align it by the same commands
and means prescribed in No. 207.
211. The change of direction by the left flank will be
executed according to the same principles and by in
verse means.
Being in column at half distance or closed in mass to take
distances.
212. A column at half will take full distance by the
head of column when it has to prolong itself on the
line; if on the contrary, it has to form itselfinto line
on the ground it occupies, it will take distances on
the leading or on the rear subdivision , according as
the one or the other may find itself on the ground
where the right or left of the regiment is to rest when
in line.
213. The column being by company (or battalion) at
half distance and at a halt, should the colonel wish to
cause it to take full distance by the head of column,
he will command:
Bythe head of column take wheeling distances.
214. At this the chief of the leading company (orbat
talion) will command.
1. First company (or first battalion)forward. 2. Guide left.
3. MARCH, (or double quick MARCH.)
215. At the command march, the leading subdivision
will move forward, and when the second company
shall have nearly its wheeling distance, its chief will
command:
1. Second company or battalion forward. 2. Guide left.
3. MARCH.
216. At the command march, which should be given
at the instant this company has attained its wheeling
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 123
distance, it will step off smartly, taking the step from
the leading company.
217. Each of the other companies will successively
execute what has just been prescribed for the second.
218 In column by companies the majors will see
that each company puts itselfin march at the instant
it has attained its full distance.
219. Should the column be in march, the colonel
wishing to take distance by the head of column, will
command:
1. By the head of column, take wheeling distance.
2. MARCH.
220. At this the chief of the leading company will
command:
1. First company double quick, 2. MARCH.
221. At the second command the leading company
will move off in double quick time, the chiefs of the
other companies will in succession, as they attain
their distances, cause their companies to move in
double quick time, as soon as the rear company has
its distance, the colonel will add:
3. Column, quick time. 4. MARCH.
222. If a column at half distance be marching in
double quick time, the colonel will give the same com
mands as in No. 219, the leading company will con
tinue the same gait, the chiefs ofthe other companies
will briskly command, quick time MARCH, and as
each successively gains its distance he will add, double
quick MARCH, and move forward in the trace of the
preceding company.
To take distance on rear company.
223. Should the colonel wish to take distances on
the rear company, he will signify his intention to the
lieutenant-colonel and aide- de - camp, these officers
will briskly post three markers on the direction to be
given the line; the aide-de- camp will post the first
abreast with the left guide of the rear company, the
second towards the head of the column at company
distance from the first, the lieutenant-colonel will
post the third, the adjutant ofthe leading battalion,
correctly on the prolongation of the other two and a
little beyond the point to which the head of the
column will extend, the three facing to the rear; these
dispositions being made, the colonel will command:
124 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
1. On rear company, take wheeling distance. 2. Column
forward. 3. Guide left. 4. MARCH, (or double quick
MARCH.)
221. At the third command the captains will all
place themselves two paces outside of the directing
flank; the chief ofthe rear company will caution it to
stand fast.
225. At the fourth command, the rear company will
stand fast; its chief will align it bythe left on the first
marker, then command FRONT, at this the marker
will retire and the left guide of this company will take
his place.
226 At the same command all the other companies
will step off briskly, the leading guide directing him
selfa little within the third marker; when the ninth
or company next the rear has arrived opposite the
second marker, its chief will halt and align it on this
marker in the same manner prescribed for the tenth
or rear company .
227. When the chief of the eighth company sees
that there is sufficient space between his own and the
ninth company for it to wheel into line, he will com
mand, HALT; the left guide will instantly face about
and promptly place himself on the direction, and the
moment he shall be assured in his position by the
aide-de-camp, he will face about, and the captain will
align his company to the left, then add, FRONT.
8. The chiefs of the other companies will each con
form to what has just been prescribed for the eighth ,
or third company from the rear,
229. The majors of each battalion will briskly follow
up the movement and see that each company halts at
the prescribed distance , the aide-de camp will assure
the guides of the left wing, and the lieutenant-colonel
those of the right wing on the direction, the colonel
giving a general superintendance to the whole move
ment.
To take distances on the head ofthe column.
230. To take distances on the leading company the
colonel will cause three markers to be established on
the line, in the manner just prescribed, except that
the first will be abreast with the left guide ofthe lead
ing company, the second at company distance in rear
of the first, and the third without the point where the
rear of the column will extend, the three faced to the
front, in this case the lieutenant- colonel will post the
two first, and the aide-de-camp the third, the colonel
will then command:
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS . " 125
1. On first company take wheeling distance. 2. Regiment
about- FACE. 3. Column forward. 4. Guide right. 5.
MARCH.
231. At the second command all the companies, ex
cept the first, will face about, the guides will remain
in the front rank, now become the rear.
232. At the fourth the captains will place themselves
two paces outside their guides.
233. At the fifth the captain ofthe first company will
align it as prescribed in No. 225, on the first marker.
234. At the same time all the remaining companies
will put themselves in march, the guide of the rear
one will direct himself a little within the third mar
ker, when the second company shall have arrived
opposite the second marker its captain will halt it,
cause it to face about, and then align it on this mar
ker on the principles prescribed in No. 225.
235. At the instant the third company shall have its
wheeling distance its chief will halt it, and face it
about, as soon as this company has faced about the
left guide will briskly place himself on the direction
of the preceding guides and at precisely company dis
tance, when the captain will align his company by
the left on this guide.
236. The chiefs of the remaining companies will suc
cessively conform to what has just been prescribed
for the chief of the third company.
237. The various movements will be executed ac
cording to the same principles in a column left in
front.
238. They will also be executed in like manner in a
column closed in mass; but should the colonel wish
to only open the column to half instead of wheeling
distance, he will substitute in the commands the in
dication half for that of wheeling distance.
239. In column by battalion, distance will be taken
according to the same principles.
Being in column by company closed in mass to form bat
talions.
240. The column by company being closed in mass
right in front and at a halt, to cause it to form battal
ions, the colonel will command:
(Fig. 26.) 1. Form battalions. 2. MARCH.
241. At the first command the captains of the left
companies, in each battalion, will command,such com
pany leftface, and place themselves by the left guide,
the chiefs of all the right companies will caution them
to stand fast; the adjutants will move rapidly, with
126 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
out the point, and on the prolongation of the line
where the left of their respective battalions will rest
when formed and facing to the right will mark the
alignment.
212. At the second command all the left companies
will step off at once (the right companies standing
fast) their captains standing fast will see their com
panies file past, and as soon as the right guide of their
company is nearly abreast with them, they will com
mand:
1. Such company. 2. HALT. 3. FRONT.
243. The second command will be given at the in
stant the right guide has cleared the left of the right
company, the third immediately after the second.
214. The company having faced to the front, the
files, if there should be intervals between them, will
incline to the right, the left guide will place himself
on the alignment faced to the front and be corrected
in his position by the adjutant who will retire as soon
as this guide is posted, the captain placing himself
outside the guide, will then align his company be
tween this guide and the right company by the com
mand:
Right- DRESS.
245. At this the left company will dress forward on
the alignment of the right company, and when ex
ecuted he will add: FRONT.
216. The majors will superintend the general execu
tion of the formation of their respective battalions
and, when completed, place themselves before its
centre.
247. Ifthe column by company be in march instead
ofat a halt, should the colonel wish to form battalions,
he will command:
1. Form battalions. 2. MARCH.
248. At this the chiefs of the right companies will
briskly command such company, mark time; the
chiefs of the left companies will at the same time
command: such company by the left flank-MARCH,
and placing himself abreast with the left guide of the
right company will see his company file past him,
and when it has cleared the column he will add:
By the right flank-MARCH.
249. Each of the left companies after facing by the
right flank will move on the alignment of the right
companies, and as soon as the battalions are formed
the colonel will command:
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 127
3. Forward. 4. Guide left. 5. MARCH.
250. At the fifth command, the column will resume
the gait at which it was marching previous to the
commencement of the movement.
Being in column at half orfull distance to form battalions.
251. Ifthe the column be at a halt, and at halfor full
distance, battalions will be formed by the same com
mands, and by the same principles prescribed in No.
240, and following, except that after the command
front, the captains will add, forward, MARCH, and
upon arriving near the rear rank of the right com
pany, he will command: HALT, Right- DRESS, FRONT,
which will be executed as indicated in No. 245.
252. Ifthe left be in front the movement will be ex
ecuted by inverse means; the right companies con
prescribed for the left companies
forming to what is front.
when the right is in
253. Ifthe column be marching at full distance right
in front, should the colonel wish to form batlalions,
he will command:
1. Form battalions. 2. MARCH.
254. At the first command the chiefs of all the right
companies will caution them to continue to march
straight forward, adding, guide right, the chiefs of all
the left companies will briskly command:
Such company left oblique, double quick.
255. At the command march, briskly repeated by the
chiefs ofthe left companies, the right companies will
continue to march straight forward, the left compan
ies will oblique to the left in double quick time, and
at the instant the right guide has cleared the column,
the chiefs of left companies will command, forward,
and on approaching the rear rank of the right com
pany add, quick time, MARCH, when they will retake
the step in quick time and move upon the alignment
of the right companies, this being executed the
colonel will add, guide left.
256. In marching in column at half distance, battal
ions will be formed by the same commands and prin
ciples indicated in Nos. 247 and 248.
257. The last movement being considered as the
element of deployments much attention will be given
to its correct execution, that the files when marching
by a flank preserve accurately their distances, and
that the captains observe to halt their companies a
the instant his right guide has cleared the column.
128 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS .
Manner ofpassing from column into line at full distance.
258. The column being at a halt right in front, to
form it on left into line after rectifying the positions
of the left guides, the colonel will command:
1. On left into line, wheel, 2. MARCH,
259. At the first command the 1st lieutenants will
briskly place themselves on the direction oftheir left
guides at a point about where the right of their com
panies will rest when in line, and facing to this
guide will be assured on their direction by the lieu
tenant-colonel.
260. At the command march each company will
wheel to the left, on the principles prescribed for the
wheel from a halt, and as the right guides arrive with
in three paces of the new line, each captain will com
mand, such company HALT, right DRESS, which will be
executed as heretofore explained.
261. The lieutenant-colonel placed on the extreme
right will observe that each company is accurately
aligned by its chief, and in cases of error may order
such company forward or back as the case may be,
then command, FRONT and resume his place in line.
262. A column left in front will form on right into line
according to the same principles, the 1st lieutenant
moving on the line at a point where the left of their
companies will rest when in line, and facing to their
right guides
263. A column by battalion will form itselfinto line,
either with the right or left in front, by the same com
mands and principles, in this case the majors will
command and cause to be executed what has been
prescribed for the captains, and the adjutants what
has been indicated for 1st lieutenants.
261. If the column be in march and the colonel
should wish to form line and continue to move for
ward, without halting, he will command:
1. By companies, left wheel. 2. MARCH.
265. At the command march, each company will
wheel left on a fixed pivot, and as the right ofeach
company arrives near the line the colonel will com
mand:
3. Forward. 4. Guide centre. 5. MARCH.
266. At the fourth command the color bearer will
take points of direction as heretofore explained; at
the fifth given at the instant the wheel is completed
the companies will march directly to the front, touch
ing lightly towards the centre.
 !es« 3}©3}
** 92672* 2 ཏི རཱུ
ཨཊྛ ཨཝཾ ཨཝཾཙྩ
བྷཱ ཝ, རཾཔྤཡཱཔར
རཱུ ཎཱར་ པི
- ་ }
 Fig. 27. P 129

Fig. 26. P 125

D ^

E
ITT

<..<<<

C
H
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.. 129
To form by inversion right (or left) into line.
267. Should a column right in front be under the
necessity of instantly forming a line faced to the re
verse flank, the colonel will command:
1. By inversion, right into line, wheel. 2. MARCH.
268. At the second command, each company will
whee Ito the right as prescribed for a wheel from ahalt,
and be halted and aligned to the left by its chief on
the same principles indicated in No. 260 and following.
269. A column left in front will form by inversion
left into line, according to the same principles.
270. Ifthe regiment is to move forward after wheel
ing by inversion into line, the colonel will add the
commands prescribed in No. 265,
A column atfull distance on right into line.
271. A column by company right infront at full dis
tance having to form itself on right into line, the
colonel will indicate to the lieutenant-colonel a little
in advance of the point where the right of the line is
to rest when formed, who will briskly move to that
point, and post a marker, (the adjutant of leading
battalion) facing the direction the column is march
ing, he will then place a second marker (a 1st lieuten
tenant) on the direction and at about battalion dis
tance from and facing to the first marker; the colonel
will then command:
(Fig. 27.) 1. On right into line. 2. Guide right.
272. At the second command the right will become
the directing flank, the right guide of the leading
company will march straight forward up to the turn
ing point, the following guides marching in his trace.
273. The leading company on arriving near the first
marker, its chief will command:
1. First company. 2. Right turn. 3. MARCH.
274. At the command march, this company will turn
to the right, its right guide will direct his march on
the first marker, so that when in line his breast will
rest lightly against the left elbow of this marker,
when at three paces from the line, the captain will
command:
1. First company. 2. HALT. 3. Right-DRESS. 4. FRONT.
275. At the second command the company will halt,
the files not yet in line will come up briskly, the
right guide will place himself on the line touching
the left elbow of the marker; at the third the com
I.
130 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
panywill align themselves on this guide, and at the
fourth the captain will resume his place.
276. The second company will continue to march
straight forward, passing in rear ofthe first, and as it
approaches opposite the left flank of the first com
pany, its chief will command, and cause to be ex
ecuted what has just been prescribed for the first.
277. At the instant this company is formed the adju
tant and the left company 1st lieutenant of the next
(second) battalion will move briskly on the line, the
first will place himself four paces totheleft of the last
file of the second company and facing to the right
will cover accurately the two markers already estab
lished; the 1st lieutenant near the point where the
left of the second battalion will rest, facing to the
right and covering the adjutant; the remaining bat
talions will in like manner successively execute
what hasjust been prescribed for the second.
278. The third company will continue straight for
ward, until opposite the adjutant, when it will turn
to the right as has been explained, and thus from
right to left, the odd numbered companies forming on
their adjutant, and the even numbers on the last file
ofthe odd numbers,
279. The lieutenant-colonel moving briskly along
the line will observe that the adjutants cover accu
rately, and when the line is formed will correct any
errors that may occur, then command FRONT, when
the markers will resume their places in line.
280. The colonel will give a general superintendance
to the movement, passing along the front, will be
always opposite the company about to turn, that he
may better judge of the correctness of their move
ments.
281. A column left in front will be formed on left
into line according to the same principles.
282. In order that the foregoing movements, (right
or left into line) may be executed with regularity, the
first marker should be posted, so that the guide of
each company after turning may have at least ten
paces to march before arriving upon the line.
283. In the first exercises this line will be estab
lished on a line parallel to that of the column; but
after the officers become familiar with the move
ments the colonel may chose oblique directions in
order to habituate the regiment to form line in any
direction; in this case, where the line forms a sensible
angle with the direction ofthe column, the colonel,
before beginning the movement, will cause the head
of the column to change direction parallel with this
line; all the other subdivisions will come up succes
 re

rde

Co

ex

in

1
1
1
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 181
sively and change direction at the same point, by
this means all the guides ofthe column after turning
will have about the same number of steps to take, in
order to come up on the line.
284. In executing this movement, should the column
wish to commence firing, he will instruct the captain
of the leading company to this effect; this captain,
after forming on the line will place himselfbehind
the centre of his company, and as soon as the next
captain shall have commanded front, he will com
mence the fire by file, by the commands prescribed in
school of the company, at the command fire byfile,
the first marker will retire; the captain of the second
company will commence firing as soon as the captain
of the third has commanded front, and thus in con
tinuation from right to left; the guides or markers,
who may be in front of companies, will retire at the
caution from the captains offirebyfile,
285. In all successive formations when firing is to be
executed by file, the same principles will be observed;
this fire will always be executed by the command of
each captain,
Movementfrom column at full distance, forwardinto line.
286. The column being by company, at full distance
right in front, and at a halt, to form it forward into
line, the colonel will first conform to what is pre
scribed in No. 271 , and then command:
(Fig. 28.) 1. Front into line. 2. MARCH,
287. At the first command the chief of the leading
company will briskly give the caution, first company
forward, guide right, the chiefs of all the remaining
companies will rapidly command:
1. Such company. 2. Left halfwheel.
288. At the command march, briskly repeated , the
first company will move forward, halt at three paces
from the line, and be aligned upon the markers by its
chief, all the remaining companies at the word march,
will make a halfwheel to the left on fixed pivots,
and when the wheel is nearly completed , the captains
will add:
3. Forward. 4. Guide right. 5, MARCH.
289. At the fourth command the men will touch to
the right; at the fifth, given at the instant the wheel
is completed, the company will cease to wheel, and
march straight forward, the right guides of each com
pany will follow the file immediately before him.
290. When the second company shall arrive opposite
132 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
the left file of the first, its chiefwill cause it to turn to
the right, by the command:
1. Second company. 2. Right turn, (and when its right
guide shall be within three paces from the line he
he will add): 3. HALT. 4. Right-DRESS.
291. At the third command the company will halt;
the files not yet in line will come up promptly, the
left guide will place himself promptly on the line,
and be assured in his position by the lieutenant
colonel; at the fourth the company will align itself
between this guide and the left file of the first com
pany.
292. At the instant the guide of the second company
turns to the right, the guide of the third ceases to fol
low the file immediately before him, but will march
straight forward; and when he shall arrive opposite
the left file of the second company, his captain will
cause to be executed what has just been prescribed for
the second, each following company will execute
what hasjust been prescribed for the third.
293. The formation ended, the lieutenant-colonel
will conform to what is indicated in No. 279.
294. A column left in front will form front into line
according to the same principles and by inverse
means.
295. When the column by company, right in front, at
full distance is in march and shall arrive behind the
right ofthe line, the colonel will indicate to the lieu
tenant-colonel in advance the point where the right
of the line will rest, when this officer will proceed
briskly to post markers on this line as heretofore ex
plained.
296. The head of the column arriving within com
pany distance ofthe line of markers, the colonel will
command:
1. Front into line. 2. MARCH.
297. At the first command the captains will all con
form to what is prescribed in No. 287.
298, At the command march, the principles and com
mands prescribed in No. 288 and following will be ob
served.
299. If the colonel should wish to form the column
forward into line without halting, he will not cause
markers to be posted, the movement willbe executed
by the same commands and according to the same
principles, except that he will precede the command
march with that of double quick.
300. At the word march, the first company will con
 881 7

Xecute
colonel
to line
inverse
ront,at
indthe
e lien
e right
proceed
ore ex
zcolml.
elwi

1con- .
com.
be ob
lumsne
cau
cutmede
sa
mand
Icon
‫ار‬
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 1133
tinue to march in quick time, the lieutenant-colonel
will assure the right guide of this company on the
direction , the second company will resume the same
gait as soon as it shall arrive on the line with the first,
the remaining companies moving in double quick
time, will on arriving on a line with those already
formed, conform to what has just been prescribed for
the second, each company will preserve the touch of
elbows to the right, until the colonel commands
guide centre, which wili be given when the color
company shall arrive on the line.
301. If the command halt should be given before
this movement is completed, the companies not yet
in line will move up promptly and complete the
movement.
302. Should the column by company, be at a halt,
· right in front, and the colonel wishing to form forward
intol ine on fifth company will indicate his intention
to the lieutenant-colonel, who will briskly movetothe
right ofthis company and post two markers, the first
(the adjutant of the third battalion) in advance of,
and grazing the breast of the right guide of this com
pany, facing to the right; the second (1st lieutenant of
the sixth company) on the line at battalion distance
from the first facing to the right and at a point where
the left ofthe third battalion will rest when formed,
these dispositions being made, he will command:
(Fig. 29.) 1. On fifth company. 2. Front into line.
3. MARCH.
303. At the second command the chief ofthe fifth
company will command, fifth company right-DRESS,
the chief of all the companies in rear of this (fifth)
will briskly command, such company left halfwheel, at
the same instant the chiefs of all the companies in
advance of the fifth, or base company will briskly
command, such companies about-FACE, which will
be executed promptly and then add: lefthalfwheel.
304. At the command march, the base company will
he aligned on the first marker as heretofore explain
ed; the remaining companies will execute a half
wheel to the left, then receive from their chiefs the
command forward, guide right.
305. At the instant the movement commences, the
adjutant of the second battalion and the 1st lieuten
ant of the right company in this battalion will move
rapidly on the prolongation of the line; the first will
take post, facing to, and four paces from the first
marker, whom he will cover accurately, the 1st lieu
tenant will place himself a little without the point
where the right ofhis battalion will rest when form
 134 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
ed, face toward the first marker and both be assured
in their positions by the lieutenant-colonel.
306. As the right guide of the fourth company ar
rives opposite the adjutant, its chief will command:
1. Fourth company. 2. Right turn, when this company
will turn to the right around this adjutant, pass the
line of markers about four paces, when he will add:
3. Company- HALT. 4. About FACE, then placing him
selfon the line ofmarkers, and opposite the right of
his company, will align the same to the left, on the
adjutant, by the command:
5. Left- DRESS. 6. FRONT.
307. The chief of the third company at the instant
his right guide arrives opposite to the right ofthe
fourth company, will cause it to turn to the right,
pass the line, then execute what is prescribed from
that position in No. 306.
308. At the moment this (the third) company halts
and faces about, the adjutant of the first battalion
will place himself on the prolongation ofthe line of
markers, and four paces without the point where the
right of this company is to rest, facing to the first
marker; the 1st lieutenant ofthe first company will
place himself as indicated for 1st lieutenant in No.
308; the second and third companies will then place
themselves on the line by conforming to what has
been prescribed for the fourth and third.
309. All the companies in rear of the fifth , or base
company, will conform to what is prescribed in No.
289 and following.
310, The aide-de-camp will assure the markers of
the left wing in their positions, and when the move
ment is completed the lieutenant-colonel will execute
what is prescribed in No. 279.
311. A column may be formed forward into line on
any designated company, according to the same prin
ciples.
312. The precision of the foregoing movements de
pend materially on the markers, in placing them
selves promptly on the line, and at their proper dis
tances, as herein prescribed; and in the captains
giving the command forward at the instant their
companies have made the eighth part of a circle in
wheeling.
313. Should a company encounter an obstacle in
moving forward to place itself on the line, its chief
will cause it to face by the right flank and file left, by
the commands indicated in school of the company,
the right guide will continue to follow the file behind
which he was marching, and preserve exactly the
P 135
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 135
same distance from this file, the obstacle being passed
the company will again be formed into line by com
mand ofits chief.
To form line faced to the rear,
314. The column being by company at full distance,
right in front and at a halt, to cause it to form line,
faced to the rear, the colonel will signify his inten
tion to the lieutenant-colonel, who will briskly move
forward and post two markers; the first (the leading
adjutant) at company distance in advance ofthe lead
ing company, and on the prolongation of the line of
left guides in the column, facing the direction to be
given to the line; the second (the lieutenant of first
company) at company distance in advance, and on a
line with the right guides of the column, facing to the
first marker, the colonel will then command:
(Fig. 30.) 1. Into line, face to the rear. 2. MARCH.
315. At the first command each captain will briskly
command, such company rightface.
316 At the command march, the leading company
will wheel by file to the left, and direct its march to
wards the line, passing in rear of the 1st lieutenant,
and after crossing the line about three paces will
wheel by file to the left, by command of its chief, and
march parallel with the line, at the instant its right
guide arrives opposite the adjutant, he will add:
HALT. FRONT. Right-DRESS, when he will align his
company on these two markers.
317. All remaining companies will put themselves
in march by the right flank, at the same time each
directing itself on the point where its left will rest
when in line.
318. At the instant the companies are put in march
the 1st lieutenant of the second company will move
rapidly on the line and place himself facing to and
covering the two markers, and at company distance
from the second, thus marking the point where the
left of his company will rest when formed; the adju
tant ofthesecond battalion will next place himselfon
the line four paces in rear of this lieutenant, at the
point where the right of his battalion will rest, and
the 1st lieutenants ofthis battalion will briskly place
themselves on the line where the left of their com
panies will rest, and thus in succession from right to
left.
319. The chief of the second company marching
abreast with his right guide will direct himself on his
1st lieutenant, passing around his rear; and after
crossing the line about three paces will cause it to
 136 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
wheel by files to the left, then halting it when his
right guide is opposite to the left file of the first com
pany will place himself near his lieutenant and align
his company by the right on the left file of second
company.
320. The chiefs of the remaining companies will
conform to what has just been prescribed for the first
and second companies.
321. A column left in front will form line faced to
the rear according to the same principles and by in
verse means; in this case the adjutants will mark the
point where the left of their battalions will rest, and
the 1st lieutenant where the right of their company
will rest when formed; the companies will all face to
the left, and the captains will place themselves
abreast with their left guides.
322. If the column be in march, and should arrive
in front ofthe right of the line on which it is to form,
the lieutenant-colonel will conform to what is pre
scribed in No. 314, by posting the markers on this line,
when the head of this column shall arrive at com
pany distance from these markers, the colonel will
command:
1. Into line faced to the rear. 2. Column bythe right
flank, 3. MARCH.
323. At the command march, all the companies will
conform to what is prescribed in No. 316 and following,
and place themselves on the alignment.
Formation in line by two movements.
324, Should a column by company right in front,
and at a halt, find itselfin part on the line; that is,
supposing that the head of column has changed direc
tion to the right, and the command halt given at the
instant that the fifth company has completed the
wheel it would throw the first five companies on the
line, and the remaining five companies in rear ofthe
centre of said line, from this position the line will
be formed by two movements combined, the colonel
commanding:
(Fig. 31.) 1. To the left and front into line. 2. MARCH.
325. Atthe second command, chiefs of the rear com
panies will briskly command: by company left half
wheel.
326. At the command march, the first five compan
les will wheel left into line as prescribed in No. 260,
the five rear companies will form forward into line,
bythe principles and commands indicated in No. 288
and following ,
.1
 .31
Fig

MMMM
1.
WASANZA
+
You
0403
Kany
JJAIN STO 1
P37
M &As
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 137
327. Ifthe column be in march the colonel will give
the same commands, the chiefs of those companies
that have entered the new direction will command:
such companies left wheel, those that have not entered
upon the new direction will form forward into line.
328. Should the colonel wish, from this position to
form line without halting, he will command:
1. By companies to the left andfront into line. 2. MARCH.
329. At the first command chiefs of companies that
ave entered upon the new direction will briskly
command: such company left wheel, chiefs of rear com
panies will command: such company left half wheel
double quick.
330. At the word march, the rear companies will ex
ecute forward into line in double quick time, each of
the other companies will wheel left into line, and as
their right guides approach the line the colonel will
add:
3. Forward. 4. Guide centre. 5. MARCH.
331. If the regiment should arrive in front ofthe
centre of a line the colonel may cause the head of
column to change direction to the left, and as the
fifth (or any) company is making the wheel to enter
the new direction the colonel will command:
1. On left, and into line faced to the rear. 2. MARCH.
332. Atthe first command, chiefs of rear companies
will briskly command: such companies by the right
flank.
333. At the command march, the first companies will
form left into line, the rear companies into line faced to
therear, see No. 316 and following.
• Manner of passing from column at half distance into line,
334. A column at half distance right in front having
to form on left into line will take distance by one of
the principles prescribed in No. 212, and then form
line according to the principles indicated in No. 258
and following.
335. The column by company at half distance being
in march, should it be necessary to form rapidly into
line the colonel will command:
1. On rear company left into line, wheel. 2. MARCH .
336. At the first command the adjutant of the lead
ing battalion will move rapidly to the front, and place
himself on the line a little beyond where the right
will rest when formed, and on the prolongation of the
left guides of the column, the captain of the rear com.
138 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS .
pany will command: left wheel, the other captains
will caution their companies to march straight for
ward, and place themselves two paces outside the left
guide oftheir companies.
337. At the command march, repeated by the cap
tain of the rear company the guide will halt, and this
company will wheelleft on a fixed pivot; on arriving
near the line its captain will halt it and align it by
the left.
338. When the captain of the ninth (or company
next the rear) has gained ground sufficient to the front
to allow the rear company to form into line, he will
command: 1. Ninth company. 2. Left wheel. 3. MARCH,
the left guide will halt, face to the rear, and place
himself on on the alignment of the rear company,
then face to the front, this company will wheel left,
and be aligned as prescribed for the rear company.
.339. The other companies will successively conform
to what has been prescribed for the ninth.
340. Adjutants will successively mark the points
where the left of their battalions will rest, in order to
preserve the four paces interval between each bat
talion.
341. A column at half distance right in front will
form right into line by the same commands and
means indicated in No. 273 and following.
342. A column at half distance will be formed into
line faced to the rear, on the principles prescribed
for a column at full distance.
343. Should the colonel wish to form a column at
half distance forward into line, he will cause it to
close in mass and deploy it on one ofthe companies.
Deployment ofcolumn closed in mass.
344. When a column by battalion closed in mass ar
rives behind the right of the ground it is to occupy in
line, the colonel will indicate to the lieutenant
colonel a little in advance the direction of the line,
and the point where the right is to rest; the lieutenant
colonel will briskly move to that point, and post two
markers, thefirst at the point indicated, and the
second a littleless than the front of a battalion from
the first.
315. As the column approaches to within about four
paces ofthe markers, the colonel will command:
(Fig. 32.) 1. Regiment-HALT. 2. On first battalion de
ploy column.
346. At the first command the adjutant ofthe rear
battalion will move rapidly on the prolongation of
the line of markers to a point a little beyond where
 32.
Fig 188
P
<·
.
<<<
 3
*** 12
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 139
the left of the regiment will rest when deployed, then
facing the markers will cover them accurately.
347. At the second command the chief of the first
will caution his battalion to stand fast, the chiefs of
the remaining battalions will each cemmand: such
battalion left FACE, and place themselves abreast
with the left guides oftheir battalion faced to the left.
348. The adjutant of the second battalion will
promptly place himself on the line of markers where
the right of his battalion will rest when deployed; the
colonel will then add:
3. MARCH. (or double quick march.)
349. At this command the chief of the first battalion
will go to its right and align his battalion on the first
two markers, by the command: 1. Right-DRESS, 2.
FRONT, and place himself before its centre.
350. The four battalions that have faced to the left
will put themselves in march straight forward; the
left guide of the second will direct himself parrallelly
to the line of markers: the left guides of the the third,
fourth and fifth, marching abreast with the left guide
of the second, each preserving their prescribed dis
tance from the other, the chief of the second battalion
will stand fast, see his battalion file past him, and at
the instant his right guide is abreast with his adju
tant, he will command;
1. Second battalion. 2. HALT. 8. FRONT.
351. At the third command this battalion will face
to the front, and should there be any openings be
tween the files they will be promptly closed to the
right, the left guides ofboth companies will step upon
the line, face to the right and place themselves on the
direction of the markers established before the first
battalion, each guide opposite the left file of his com
pany, the major will place himself on the line outside
his adjutant, and as the left guides are assured on the
direction he will add: 4. Right dress, and after com
pleting the alignment, FRONT.
352. The third, fourth and fifth battalions will con
tinue to march straight forward, at the command
halt, given to the second battalion , the chief of the
third will himself stop short, abreast with the left file
of the second, and allow his battalion to file past him,
at the same time his adjutant will move briskly on
the line to where the right of his battalion is to rest,
face to the right and cover accurately the markers
already established .
353. As the right guide of the third battalion arrives
opposite this adjutant, the major will command:
140 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS .
1. Third battalion. 2. HALT. 3. FRONT.
354. As soon as this battalion has faced to the right,
its chief will place himself before its centre, and add:
4. Forward, guide right. 5. MARCH.
355. At the command march, the battalion will ap
proach the lines; the right guide will direct himself
on the adjutant so as to present his breast to his right
arm, when the battalion arrives within three paces of
the alignment its chief will halt it and align it by
the right.
356. The chief of the fourth and fifth battalions (and
their adjutant) will conform to what has just been
prescribed for the third.
357. The deployment being completed the lieuten
ant-colonel will comply with what is indicated in
No. 279.
358. Should the colonel wish to deploy the column
without halting and continue the march when in
line, markers will not be posted, the colonel will
command:
1. Onfirst battalion. 2. Deploy column. 3. MARCH.
359. At the second command the chief of the first
battalion will command, guide right, the chiefs ofthe
remaining battalions will each command: 1. Such
battalion. 2. Bythe left flank. 3. Double quick, and place
themselves in front of their left guides.
360. At the command march, the first battalion will
move straight forward in quick time; the second, third,
fourth and fifth battalions will face to the left in
marching and move off in that direction in double
quick time.
361. The chief ofthe second will stand fast, allow his
battalion to file past him, and when his right guide
arrives opposite him he will command:
1. Second battalion. 2. By the rightflank. 3. MARCH. 4.
Guide right.
362. At the third command, the adjutant will move
rapidly towards his place in line in front ofthe right
guide, atthe fourth the right guide will direct himself
on the adjutant, when this battalion arrives on the
line, its chief will command: quick time-MARCH, at
this it will take the step from the first battalion and
move square to the front.
363. The chiefs of the third, fourth and fifth battal
ions will each successively conform to what has been
prescribed for the second,
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 141
364. The column by battalion being at a halt, to
cause it to deploy on fifth or rear battalion; the
colonel will cause three markers to be posted bythe
lieutenant-colonel, about ten paces in advance ofthe
leading battalion, the first on the prolongation ofthe
line of left guides and facing the direction to be given
the line; the second at battalion distance from the
first, the third without the point where the right ofthe
line will rest, covering accurately and facing the
first two.
365. These dispositions being made the colonel will
command:
1. On fifth (or rear) battalion deploy column. 2. MARCH.
366. At the first command the chief of the fifth or
rear battalion will caution it to stand fast, the chiefs
of all the preceding battalions will command: such
battalion right-FACE, and place themselves abreast
with their right guides.
367. At the command march, all except the fifth (or
rear) battalion will put themselves in march by the
right flank, the guide of the first directing himself
about four paces in rear of the line marked by the
right guide, the chief of the fourth or battalion next
the rear will stand fast, see his battalion file past and
halt it when its left guide is abreast with him and
cause it to face to the front; should their be openings
between the files they will promptly close to the left.
368. The chief of the fifth, when he sees his battalion
nearly unmasked by the four preceding, he will com
mand:
1. Fifth battalion forward. 2. Guide left. 3. MARCH.
369. At the command march, given at the instant
his front is unmasked this battalion will approach
the line of markers, and when at four paces from that
line, he will add:
4. HALT. 5. Left-DRESS. 6. FRONT.
370. At the fifth command the battalion will dress
forward on the markers.
371. At the instant the fourth battalion is unmasked
by the third, its chief will cause it to approach the
line, halt and align it in the manner just prescribed
for the fifth.
372. The moment this battalion halts the adjutant
and 1st lieutenant of the right company will place
themselves on the line, faced to the left, covering ac
curately the markers in front of the fifth, the first at
the point where the left of the battalion will rest, and
142 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
the other at a little less than the front ofthe battal
ion in his rear.
373. The third, second and first battalions will each
successively conform to what has just been prescribed
for the fourth.
374. The deployment being ended the lieutenant
colonel will correct the alignment if necessary, and
command: FRONT, when the markers will resume
their places in line.
375. Should the colonel wish to deploy on fifth bat
talion and continue to march forward, he will not
cause markers to be posted , the movement will be ex
ecuted by the same commands and upon the same
principles, except that when the fifth battalion is un
masked, it will continue to march straight forward
in quick time without being halted, taking the touch
of elbows to the left; the fourth battalion on being
unmasked will face by the left flank in marching and
move to the front in double quick time; when it ar
rives on the alignment of the fifth it will retake the
step in quick time by command of its chief, and dress
to the left until the command, guide centre is given by
the colonel.
376. The chiefs of the third, second and first battal
ions will conform to what has been prescribed for the
fourth .
To advance in line.
377. The regiment being correctly aligned should
the colonel wish to advance in line he will signify his
intention to the lieutenant-colonel and place himself
about thirty paces in rear of the color, faced to the
front.
378. The lieutenant-colonel will place himself a like
distance in advance of the color, faced to the colonel,
who will establish him as correctly as possible by
signal, on a line perpendicular to the front of the
regiment; the colonel will next, above the heads of
the lieutenant-colonel and color-bearer, take a point
of direction in the field beyond, exactly in the pro
longation of the first two points.
379. The color-bearer will be instructed to take, the
moment the lieutenant-colonel shall be established
on the perpendicular, two points onthe ground in the
straight line, which drawn from himself would pass
between the heels of this officer; the first will be taken
fifteen or twenty paces from the color-bearer, and the
other beyond the lieutenant-colonel.
380. These dispositions being made, the colonel will
command:
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 143
I. Regiment forward. 2. Guide centre.
881. At the second command the 2d lieutenant and
color-bearers of the color platoon will advance with
the color six paces to the front, the sergeant and two
men of the rear rank of this platoon will place them
selves in the front rank of the line, at the same time
the 1st lieutenant of the right and left flank compan
ies will each place themselves abreast with the color
bearers, the first six paces in advance of the right
guide of the extreme right company, and the other a
like distance in front ofthe left guide of the extreme
left company.
382. The lieutenant- colonel having assured the color
bearer on the line between himself and the man of
the color file now in the front rank will place himself
promptly ten or twelve paces to the right of the ma
jor of the color battalion, and will maintain this
major and those on his right, abreast with the color,
and to this end he will caution them to lengthen or
shorten the step as may be necessary; the aide-de
camp will in like manner and for a similar purpose,
place himself six or eight paces to the left of the color
rank.
383. These positions being taken the colonel will
add: 3. MARCH.
384. At the word march, the regiment will step off
with life, the color-bearer charged with the direction
will scrupulously observe the length and cadence of
the step, marching on the prolongation of the two
points previously taken, and successively taking
others in advance by the means heretofore explained,
the 2d lieutenant on the right, and the man on the
left ofthe color-bearers will march in the same step,
keeping their shoulders square and in line.
385. The two 1st lieutenants will march in the same
step with the color rank, each maintaining himself
abreast with that rank without observing the move
ment of the other.
386. The captains will observe the march oftheir
companies, directing the men to feel lightly the el
bow towards the centre and resisting pressure com
ing from the flank.
To haltthe regiment marching in line, and to align it.
387. The regiment marching in line when the colonel
shall wish to halt and and align it, he will command:
1. Regiment. 2. HALT.
388. At the second command the regiment will halt,
the color and guides will remain in front, the colonel
will indicate to the lieutenant-colonel the direction
144 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
to be given the line, this lieutenant-colonel will move
to the right and caution the right guide, and the
color-bearer to face to him, and then by a signal ofthe
sabre establish them on the direction, as soon as they
shall be established , the left guide will place himself
on their direction.
389. The color-bearer will carry the lance perpen
dicularly between his eyes on intimation from the
adjutant to face to him, and at the same signal the
lieutenant and the men of his rank will return to
their places in line.
390. This disposition being made, the colonel will
command:
1. Guides-ON THE LINE.
391. At this command the right guides of each com
pany of the right wing and the left guides of each
company of the left wing will place themselves on the
direction facing to the color-bearer, each placing
himself in rear of the guide of the company next to
wards the color, at a distance equal to the front of his
company and align himself upon the color-bearer
and the general guide beyond.
392. The lieutenant-colonel if necossary, will
promptly rectify the positions of the guides of the
right wing, and the aide-de-camp, those of the left
wing, which being executed the colonel will add:
2. On centre- DRESS.
393. At this command the companies will move up
in quick time and place themselves on the align
ment as heretofore explained.
394. Should this line of guides be oblique to the for
mer line the captains will take care to conform their
companies to it in marching them towards the align
ment.
395. The lieutenant-colonel will give a general
superintendance to the alignment and, when com
plete, will command: FRONT, when the color and
guides will promptly take their places in line.
To march in retreat in line.
396. The regiment being at a halt and in line to
march in retreat, the colonel will command:
1. Face by the rear rank. 2. Regiment About-FACE.
397. At the second command the regiment will face
to the rear, the color-bearers and 2d lieutenant will
pass into the rear rank, now front, the sergeant and
two men of their file will pass into the front rank,
covering them, the colonel will place himself about
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 145
thirty paces in rear ofthe front rank, and the lieu
tenant-colonel a like distance in front of (the color
in ) the rear rank.
398. The colonel after assuring lieutenant- colonel
on the perpendicular as indicated in No. 378, will
command:
1. Regiment forward. 2. Guide centre.
399. At this command the color-bearers will advance
six paces in front of the rear rank accompanied by
the 2d lieutenant of the color platoon, the sergeant
and two men of their file placing themselves in the
rear rank and filling their places, the 1st lieutenant
of the flank companies will place themselves abreast
with the color rank on the principles prescribed in
No. 381, the company guides having passed into the
rear rank, now front.
400. The majors will move rapidly around either
flank oftheir battalions, and place themselves before
its centre, and on a line with the color rank, the cap
tains and 1st lieutenants will march in the rear ofthe
front rank, the lieutenant-colonel and aide-de-camp
will place themselves on a line with the color rank,
and maintain the majors on the line as indicated in
No. 382, except that the first will be on the left ofthe
major ofthe color battalion , and the other on the right
of the major of the color file, these dispositions being
promptly made, the colonel will add:
3. MARCH.
401. At the word march the regiment will move to
the rear, upon the same principles as those prescribed
for the march to the front.
Tohalt the regiment marching in retreat and face it to the
front.
402. The colonel having halted the regiment by the
commands indicated in No. 387, will cause it to face to
the front by the command:
1. Facebythefront rank. 2. Regiment About-FACE.
403. At the second command the color rank guides
and majors will promptly take their places in line,
the color-bearers and lieutenant passing into the
front rank.
404. The alignment of the regiment after marching
in retreat and then facing to the front, will be con
ducted in the same manner and according to the
same principles prescribed in No. 388 and following,
except that the color-bearer and guides will move to
J
146 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
the front on intimation from the lieutenant-colonel ,
and then place themselves on the direction.
Passage of obstacles.
405. The regiment advancing in line will be sup
posed to encounter an obstacle which covers the front
of one battalion ; in this case the colonel will cause it
to ploy into column at full distance in rear of the bat
talion next towards the color; if the obstacle should
present itself before the first battalion while advanc
ing, the colonel will command:
First battalion- OBSTACLE.
406. At this command the major of this battalion
will face to the line, and command:
1. First battalion by the left flank to the rear into column.
2. Double quick. 3. MARCH.
407. At the first command the adjutant will place
himself on the left of the battalion, to conduct it pass
ing in front.
408. At the word march, this battalion will face to
the left in marching, the adjutant placing himself
abreast with the left guide will conduct this battalion
behind and parallel to the second; the major will him
selfhalt when abreast with the right guide of the sec
ond battalion, and allow his battalion to file past
him; when the last file shall be nearly abreast with
him, he will add:
4. Bythe rightflank. 5. Guide right. 6. MARCH.
409. Atthe command march, the battalion will face
to the right in marching and continue the same gait
until it shall arrive at battalion distance from the
second, when the major will again add: 7. Quick time.
& MARCH, and place himselfbefore its centre.
410. This battalion will then continue to follow in
column behind the second; and at wheeling distance,
its right guide following in the trace ofthe right guide
of the second until the obstacle is passed, when the
colonel will command:
1. First battalion into line.
411. At this command the major will face to his bat
talion, and command:
1. First battalion right oblique. 2. Double quick.
3. MARCH.
412. At the third command, the battalion will move
in double quick time obliquely to the right, and as
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 147
soon as its left guide has cleared the right guide ofthe
second battalion, the major will add: 4. Forward. 5,
Guide left, and as it arrives on the line, 6. Quick time.
7. MARCH, all of which will be conducted upon the
principles of forward into line without halting, as
heretofore explained .
413. Should an obstacle occur before the front ofany
particular company it will ploy into column behind
the remaining company of its battalion, its major
commanding:
Such company, obstacle.
414. At this command the captain will command
and cause to be executed what has just been pre
scribed for ploying a battalion, observing to ploy in
rear ofthe remaining of his own battalion and at com
pany distance.
415. The obstacle being passed the major will add:
such company into line, which will be executed accord
ing to the same principles prescribed in No. 412.
To changefrontforward.
416. The regiment being in line should the colonel
wish to change front forward on the right company
offirst battalon he will cause three markers to be post
ed, the first touching lightly the right elbow of the
right guide of the regiment, faced to the front, the
second a little less than company distance from the
first, facing to him, and on a line perpendicular to
the front of the regiment, the third without the point
where the left of the line will rest when formed,
facing to and covering accurately the first two, these
dispositions being made the colonel will command:
1. Change front forward on right company offirst battal
ion, 2. MARCH.
417. At the first command, the chief of the right
company will give the caution, first company right
wheel, chiefs of all the remaining companies will each
promptly command.
Such company right half wheel.
418. At the word march, the first company will
wheel right and be aligned on the markers; all the
remaining companies will make a half wheel to the
right, then receive from their chiefs the command,
forward, guide right, and be conducted and formed
upon line as prescribed in Nos. 289 and 290.
419. The front may be changed forward on any in
termediate company, upon the same principles, the
148 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
colonel designating the company on which the line is
to be formed in the commands; in this case the com
pany forming the basis, will wheel right and be align
ed on the markers; those in its rear will conform to
what is prescribed in Nos. 417 and 418; those companies
who are in front ofthe company designated will be
faced about by command of their chiefs, then after
executing a half wheel to the right, will move upon
the line, be faced about and aligned by the left.
420. Changes of front perpendicularly to the rear,
may be executed upon the same principles and by
inverse means.
To ploy the regiment into close column doubled on the
centre.
421. This movement consists in ploying the corres
ponding companies of the right and left wings into
column at company distance, or closed in mass, in
rear of the two centre companies, according to the
principles prescribed in No. 74 and following.
422. The colonel wishing to form the double column
at company distance, (the regiment being in line) will
command;
(Fig. 33.) 1. Double column at half distance. 2. MARCH .
423. At the first command, the chief of the third, (or
centre) battalion will caution his battalion to stand
fast; the chiefs of those on its right will promptly
command: such battalion left face, and the chiefs of all
on its left will cause their battalions to promptly face
to the right; the captains ofthe right wing will place
themselves abreast with their left guides and break
two files to the rear.
424. At the command march, the third battalion will
stand fast; all the other companies, each conducted by
their captains, will move off and place themselves in
column at company distance, in rear ofthe third bat
talion, the left company of the second battalion unit
ing with the right company of the fourth, and the
right of the second uniting with the left of the fourth,
and thus alternately will each corresponding com
pany ofthe two wings unite into battalions in arrang
ing themselves into column; an instant before the
union at the centre of the column, each captain will
command:
1. Such company. 2. HALT. 3. FRONT.
425, The majors and adjutants will followthe move
ment of their right companies, and at the instant the
union is formed and the companies faced to the front,
the majors will promptly align them by the right and
 33.
Fig [
[
[
[
[ 148
P
4.5.
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 149
at company distance in rear ofthe preceding compan
ies, then take positions as in column by battalion.
426. The battalions thus formed will be numbered
from front to rear; first, second , third , &c.
427. The music when the movement commences,
will move briskly to the rear of the column; the lieu
tenant-colonel will successively assure the right
guides upon the direction.
428. The regiment in line being in march, should
the colonel wish to form the double column at com
pany distance, he will command;
1. Double column at halfdistance. 2. MARCH.
429. At the first command the chief of the third bat
talion will caution it to continue straight forward; all
the other majors will caution their battalions to face
to the right or left.
430. At the command march, the third battalion will
continue straight forward, the major commanding,
guide right; the color will retake its place in the front
rank, and the men will take the touch of elbows to
the right, the four right companies will face to the left
in marching, and the four left companies to the right;
each company conducted by its captain will place it
self behind the company of the wing to which it be
longs, gaining as much ground as possible towards
the head of column.
431. The corresponding companies of each wing will
unite into battalion on taking their positions in
column, and each captain at the instant his company
arrives at the centre of the column , will command:
Such company by the right (or left)flank-MARCH.
432. The majors conforming to what is prescribed in
No. 425 will at the instant the companies face to the
front,
mand: place himself before their centre, and com
Guide right.
433. The double column closed in mass will be form
ed according to the same principles, and by the same
commands, substituting closed in mass for that of at
half distance.
Deployment of the double column faced to thefront.
434. The double column being at a halt, should the
colonel wish to deploy it, he will cause a marker to
be posted before the right and left guides of the third
(now first) battalion , and a third before the left guide
of the right company of this battalion, this being
done the adjutants of the first and fifth battalions
150 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
will move rapidly on the alignment of those markers
and a little beyond where the right and left flanks
ought to rest, he will then command:
1. Deploy column. 2. MARCH.
435. The column will deploy itself on the third bat
talion, upon the principles prescribed for the deploy
ment ofcolumns in mass, as heretofore explained.
436. The deployment being ended, the lieutenant
colonel will correct the alignment, and then com
mand, FRONT, when the markers will resume their
places in line,'
Toformfrom double column into line, faced to the right.
437. The double column being at a halt and at com
pany distance, may be formed into line, faced to the
right or left, should the colonel wish to reform on
right into line, he will command:
1. Right into line. 2. Guide right. 3. MARCH.
438. At the first command, each captain will face to
his company, and those of the right companies will
briskly command: such company right wheel, those of
the left companies, such companiesforward, guide right.
439. Atthe command march, all the right companies
will wheel to the right, halt, and be aligned by their
chiefs; the left companies will conform to what is in
dicated in No. 276 and following, on forming on right
into line.
440. To form from double column, left into line may
be executed according to the same principles and by
inverse means, the colonel commanding:
1. Left into line. 2. Guide left. 3. MARCH.
441. At the command march, the left companies will
wheel left into line, and the right companies will
form on left into line, as indicated in No. 281.
Dispositions against cavalry.
442. The regiment being in column by company at
full distance, right in front, and at a halt, should the
colonel wish to form square, he will first cause battal
ions to be formed, and then command:
1. Form square. 2. Close column at half distance.
3. MARCH.
443. At the command march, the column will close
to company distance, by the principles heretofore ex
plained; the music will promptly place itself in the
rear of the centre of the second, and the surgeon and
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 151
other staff officers in rear of the centre of the third
battalion.
444. At the moment the movement commences the
aide-de-camp will place himself on the right of the
column, abreast with the leading battalion; these dis
positions being made, the column may be put in
march or caused to form square by the command:
(Fig. 34.) 1. Form square. 2. MARCH.
445. At the first command the lieutenant-colonel
facing to the left guides, and the aide-de-camp facing
the right, will each align these guides on the right
and left guides ofthe fifth or rear battalion; the major
ofthe first battalion will caution it to stand fast, that
of the second, third and fourth will promptly com
mand: such battalion right and left wheel; the chief of
the fifth battalion will give the caution, forward, guide
left.
446. At the command march, the first battalion will
stand fast, its officers taking post as in line of battle,
its right file facing to the right, and its left file facing
to the left, the second, third and fourth battalions
will wheel the right companies right into line, and
the left companies left into line, the music, surgeon,
&c. will advance a space equal to half the front of a
company, and the fourth battalion will close up to
form the square, be halted, faced about and aligned
by the rear rank by its chief.
447. At the moment the alignment is completed,
field and staff, battalion and company officers will
enter the square.
448. The fronts ofthe squares will be designated as
follows: the first battalion will always be the first
front, the fifth or last battalion the fourth front, the
right companies of the other battalions the second
front, and the left companies of the same battalions
the thirdfront, the first and fourth fronts will be com
manded by their respective chiefs; the second and
third fronts by the senior majors, each taking post as
in line of battle, the colonel attended by the lieuten
ant-colonel and aide-de-camp will take position in
the centre.
449. The regiment being in line, should the colonel
wish to form rapidly into a square, he will first
form column doubled on the centre, according to the
principles prescribed in No. 422 and following, pre
ceding the command, double column at half distance,
with that of to form square, he will then form square
bythe same commands and principles indicated in
No. 444 and following; in this case the third battalion
will form the first front, the two rear companies the
152 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS .
fourth, the companies of the right wing the second,
and those of the left wing the third.
450. The regiment being formed into square should
the colonel wish to advance a short distance without
breaking into column, he will command:
1. By first (or such) front, forward. 2. MARCH.
451. At the first command the chief ofthe first front
will give the caution, such front forward, guide centre,
the chiefof the second will command, second front left
FACE, the chief of the third will command, thirdfront
right- FACE, and the fourth about―FACE, forward guide
centre.
452, At the command march, the square will put it
self in motion, the right guide of the left company of
the first front will be charged with the direction, the
companies marching by the flank will be prompt in
preserving their distances, and the fourth front will
keep constantly closed on the flanks of the second
and third fronts.
453. To halt the square the colonel will command:
1. Regiment. 2. HALT.
454. At the second command the square will halt,
the second and third fronts will be faced outwards,
and the fourth about, by commands of their respec
tive chiefs.
455. The square may be moved by either front, ac
cording tothe same principles.
456. To reduce the square and break into column the
colonel will command:
(Fig. 35.) 1. Form column, 2, MARCH,
457. At the first command the chiefofthe first front
will caution it to move forward, the chief of the sec
ond will cause it to face to the left, and then com
mand, by company by file left, the chief of the third
front will cause it to face to the right, and then com
mand, by company by file right, the chief of the fourth
will caution it to stand fast.
458. At the word march, the first front will move for
ward, be halted and aligned by the left, when it has
attained a distance equal to half its front, the corres
ponding companies of the second and third fronts,
will wheel by file to the left and right, and march to
meet each other behind the centre of the first battal
ion, and at the moment they unite, the captain of
each, will halt his company and face it to the front,
the battalion being re-formed , its chief will align it
by the left.
 P 151
A

‫ונננ‬

Fig. 34.
I
 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS. 153
459. The chief of the fourth front will face it about
and align it by the left, the music, sergeant, &c. will
on the right
flank. out of the column to their places
move
460. The column thus formed may be put in march ,
formed in line or re-formed into square.
Toform oblique squares.
461. The regiment being in line, should the colonel
wish to form an oblique square, he will command:
1. To form oblique square. 2. On first battalion, close
column at half distance. 3. MARCH.
462. At the second command the lieutenant-colonel
will trace the alignment of the first battalion by
placing himself in front of and near the right guide
of this battalion, face to the left and march twelve
paces along the front, face to the right and march
twelve paces perpendicular to the front, halt and
place a marker at this point, the adjutant of this bat
talion, will place himself, grazing the breast ofthe
right guide and faced to this marker; these two mark
ers being in position , the lieutenant-colonel will post
a third at a point about where the left of this battal
ion will rest, and covering the first two accurately.
463. The chief of the first battalion will caution it to
wheel right; chiefs of all the remaining will promptly
command:
1. Such battalion. 2. Right-FACE.
464. At the command march, the first battalion will
wheel right, halt, and be aligned on the markers; the
chief of the second battalion will break files to the
front, and placing himself abreast with his right guide
will conduct it towards the left flank of the first bat
talion, and on arriving at company distance from the
left marker, will himself halt, and cause his battalion
to file right past him, and move parallel to the align
ment of the first; as the last file of his battalion is
abreast with him, he will add: HALT. FRONT, Left
DRESS, when he will align his battalion at company
distance, in rear, and parallel to the first; the other
battalions will break files to the rear slightly, and
enter the column in the manner prescribed for the
second,
465. The column being formed the colonel will cause
it to form square, by the commands and means indi
cated in No. 444 and following.
466. The formation of an oblique square to the left
will be conducted according to the same principles,
and by inverse means.
154 REGIMENTAL EVOLUTIONS.
467. Should the regiment be already in column by
battalion at half distance, to cause it to form an ob
lique square the colonel will first cause it to change
direction by a flank, for this purpose he will com
mand:
1. To form oblique square. 2. Change direction bythe
right (orleft) flank. 3. MARCH.
468. At the second command the lieutenant-colonel
will trace the direciion in the following manner: he
will place a marker before the right and left guides of
the leading battalion, then placing himself against
the marker on the side the change is to be made, and
on the prolongation of this line will march twelve
paces, face to the left (or right) and march twelve
paces and establish a marker at this point, then a
third at a point where the right (or left) of this battal
ion will rest; this being executed at the command
march, the change of direction will be made by the
same commands and means indicated in No. 205 and
following.
The Rally.
469. The regiment being in line, the colonel may
the disperse
causewill to be sounded; at this signal the
line break and disperse.
470. To cause the line to be re-formed the colonel
will cause to the color to be sounded , and at the same
time post two markers and the color-bearer in the
direction he may wish to give the regiment.
471. At this signal each captain will rally his com
pany about six paces in rear of the place it is to occupy
in line, the colonel will then cause the color company
to be promptly established against the markers, and
each company by command of its chief will be
promptly aligned on the color company.
472. To cause the regiment to rally in column, the
colonel will cause the assembly to be sounded and
place two markers before the position to be occupied
by the first company; the chief of this company will
rally and align it on these markers, and each of the
other companies will be rallied at half distance be
hind the one which should precede it in the order in
column.

REGULATIONS .
Precedence of Corps.
1. The precedence of corps is as follows, to wit:-1st.
Light Artillery. 2nd. Cavalry. 3d. Heavy Artillery.
4th. Infantry, Platoons in companies; companies in
 REGULATIONS. 155
battalions: battalions regiments, and regiments in
brigades or divisions.
Rank and Command.
2. The rank or grade of officers and non-commis
sioned officers is as follows:
1st. Lieutenant-General, 6th. Major,
2d. Major-General, 7th. Captain ,
3d. Brigadier-General, 8th. First Lieutenant.
4th. Colonel , 9th. Second Lieutenant,
5th. Lieutenant-Colonel, 10th. Sergeant.
And in in each grade according to the corps named
in their commission.
3. When of the same grade and corps according to
date of commission, reference will be had to the rank
of the platoon, company, battalion, regiment, bri
gade, division, department, or staff, in which such
officers serve, staffs will take precedence according to
the rank of their commanding officers, departments
according to the rank of their respective chiefs,
4. Officers having bevets or commissions of a prior
date to those of the regiment in which they serve,
may take place in courts-martial, and on detach
ments, when composed of different corps, according
to the rank given them in their brevets or dates of
their former commisions; but in the regiment, battal
ion or company to which such officers belong, they
shall do duty and take rank both in courts -martial
and on detachments which shall be composed of their
own corps, according to the commissions by which
they are mustered in the said corps.
5. If, upon marches, guards,or in camp, different corps
shall happen to join or do duty together, the officer
highest in rank of the line, these on duty shall com
mand the whole, and give orders for whatever is
needful for the service, unless otherwise especially
directed by the commanding general.
6. Brevet rank takes effect only in the following
• cases: 1st. By special assignment ofthe commanding
general in commands composed of different corps. 2d.
On courts-martial or detachments composed of different
corps.
7. Troops are on detachment only when sent out tem
porarily to perform a special service.
Succession in command.
8. An officer who succeeds to any command or duty
stands in regard to his duties in the same situation as
his predecesssor. The officer relieved shall turn over
to his successor all orders in force at the time, and all
156 REGULATIONS.
the public property pertaining to his command on
duty, and should receive therefor duplicate receipts ,
showing the condition of each article.
9. Any officer placed in temporary command will
not, except in urgent cases, alter or annul the stand
ing orders of the regular or permanent commanders.
Regulations of Officers.
10. No officer will be considered out of service on the
tender of his resignation until it shall have been ac
cepted by the proper authority.
11. Resignations of officers will be forwarded
through their district commanders to the command
ing general.
Regiments.
12. On the organization ofa regiment, the battalions
will receive from the colonel a permanent designa
tion by numbers, of first, second, third, fourth and
fifth, begining with the best disciplined; the compan
ies will receive a like permanent designation by let
ter, beginning on the right of first battalion with A.
13. There will be to each regiment, one colonel, one
lieutenant-colonel, one aide-de-camp, with the rank
of major (who will also discharge the duties of regi
mental adjutant); one surgeon, one chief of music.
one commissary of subsistence, with the rank of 2d.
lieutenant, and two buglers.
14. To each battalion there will be one major, one
adjutant (with the rank ofcaptain) and one bugler.
15. To each company, one captain , one 1st lieuten
ant, five 20 lieutenants, five sergeants, one drummer
and one fifer.
Hours of Service and Roll Calls.
16. The reveille will be sounded or beat at day-break,
as a signal for the men to rise, and the sentenals to
leave off challenging.
17. The chaplain's call will be sounded or beat at
o'clock, morning and evening, as a signal for the ·
companies to assemble within their respective tents,
or quarters for prayers.
18. The troop will be sounded or beat at - o'clock in
the morning, for the purpose of assembling the men
for duty and inspection at guard-mounting.
19. The retreat will be sounded or beat at sun- set, for
the purpose of warning the officers and men for duty,
and reading the orders of the day.
20. The tattoo will be sounded or beat at o'clock
at night, after which no soldier is to be out ofhis tent
or quarters, except he is on duty.
 REGULATIONS. 157
21. To extinguish lights will be sounded or beat, thirty
minutes after tattoo, when lights will be extinguished
and silenced observed throughout the camp or gar
rison.
22. The sick call will be sounded or beat at
o'clock, when the sick able to go out will be conducted
to the surgeon's quarters by the 1st lieutenants, who
will hand to the surgeon a report of all the sick in the
company.
23. The general will be sounded only when the
whole camp is to march, and is the signal to strike
tents and prepare for the march.
24. The assembly is a signal to form by company.
25. To the color is a signal to form the regiment.
26. The advance is a signal for the whole to march.
27. In an encampment of several regiments the dif
ferent daily beats will begin on the right, and be im
mediately followed by the whole army, to facilitate
which, the music call will be sounded at head-quarters
ten minutes before the time of beating, when the
drummers or buglers will assemble before the colors
of their respective regiments, and as soon as the beat
begins on the right it will be taken up by the music
of the whole army, each playing in front of their re
spective regiments.
28. Where the hour for the different signals are not
given, the commanding officer will establish them
according to season and circumstances.
Roll Calls.
29. There will be daily, at least two roll calls, viz:
at reveille and retreat, which will be made upon the
company parades, by the 1st lieutenants-who will
return the absentees with or without leave to the
lieutenant-colonel, on the back of his morning re
port.
Morning Reports.
30. The morning reports of companies , signed bythe
captains, will be handed to the regimental adjutant
before eight o'clock in the morning, and will be by
him consolidated within the next hour, for the infor
mation of the colonel.
31. If this consolidation is to be sent to higher au
thority, it will be signed by the colonel,
Forms of Parade.
32. On all parades of ceremony, such as reviews,
dress parades, or guard mounting, instead of the word
"rest" the command will be "parade rest," at the last
158 REGULATIONS.
part of the command the men will promptly take the
position indicated in school of the platoon, No. 86.
Dress Parades.
33. There should be daily at least one dress parade,
which may be at troop or retreat, as the commanding
officer may direct, or at both should he think proper
so to order. The parade at troop will be termed the
morning parade, and that at retreat the evening parade.
In either case it will be conducted as follows:
34. The music or drummer's call, will be sounded or
beat, half an hour before troop or retreat, for the music
to assemble on the regimental parade; this signal will
be immediately followed by the assembly being sound
ed for the companies to turn out on their respective
company parades for roll call and inspection.
35. Twenty minutes after the latter signal, tothe color
will be sounded, when the lieutenant- colonel and
aide-de-camp will repair to the regimental parade,
and place themselves on the line, the lieutenant
colonel ten paces to the left of the music, faced to the
front; the aide-de-camp outside the point where the
left of the line will rest when formed, and facing the
lieutenant-colonel.
36. These positions being taken, the lieutenant
colonel will direct the music to play quick or double
quick time, and the captains will march their compan
ies to the regimental parades, where they will take
their positions in line.
37. At the moment the first two companies
unite, forming the first battalion, its major and adju
tant will take their places as in line, and thus in suc
cession from right to left.
38. When the line is formed, the lieutenant- colonel
will move four paces to the front, face to the left and
command:
1. Attention regiment. 2. Order-ARMS. 3. Parade-REST,
then resuming his place on the right, will add: 4.
Music beat- OFF .
39. At the fourth command the music will com
mence on the right, move ten paces forward, wheel
to the left and beat in front from right to left in com
mon time, then facing about will beat from left back
to its place on the right in quick time.
40. When the music has ceased, the lieutenant
colonel will again move four paces to the front, face
to the left and command:
1. Attention regiment. 2. Shoulder- ARMS. 3. To the rear
open order. 4. MARCH.
41. At the fourth command, the ranks will be open
 REGULATIONS. 159
ed according to the principles prescibed in regimen
tal evolutions.
42. The lieutenant-colonel on seeing the ranks
aligned will march along the front to the centre, face
to the right and pass the line of majors six paces,
when he will halt, face about and command:
Present-ARMS.
43. When arms will be presented officers, saluting;
on seeing this executed he will face about to the com
manding officer (who has taken his post twenty- five
paces in front of the centre) salute, and report "the
parade is formed." He will then, on intimation to
that effect take post three paces on the left of the
commanding officer and one pace retired, passing
around his rear, and the aide-de- camp will place him
selfat a like distance on the right of the commanding
officer.
44. The colonel having acknowledged the salute of
the line will, after the lieutenant-colonel and aide-de
camp have taken their post, draw his sabre and com
mand: 1. Regiment. 2. Shoulder-ARMS, and add, such
exercises as he may think proper, ending with order
ARMS, then returning his sabre will direct the aide
de-camp to receive the reports.
45. The aide-de-camp will then pass in front ofthe
colonel, advance upon the line, halt at about twelve
paces from him and command:
1. 1st Lieutenants to the centre. 2. MARCH.
46. At the first command they will face to the centre,
at the second they will march to the centre and halt;
the aide-de-camp will then add:
3. FRONT. 4. Report.
47. At the last command, each in succession, begin
ing onthe right will promptly salute with his sabre
and report the result of the roll-call previously made
upon the company parade; the aide-de-camp will
then command:
1. 1st. Lieutenants, outward-FACE. 2. To yourpost. 3.
MARCH.
48. The 1st. lieutenants will then resume their pla
ces; the aide-de-camp will then face about to the
colonel, salute, report absent officers, and give the re
sult of the lieutenants' report.
49. The colonel will next direct the order to be read,
when the aide-de-camp will face the line and an
nounce:
160 REGULATIONS.
Attention to orders.
50. He will then read the orders; after which he will
face to the colonel, salute and report: orders are read
sir; then on intimation from the colonel, he will
again face the line and announce:
Parade is dismissed.
51. At this announcement the majors will return
their sabres, face towards the centre and close on the
aide-de-camp, who has placed himself on their line.
52. The aide-de-camp will then command: 1. FRONT.
2. Forward-MARCH; when they will move forward,
dressing on the centre, music playing, and when they
arrive within six paces of the colonel, he will add:
3. HALT.
53. The officers will then salute the colonel by rais
ing the hand to the hat, and there remain until he
has communicated to them such instruction as he
may have to give, or announces that the ceremonies
are finished, when they will disperse.
5. As the officers disperse the captains will close
the ranks of their respective companies and march
them back totheir company parades, where they will
be dismissed; the band continuing to play until all
the companies have cleared the regimental parade.
55. All field, staff, battalion and company officers
and men will be present at dress parades, unless es
pecially excused , or on some duty incompatable with
such attendance.
56. In case of the tempory absence ofthe colonel, or
commanding officer, the officer next in rank present,
will take command of the parade.
Guard-mounting.
57. Camp and garrison guards will be relieved every
twenty-four hours. The guards at outposts will ordi
narily be relieved at the same time, but this must de
pend upon their distance from camp, or such circum
stances, as may sometimes make it necessary for
them to continue on duty for several days in succes
sion; in such cases they must be previously warned
to provide themselves accordingly.
Manner of mounting guard.
58. Twenty minutes before guard-mounting, troop
will be sounded as a signal for the duty-men to turn
out on their company parades for inspection, and the
aide-de-camp and music to repair to the regimental
parade.
 REGULATIONS. 161
59. At this signal the 1st lieutenant will move to
their respective company parades, and by the com
mand, turn out the guard, will cause the duty-men to
assemble, then forming them in two ranks, with the
officer or sergeant on the right, will minutely inspect
their arms, accoutrements and amunition, and see
that everything is in complete order; to this end he
will be held responsible that no soldier will pass in
spection for duty at guard-mounting without the re
quisite amount of ammunition, and his arms in com
plete order .
60. Ten minutes after troop the aide-de- camp will
direct the music to play, when the 1st lieutenants
will cause their guards to face by the right flank, then
placing themselves on the left, abreast with the lead
ing file with sabre at a carry will conduct their guards
to the regimental parade.
61. Each detachment as they successively arrive
will be formed by their respective lieuntenants, the
first on the left of the music, and four paces from it,
the others on the left of the detachment that preceded
it, the whole at open order, faced to the front, and at
shoulder arms. The sergeants as they arrive will
take post, the first on the right of the front, and the
latter on the right of the rear rank.
62. The 1st lieutenants, after forming their detach
ments as above explained, will pass around the left
flank and take post five paces in rear of the right file
of their respective guards.
63. The aide-de- camp will have taken his post, ten
or twenty paces in front of the centre, (varied accord
ing to the extent of the guard.
64. Should the aide-de-camp, in verifying the de
tails find one or more men less than the specified num
ber from any particular command or company, he
will direct the officer so failing, to produce the re
mainder of his detail, before proceeding further.
65. During the formation of the detachments the
officer of the guard will take post four paces in front
of its centre, faced to the front, with sabre at a carry,
the officers ofthe day will take post about ten paces
in rear of the aide-de-camp, faced towards the guard;
the old officer of the day two paces to the right of the
new, and one pace retired.
66. The aide-de-camp, on ascertaining that the de
tails are correct, will command: Order-ARMS, In
spection-ARMS, then proceed to minutely inspect the
guard, beginning on the right of each rank, during
the inspection the band will play,
67. The inspection being ended, he will return to
his former position, and add:
K
162 REGULATIONS .
1. Parade-Rest. 2. Music-beat off.
68. At the second command, the music will com
mence on the right, move six paces forward, wheel
left and beat along the front from right to left, then
from the left back to its place on the right, where it
will cease to play.
09. The music having ceased, the aide-de-camp will
command:
1. Attention the guard. 2. Shoulder- ARMS. 3. Close order.
4. MARCH. This being executed he will add: 5. Pre
sent-ARMS.
70. He will then face about to the officer of the day
and report, "the guard is formed sir," and immediately
take post on his right.
71. The new officer of the day after acknowledging
the salute, will direct the officer ofthe guard to march
them in review, or by a flank to their post.
72. If the officer of the day directs to pass in review,
the officer of the guard will face about and command:
1. Shoulder-ARMS. 2. By guards. right wheel. 3. MARCH.
73. At the command march, the guard will wheel
right by detachments, when the officer will add:
Pass in review, column forward, guide right-MARCH.
74. At the command march, the whole will move
forward, the music playing, wheel left, and pass the
officer of the day according to the order of review,
conducted by the officer ofthe guard marching abreast
with the leading sub-division .
76. When the music arrives abreast with the officer
of the day it will wheel left out ofthe column and
continue to play until the guard has passed, when it
will cease and disperse.
76. When the column has passed the officer of the
day, the officer of the guard will conduct it to guard
quarters, the old officer of the day will then salute and
give the old or standing orders to the new; the aide
de-camp and 1st lieutenants will at the same time,
return their sabres and disperse.
77. Should the officer of the day direct the guard to
be marched by a flank to its post, the officer ofthe
guard will command:
Shoulder-ARMS, Right-FACE. File left. To your post
MARCH.
78. At the command march, the officer of the guard
will conduct it by the shortest route to guard-quar
ters, the music playing until it has cleared the regi
 REGULATIONS. 163
mental parade, when the officers and music will dis
perse.
79 In bad weather or while on fatiguing marches
the ceremony of review may be dispensed with, but
in no case will guards be mounted without inspec
tion.
80. On the approach ofthe new guard, the old guard
will be paraded, and arms presented as they march
past.
81. The new guard will march past the old, in quick
time at shouldered arms, officers saluting, and take
post on their right, and be aligned on the same line,
when its officer will command: order-ARMS, REST,
the officer of the old guard will after the new guard
has halted, command:
Shoulder-ARMS . Order-ARMS, REST.
82. The officer ofthe new guard will first, if the regi
ment is to march on that day, direct the details for
the advanced guard, to be formed and marched to its
post; ifnot, the list of the guard will be made and di
vided into three reliefs; the first relief will then be
ordered two paces to the front, a sergeant of the new
guard will take charge ofit, and go to relieve the sen
tinels, accompanied by a sergeant of the old guard
who will take charge of the old sentinels when the
whole are relieved.
83. The relief, in two ranks, will march by a flank,
conducted by the sergeant, on the side of the leading
front rank man; the inen of each relief will be num
bered alternately in the front and rear rank, the man
on the right ofthe front rank being No. 1.
81. The sentinel at the guard house or guard tent
will be relieved first, and left behind, the others are
relieved in succession .
85. When a sentinel sees the relief approaching he
will halt, face to it, and bring his piece to a shoulder;
at about six paces from the sentinel the sergeant will
command: 1. Relief. 2. HALT, the sergeant will then
add, No. 2, or No. 3, according to the number ofthe
port, Arms-PORT, when the two sentinels, with arms
at port, will approach each other; the old sentinel un
der the correction of the sergeant, will whisper the
instructions to the new sentinel ; this being done the
two sentinels will shoulder arms, and the old senti
nel will pass to his place in rear of the relief; the ser
geant will then command: Forward- MARCH, and
proceed in the same manner until the whole are re
lieved.
86. During the time of relieving the sentinels of the
oldguard, the commander of the new will proceed to
164 REGULATIONS.
take possession ofthe guard house or guard tent, and
all the articles and prisoners in charge of the guard,
at the same time the old commander will give to the
new all the instruction and information relating to
his post.
87. The sentinels of the old guard having come in, it
will be marched in front of the new guard at shoul
dered arms, the new standing at present arms, and
officers saluting, when it will be conducted back to its
regimental parade, their pieces drawn or discharged
and dismissed; on rejoining their companies, chiefs
ofplatoons will examine their arms, and cause them
to be put away in good order.
88. When the old guard has marched off fifty paces
the officer of the new guard will cause the guard to
stack arms, then proceed to make himself acquainted
with all the instructions for his post, visit the senti
nels and question them and the sergeants, relative to
the instructions they may have received from the old
guard.
Officers of the day and guard.
89. Officers of the day will be detailed under the
direction of the regimental commander, generally
from the rank of majors; captains will be detailed as
officers ofthe guard, and 2d lieutenants and sergeants
to post and relieve sentinels.
Guards-their use and duty.
90. The principle guards are first, outposts, second ,
picket guards, third camp and garrison guards.
91. The outposts and picket guards will be detailed
from the line and composed of either cavalry or in
fantry, orboth, according to circumstances; they will
be posted on the roads leading into camp, and in such
positions as may be the most eligible for their securi
ty; their strength will depend upon their proximity to
the enemy, and the nature of the position to be
guarded.
92. The duties of outposts are so various that they
will invariably require detailed instructions from the
commanding officer to suit circumstances. The fol
lowing directions will apply generally, and will be
strictly observed so far as applicable.
93. All outpost guards will generally be ordered out
with from three to ten days rations, which, circum
stances permitting, should be ready cooked, and ifa
cavalry detachment, forage should be taken, suffi
cient for the time they are to be out; they will march
out of camp to their station without trumpets sound
 REGULATIONS . 165
ing or drums beating, and pay no compliment what
ever to officers passing their posts.
94. As soon as an officer commanding an outpost
arrives on his ground he must by a careful reconnois
ance, make himself acquainted with not only the
space he actually guards, but the heights around,
within musket shot, the roads or trails leading to or
near the post, ascertaining their breadth and practi
cability for cavalry or artillery, and regulate his posi
tion, to ensure a ready and constant communication
with the adjoining post, by signals during the day,
and by patrols during the night; he should examine
all ravines that may cover the outpost of an enemy,
and all the points from which he is most likely to be
attacked; this vigilence is necessary to prevent sur
prises, and to enable him to act with promptnesss
and decision if assailed during the night.
95. When a deserter comes in from the enemy hewill
be conveyed immediately to the commander of the
outpost, who, after ascertaining from him such infor
mation as relates to his own post, will forward him
under an escort to head- quarters.
96. The sentinel on outposts are posted so as best to
observe the approach of an enemy, and at the same
time with a view of communicating by signal with
each other, and with the head-quarters of the out
post.
97. No officer or soldier will on any account be al
lowed to pass an outpost towards the enemy, unless
they are on duty, or present a pass, signed by the
commanding officer at head-quarters,
98. Persons bearing a flag of truce from the enemy
are to be treated with attention and civility; but as
such communications are frequently designed to gain
intelligence and for reconnoisance, the most strict
means must be adopted to frustrate such designs.
99. Camp guards are posted for the better security of
the camp .
100. Sentinels will be relieved every two hours, un
less the state of the weather or other circumstances
should make it necessary to relieve them at a shorter
or longer period.
101. Each relief, before being posted will be inspect
ed by the officer of the guard, or of its post, the ser
geant then posts it, and reports to him and presents
the old relief on his return.
102. The countersign or watchword is given to such
persons as may be entitled to pass the guard during
The night, and to the officers, sergeants and sentinels
ofthe guard.
103, As soon as the new guard is marched off the
166 REGULATIONS.
new officer of the day will repair to the commanding
officer's tent or quarters, and report for orders.
104. The officers of the day will visit the guards
during the day, at such times as he may deem neces
sary, and make his rounds at night, at least once
after 12 o'clock; he will see that the officer of the
guard is furnished with the countersign before re
treat, and upon being relieved will make such re
marks in the report of the officer of the guard, as
circumstances may require, and present the same at
head-quarters.
105. The officers and men are to remain constantly
at guard-quarters during the entire twenty-four
hours duty, except while on post, or posting and re
lieving sentinels, unless by direct permission ofthe
officer of the guard, when they may return to their
quarters for their meals.
106. The officer of the guard will see that the coun-.
tersign is communicated to the sentinels before twi
light.
107. Sentinels must keep themselves on the alert,
observing everything that takes place within sight or
hearing of his post, and will not take orders or be re
lieved by any person, except an officer of the guard,
or the officer of the day, or commanding officer, in
which case such orders will be immediately commu
nicated to the officer of the guard by the officer giving
them.
108. Neither officers nor soldiers will take offtheir
clothing or equipments while on detail as guard.
109. No sentinel will quit his post, or hold any con
versation with any person, that does not attain to
the proper discharge of his duty; and all persons of
whatever rank in service, will be required to observe
the greatest respect towards sentinels.
110. The sentnel at guard-quarters, when he sees any
body of troops, or an officer entitled to compliment
approach, must call "turn out the guard" and an
nounce who approaches.
111. Guards do not turn out as a matter of compli
ment after sunset, but sentinels will when officers
approach pay them proper attention by facing to the
front and standing at shouldered arms.
112. After retreat, (or the hour appointed by the
commanding officer) until broad daylight next morn
ing a sentinel challenges every person that approach
es him, taking at the same time the position of
charge bayonet, he will suffer no person to come
nearer than within reach of his bayonet, until that
person has given him the countersign.
113. A sentinel in challenging will call out who
 REGULATIONS. 167
comes there? If answered, friend with the countersign,
he will reply, advance friend with the countersign, ifan
swered relief, parole, or guard rounds, he will reply
halt! advance officer (or sergeant) with the countersign!
and fully satisfy himself that the party is what it re
presents itself to be; if he has not authority to pass
persons with the countersign, if the countersign is
not correct, or ifthe person has not the countersign
he will cause them to stand, and call sergeant of the
guard! and keep them in that position until this offi
cer approaches and relieves them or conducts them to
guard-quarters.
114. In daytime when the sentinel before the guard
quarters sees the officer of the day approaching he
will call turn out the guard, officer of the day, the guard
will then be paraded and salute with presented arms.
115. When any person approaches guard-quarters
at night, the sentinel before the post, after challeng
ing, will cause him to stand until examined by the
sergeant of the guard; if it be the officer ofthe day or
any other person entitled to inspect the guard and to
make the rounds, the sergeant will call turn out the
guard, when the guard will be paraded at shouldered
arms, and the officer, if he thinks necessary, may de
mand the countersign .
116. The officer of the day wishing to make the
rounds, will take an escort of a sergeant and two or
three men from guard-quarters; when the rounds are
challenged by the sentinels the sergeant will answer
grand rounds, and the sentinel will reply, halt grand
rounds, advance sergeant with the countersign, upon
which the sergeant advances and gives the counter
sign; the sentinel will then add: advance rounds, and
stand at shouldered arms until they have passed.
117. When the sentinel before the guard challenges,
and is answered grand rounds, he will reply halt grand
rounds! turn out the guard, grand rounds! upon which
the guard will be drawn up at shouldered arms; the
officer ofthe guard will then order a sergeant and two
men forward, and when within ten paces the sergeant
challenges, the 'sergeant of the rounds answers grand
rounds, the sergeant of the guard replies, advance ser
geant withthe countersign, the sergeant of the rounds
advances alone and gives the countersign and re
turns to his rounds, the sergeant of the guard will
face about and report to his officer the countersign is
correct, on which the officer of the guard calls advance
rounds.
118. The officer of the rounds advances alone, (the
guard standing at shouldered arms, ) along the front
of the guard to the officer, orders back his escort,
168 REGULATIONS .
takes a new one and proceeds in the same manner to
the other guards.
119. Any general officer, or commandant ofthe post
may visit the guards of his command, and go the
grand rounds, and be received in the same manner
as prescribed for the officer of the day.
120. All material instructions given to a sentinel by
officers making the rounds will be promptly commu
nicated to the officer of theguard.
Review.
121. Preparitory to a review the lieutenant-colonei
will cause a camp-color to be placed about 120 paces in
front ofthe centre of the regiment, where the review
ing officer is supposed to take his post; should the re
viewing officer choose to quit that position, the color
will be considered the point to which all movements
and formations are relative.
122. The lieutenant- colonel will cause points to be
marked at suitable distances, for the wheelings of
subdivisions, so that their right right flanks in march
ing past, shall only be about four paces from the color,
where the reviewing officer takes his post to receive
the salute.
123. The regiment being in line, and the above dis
positions being made, the colonel will command:
1. Attention regiment. 2. Prepare for review. 3. To the
rear, open order. MARCH,
124. At the command march, the ranks will open as

FORM OF GUARD REPORT.

Lieutenants
sign

Report of a Guard, Mounted at on the day

of " and relieved on the
Counter

ns

gate
s
.12d
Musicia
Sergeant

tes

Articles in charge Remarks

Aggre
.

Priva
.

.
.

Detail.
 GUARD
THE
OF
.LIST

Posted
.When
and
Relief
1st
Relief .Relief
2d Relief
3d Where
From
8to
10 From
12
to
10 12
2From
to .
REMARKS
and 42to and t64o and
6t8o Posted
.
Na Name
. Name

No.
. me .
1JS..A.0th J.
I. 6.Bth C.
.
7th
R❘
L. Guard
F.
.1E.0th
A K.
L. .10th
E .R
7A.
B.th House
,
CD.
36.B.th H.
W. 1E0th 7th
R
T.
.S. c.,&

Lieutenant
2d
W A. .
Infantry
,1S; 0th
.Co. .
Grd
Lt.
REGULATIONS .

Ho.
CSergeant
W. .
,6Infantry
.B.
th .Grd
Sgt

3 RSergeant
.
,M.
Co.
7H th
.Infantry .Grd
Sgt
169
170 REGULATIONS.

Sentence
es
Comp'y
LIST OF PRISONERS.

.Reg'nt

Charg
Confined.

.
.
Names. Rem❜ks
No.

When By Whom.
1
2 3

1
5
L. N. S.
Captain Co. A., 10th Infantry.
Commanding Guard.

indicated in regimental evolutions; the surgeon and

staff not enumerated will take post on the extreme
left on the line of captains, and the music on the
right of the line, the whole faced to the front.
125. The reviewing officer first presents himself be
fore the centre of the line, and when forty or fifty
paces distant, the colonel will face the line and add:
present- ARMS, then face tothe front.
126. The men present arms, and officers salute, so as
to drop the point ofthe sabre with the second motion
of present arms, the music playing.
127. The reviewing officer having halted and ac
knowledged the salute the colonel will face the line
and command: Shonlder-ARMS; when the men shoul
der their pieces, the officers bring their sabres to a
carry with the last motion, and the colonel faces
again to the front.
128. The reviewing officer will then go towards the
right, then pass along the front to the left flank,
then around this flank and back along the rear to
the right, the whole remaining perfectly steady with
out paying any further compliment; while the re
viewing officer is going around the regiment, the
band will play, and cease when he has returned to
the right flank.
129. When the receiving officer turns off to place
 REGULATIONS. 171
himself by the camp-color in front, the colonel will
face the line and command:
1. Rear rank, close order. 2. MARCH,
130. At the command march, the rear rank will close
and all, except the music will resume their places as
in line.
131. When the reviewing officer has taken his place
by the camp-color, the colonel will command: 1. By
company. 2. Right wheel. 3. March; when the regiment
will break into column by companies, and the music
will move forward about ten paces from the captain
of the leading company, the colonel will then add:
4. Pass in review. 5. Column forward. 6. Guide right
7. MARCH.
132. At the command march, the column will be put
in motion in common time and at shoulder arms; the
colonel attended by the lieutenant-colonel and aide
de-camp will march eight or ten paces in advance of
the leading company the majors six paces in advance
of the centre of their respective leading companies,
the surgeon and other staff officers not enumerated,
eight paces in rear of the column,
133. Points having been fixed by the lieutenant
colonel, the changes of direction will be made at those
points, by the command of chiefs of companies; the
color will remain in the ranks whilst passing and
saluting, and the guides and soldiers will keep their
heads well to the front.
134. The music will begin to play at the command
march, and after passing the reviewing officer will
wheel left out of the column, and take a position
opposite to and facing him, where it will continue to
play until the rear ofthe column has passed, when it
will cease, and march in rear of the regiment, unless
the regiment is to pass in quick time, in which case it
will keep its position.
135. The officers will salute the reviewing officer
when they arrive within six paces of him, and re
cover their sabres when six paces past him; all officers
in saluting will cast their eyes towards the reviewing
officer.
136. The colonel, when he has saluted at the head of
the column, will place himself near the reviewing
officer, and remain there until the rear has passed,
when he will rejoin the regiment.
137. The color will salute the reviewing officer when
within six paces of him; when the color salutes the
music will cheer.
138. When the rear of the column has passed, the
172 REGULATIONS.
colonel will conduct it to the ground it marched
from, and command, guide left in time for the guides
to cover; the column having arrived on its former
ground the colonel will command: 1. Column. 2. HALT,
then form it in line, and cause the ranks to be opened
as prescribed in 124; the review will terminate by the
whole saluting as at the beginning.
139. The music at the command halt, will pass in
rear to its place on the right.
140. If instructions have been previously given to
march the regiment past in quick time, also, the
colonel, instead of changing the guides, halting the
column, or wheeling it into line, will command:
1. Quick time. 2. MARCH,
141. In passing the officer again no salute will be
officered by either officers or men; the music will have
kept its position opposite the reviewing officer, and at
the last command will commence playing in quick
time, and when the column approaches, will place it
self in front and march off, continuing to play until
the regiment is halted on its original ground offor
mation; the review will terminate in the same man
ner as indicated above.
142. The colonel will afterward cause the troops to
perform such exercises and maneuvres as the review
ing officer may direct.
143. When two or more regiments are to be reviewed
at the same time, they will be formed in parade order,
with the proper intervals, and will perform the same
movements prescribed for one regiment, observing
the following additional directions.
144. The brigadier-general and his staff will place
themselves opposite the centre of the brigade; the
brigadier-general, twelve paces in front of the line of
colonels, his adjutant two paces on his right, and one
retired; the brigade quartermaster on the right of the
line of lieutenant-colonels and aide-de-camps, and
the surgeon on the left of the line of majors.
145. In passing in review, the brigadier-general will
march four paces in front of the colonel of the leading
regiment, his adjutant, and quartermaster on his left.
146, The brigadier-general will command , and cause
to be executed all that is prescribed for a colonel on
regimental review.
147. If several brigades are to be reviewed together,
or in one line, the reviewing officer mounted, and
joined by the general of division on the right of his
division, will proceed down the line in front, and
when near the brigadier-general, respectively. will be
saluted by their brigades in succession; the music of
 REGULATIONS. 173
each, after the prescribed salute, will play while the
reviewing
then. officer is in front and in rear of it, and only
148. In marching, with several regiments in com
mon time, the music of each succeeding regiment
will commence to play when the music of the pre
ceding one has ceased in order to follow its regiment;
when marching in quick time the music will begin to
play when the rear company of the preceding regi
ment has passed the reviewing officer.
Inspection.
149. The inspection of troops , as a regiment, brigade
or division , will generally be preceded by a review.
159. The present example embraces a regiment of
infantry; the inspecting officer and field and staff
officers on foot.
151. The regiment being in ine, the colonel will
cause it to break into column by company right in
front; he will then cause ranks to be opened, when
the color-bearers and guard will, under the direction
of the lieutenant- colonel, promptly place themselves
six paces in advance ofthe music, which is in front of
the column.
152. The colonel seeing the ranks aligned will com
mand:
1. Officers and sergeants, to the front of your companies.
2. MARCH .
153. At the command march, the majors will
promptly place themselves six paces in front of the
centre of their respective leading companies; their
adjutants two paces on their left; chiefs of platoons
and their sergeants will at the same time promptly
place themselves on the same line two paces in front
of their respective companies; the colonel will then
add:
3. Order-ARMS. 4. Parade-REST. 5. Field and staff to
thefront. 6. MARCH.
154. At the command march, the colonel and officers
thus designated will form themselves in one rank
two paces apart, and six paces in advance ofthe color,
in the order of rank from right to left, the colonel on
the prolongation of the line of right guides of the
column.
155. The inspecting officer will commence in front;
after inspecting the arms, dress and general appear
anne of the field and staff, he will proceed to make a
minute inspection of the arms and accoutrements of
each subdivision , in succession, accompanied by the
 174 REGULATIONS .
colonel; majors will in succession accompany the in
specting officer through their respective battalions.
156. As theinspector successively approaches a com
pany or subdivision its chief will command:
1. Attention company. 2. Inspection-ARMS.
157. After the inspector has passed to the next
company he will add:
3. Shoulder-ARMS. 4. Close order. 5. MARCH. 6. Order
ARMS. 7. REST.
158. The inspection being ended, the music will play
and the companies will file off to their quarters or en
campment conducted by the 1st lieutenants , where
they will stack arms, and break ranks.
159. The company that is to escort the color will
stand fast until the parade is cleared , then under the
direction of the lieutenant-colonel or aide-de-camp,
proceed to escort the colors back to headquarters.
160. The inspector, accompanied by the colonel and
staff will next proceed to the quarters, guard-house,
and such other places as he may deem proper to in
spect, and then repair to headquarters, where the
aide-de-camp will exhibit the regimental books and
papers relating to the transaction of all branches of
business pertaining to the regiment.
Escorts of Honor.
161 , Escorts of honor may be composed of cavalry
or infantry, or both, according to circumstances; they
are guards of honor for the purpose of receiving and
escorting porsonages of high rank, either civil or
military.
162. The troops for this purpose will be selected for
their soldierly appearance and superior discipline.
163. The escort will be drawn up in line, the cen
tre opposite the place where the personage is to pre
sent himself, with an interval between the wings to
receive him and his retinue; on his appearance he
will be received with all the honors due his rank;
when he has taken his place in the line, the whole
will be wheeled into column by platoons or compan
ies, as the case may be, and the column put in
march; the same ceremonies will be observed and the
same honors paid on his leaving the escort.
164. When the position of an escort is at a consider
able distance from the point where he is expected to
be received. a double line of sentinels will be posted
from that point to the escort, facing inward, and the
sentinels will each successively salute as he passes.
165. On halting, an escort at the point where the
 REGULATIONS. 175
personage is to be received, the commander will
direct an officer to wait upon him, and bring back
any communication he may have to make to the
commander ofthe escort.
Manner of issuing and distributing orders.
166. All military orders will be numbered, to com
mence and terminate with the year or campaign;
those issued by the general-in-chief will be either
general or special.
167. General orders are orders issued to all the militia
of the State, and apply to every regiment, brigade,
division , or seperate department.
168. Special orders does not pertain to the service in
general, but relates to a particular corps, department
or individuals, and are issued to such direct.
169. Orders issued from the headquarters of regi
ments, brigades or divisions, will be simply styled
"orders;" they announce the orders of the day in
camp or garrison, the time and place of issuing sup
plies, the time and order of march, the hours of the
different beate and signais, and generally for the pur
pose of announcing any information or instruction
necessary to be communicated to the troops.
Military Districts.
170. The militia ofthe State is composed of compan
ies, battalions, regiments, brigades and divisions,
which are divided into seperate military districts,
and organized under a district commandant, with a
rank proportionate to the number of men under his
command.
171. A military district when duly organized be
comes responsible for arming, equipping and furnish
ing its own transportation and supplies for all the
troops that may be ordered into service from within
its limits .
172. Every company battalion or regiment will pro
vide themselves with arms and equipage (suited to
their corps) and ammunition, and keep the same
constantly on hand, and in condition for immediate
service.
173. Each platoon will provide itselfwith one good
armyrequisite
the tent, ofaamount
capacityof accommodate
tocooking twelve
utensils, onemen,
bag
gage wagon, and the necessary team and teamsters to
transport their own camp equipage and subsistence
to any part ofthe State to whichthey may be ordered,
and should keep constantly on hand, stored with the
district quartermaster, at least thirty days ' rations,
174. The camp equipage thus furnished, will be
176 REGULATIONS.
marked with the letter of the company and No. ofthe
platoon to which it belongs, and stored with, and
receipted for, by the district quartermaster.
175. Teams and baggage wagons will notbe deposited
with the quartermaster except in extreme cases, but
may be receipted for, and retained in the custody of
the teamsters until required for service.
District Quartermasters .
176. District quartermasters will be required to pro
vide good and sufficient storehouses, and store there
in and keep in good condition , all subsistence, camp
equipage and amunition belonging to the district; to
store and keep in complete repair, all district ordnan
ces, arms and accoutrements, that are not in the pos
session of the troops for immediate use; to provide
subsistence and forage, and cause the same to be
transported to the detachments from his district that
are in service; to provide all articles of clothing and
wearing appearel necessary for his troops while in
the field, and cause the same to be forwarded to them;
to purchase all books and stationery necessary for
his district, and the detachments that may be in ser
vice, and cause them to be issued to those entitled to
them, to fill all requisitions made upon him bythe
quartermaster-general, and generally, under the
direction of the district commandant, to transact all
the business pertaining to outfitting and supplying
the troops while in service.
177. District quartermasters will make themselves
thoroughly acquainted with the military resources of
their districts, their facilities for furnishing and
transporting military stores, and report the same to
the quartermaster-general, as often as the nature of
the case may require; all disbursements of supplies
made to troops in service will be certified to by the
district commandant, and reported to the quarter
master-general, quarterly; such report must state the
kind, amount and value of supplies, and to whom is
sued, also the quality and amount yet remaining on
hand.
178. Military stores will not be issued to any de
tachment or body oftroops whatever, except by order
of the district commandant, or the quartermaster
general, or upon a requisition signed by the chief of
the detachment requiring them, and approved by the
district commandant, and then only to the commis
sary ofthe detachment, or troops, or to an officer of
that body, authorized to receive and receipt for the
same.
 REGULATIONS. 177
179. Where there is no quartermaster provided by
law in the staff of a district commander, should oir
cumstances require, said commandant may appoint
an officer of the line to act as such, for whose acts be
will be responsible.
Commissaries of Subsistence.
180. Commissaries of subsistence will be held ac
countable for the safe keeping of all provisions en
trusted to their charge; they will examine frequently
into the condition ofthe stores, to prevent waste, and
make out and transmit through the proper account
ing officer to the district quartermaster the necessary
returns and accounts.
181. It will be their duty to issue to the troops on
requisitions signed by the commandant of the post,
detachment or subdivision, as the case may be.
182. The followng will be the componant parts of
the ration:-Sixteen ounces of pork or bacon, or one
and a half pounds offresh or salt beef, eighteen ounces
of bread or flour, or twelve ounces of hard bread, and
at the rate of four pounds of soap, two pounds of
candles, two quarts of salt, four - quarts ofvinegar, ten
quarts of beans or peas, and pounds of potatoes
or other vegetables to the hundred rations.
183. At every post or station where supplies are de
posited for the service of troops they will be placed in
charge ofa commissary or an assistant.
184. Regimental commissaries duty will be while in
service to take charge of all the regimental baggage,
wagons, teams and supplies, to issue to the troops on
requisitions signed by the chiefs of companies, and
approved by the commandant of the regiment or de
tachment to which he belongs, to make requisitions
on the quartermaster or commissary's department
for such stores as he may require which requisition
must be countersigned by his commander, to keep a
strict account of all receipts and disbursements by
him made, and report the same to his district quar
termaster as often as circumstances may require, and
generally under the direction of his commandant to
have the control of all the military stores and trans
portation belonging to his command,
Calling the militia into service.
185. Whenever it may become necessary to call the
militia into service, the general or other officer auth
orized tomake such call, will state in his order, to the
district commandant the number of men required,
how officered and the amount of supplies he will fur
nish them.
L
178 REGULATIONS .
186. A detachment thus ordered will be mustered by
the inspector-general, or other officer designated for
that purpose by the officer making the call, before
they will be considered in actual service.
187. The inspecting officer will first, carefully in
spect the general appearance of the men, satisfy him
self oftheir individual abilities, to perform the duties
of the campaign, rejecting such as may be unfit for
service, and call upon the district commandant, if
necessary, to replace them with efficient men; he will
then inspect theirarms, equipage and means of trans
portation, and cause full and complete muster rollsto
be made of their exact condition, including supples,
forage, camp equipage and transportation , which re
port, accompanied by his certificate of examination
he will cause to be forwarded immediately to the ad
jutant-general's office, or to the officer ordering the
detachment into service.
188. All officers placed in command of such detach
ments will be required to receipt to the district quar
termaster for, and become responsible for the proper
distribution of all public arms, accoutrements and
ammunition, and for all supplies and transportation
placed under his control for the use of his command,
and will, through his acting-commissary account for
its proper disbursement and report the same back to
his district quartermaster at the expiration of the
campaign or as often as circumstances may require;
all losses of animals, wagons or other property must
be strictly accounted for in his report, and if lost or
damaged through his neglect, will be charged to his
account.
Arrests and confinements,
189. None but commanding officers are authorized
to place officers under arrest; an officer under arrest
will not wear his sabre or make a visit to his com
manding officer, unless sent for, and in case of busi
ness, he will make his object known in writing.
190. It will not be obligatory on the commanding
officer to place an officer under arrest on application
to that effect from an officer under his command, in
such cases he will exercise a second discretion.
191. The arrest of an officer, or the confinement ofa
soldier, be, as soon as practicable reported to his
willcomman
mediate der.
192. Officers placed under arrest may be released
without being brought before a court martial, by the
authortty ordering the arrest, or by a superior officer.
193. Individuals placed under guard with written
charges, signed by an officer will not be released, ex
 REGULATIONS. 179
cept by the direction of the commanding officer; all
prisoners under guard, without written charges, will
be released by the officers of the day at guard-mount
ing, unless orders to the contrary shall be given by
the commanding officer.
Courts Martial.
194, Regimental or district courts martial may con
sist of any number of commissioned officers from
three to seven inclusively, and a special judge-advo
cate; they will be detailed by the regimental or district
commandant, and shall have jurisdiction in all cases
arising under the militia laws ofthe State, when the
president of the court ranks the officer or parties on
trial.
195. In ordering a court martial it is not necessary
to designate the president by name, as the officer
highestin rank will preside.
196. In detailing officers to form a court martial it
will be sufficient to order as many as can be convened
without manifest injury to the service, within the
limits prescribed above, of which the officer ordering
must be the judge.
197. On the appointed day of meeting the court may
consider itself authorized to organized and act, pro
vided the number does not fall short of three, unless
otherwise directed by the authority ordering the
court.
198. The court after being duly organized, will rise
and set upon its own adjournments.
199. All members of a court martial must be duly
sworn, vote and give their opinions, begining with
the youngest in rank.
200. In drawing up charges, the utmost precision
must be observed in specifying the fact to which
criminality is attached, and in describing the time
when, andthe place where such fact occured.
201. An officer has no right to demand a court mar
tial, either on himself or others, the officer having
authority to order a court, being the judge of its ne
cessity or propriety; nor has an officer who may have
been placed in arrest, any right to demand a trial, or
to persist in considering himself under arrest after he
shall have been released by proper authority.
202. After a prisoner has been arraigned on a speci
fic charge it will be irregular fora court martial to ad
mit any additional charges against him, though he
may not have come on his defence; the trial on the
charge first prefered will be concluded, after which
the prisoner may be tried on any further accusation
that may be brought against him.
180 REGULATIONS .
203. A prisoner cannot plead in bar oftrial, that he
has not been furnished with a copy of the charges or/
that the copy furnished him differs from the one on
which he has been arraigned. It is proper to furnish
him with a copy, but the omission shall not void,
though it may postpone the trial.
204. The day and place ofmeeting of a court martial
having been published in "orders," they will not be
changed except by the authority ordering the same;
the officers appointed as members, the parties and
witnesses must attend accordingly.
205. Thejudge advocate at the opening will call over
the names ofthe members who shall arraign them
selves on the right and left of the president accord
ing to rank.
206. The prisoner will then be called into court and
must appear without bonds of any kind unless there
be danger of escape.
Manner ofsitting at a court martial.

MEMBERS.
MEMBERS

PRESIDENT. 1.

3
.

TABLE. 5

JUDGE ADVOCATE.
PROSECUTOR. PRISONER .
207. The following oath will then be administered
to the court by the judge advocate: "You and each of
you do solemnly swear that you will well and truly
try and determine according to law and evidence, the
matter now before you, between the people of the
United States, in the State (or Territory) of and
the prisoner to be tried, that you will duly administer
justice, without partiality, favor or affection , and
that you will not divulge the sentence of this court
until it shall be published by proper authority;
neither will you disclose or discover the vote or opin
ion of any member thereof, unless required to give
evidence as a witness by a court of justice, in due
course of law: so help your God."
 REGULATIONS. 181
208. The following oath will then be administered
by the president to the judge advocate: "You
do solemnly swear that you will not disclose or dis
cover the opinion of any particular member ofthis
court martial, unless required to give evidence there
of, as a witness by a court of justice in due course of
law, nor divulge the sentence of this court to any but
the proper authority, until it shall be duly disclosed
by the same: so help you God."
209. The following is the oath administered by the
judge advocate to the witnesses: "You (or
each ofyou) do solemnly swear that the evidence you
shall give in the case now in hearing, shall be the
truth, the whole truth, and nothing but the truth, so
help you God."
210. On the arraignment of a prisoner he must
either plead guilty or not guilty, but if from obstinacy
or design he shall stand mute, or answer foreign to
the purpose, the court will proceed to trial as if he
had plead "not guilty."
211. It is the duty of the judge advocate to prosecutǝ
all persons who may be brought before a court mar
tial, but the officer who prefers the charges will be
permitted to act in conjunction with him; the regular
course of trial shall be as follows:
212. The prosecutor will call his witnesses and pro
duces his written evidence, and may, if he wishes, be
examined as a witness in support of the charges he has
himself prefered; he must during the prosecution,
and before the prisoner comes on his defence, produce
all the evidence he has to support the charge.
213. The prosecution being closed the prisoner then
enters on his defence, and adduces his evidence. In
all cases where a prisoner produces evidence on his
defence, the prosecutor has a right to reply, but he
cannot adduce fresh evidence; unless new matter has
been introduced on the defence; in which case he is
allowed to controvert it by corresponding proof.
214. Both prosecutor and prisoner will be allowed to
take exception to the competency of a witness; but
such exceptions must be stated in open court and re
corded on the proceedings, after which the court de
cides on their validity.
215. When no exception is made to a witness, ho
will be duly sworn, and then examined by the party
producing him; the opposite party may then cross
examine him, and in case new matter be elicited by
the cross-amination, the party calling him may re
examine as to the new matter; after which the court
will ask such questions as it may think proper.
216. The examination being through, the court will
182 REGULATIONS.
be closed, and then proceed to deliberate on its ver
dict; members of courts martial should then bear in
mind that they have two distinct duties to perform,
the one, that ofjurors, the other that ofjudges.
217. In the first of these capacities they are bound to
find a verdict, according to the evidence which has
been produced before them; this verdict may be gen
eral, declaring the prisoner guilty or not guilty of the
whole charge prefered against him, or it may be par
ticular, finding that such and such allegations have
been proved and acquitting the prisoner ofthe others.
218. In their other capacity; ifthe verdict be "guilty"
all the members of a court martial, though a minority
may have voted for the acquittal of the prisoner, are
bound by their oath to duly administer justice, by
awarding such a punishment as may be proportion
able to the degree of guilt to which the said prisoner
has been convicted.
219. In drawing up the findings and sentence of a
court martial the utmost precission will be observed
in specifying howfar the prison is foundguilty or not
guilty of each charge or instance of charge, and in
specifying the exact nature and degree of punish
ment which the court has awarded, which finding
and sentence signed by the president and judge ad
vocate will be transmitted to the officer ordering the
court martial for his approval, as soon thereafter as
practicable.
220. The approval of the sentence of a court martial
should, when practicable, be made in a published or
der, which order will also declare the court disolved,
provided there be no further business; otherwise the
court will adjourn, as circumstances may direct until
duly dissolved, by the authority oadering the same.
221. The authority ordering a court martial, may
mitigate or repeal its decissions, even after their ap
proval, provided new and sufficient evidence is pro
duced to justify; in all such cases the mitigation or
repeal shall be made in a published order, setting
forth full and justifiable reasons.
Honors to be paid by the troops.
222. The president will be saluted with the highest
honors, all standards and colors dropping, officers
saluting, drums beating, and trumpets sounding; the
same compliments will be paid the vice-president.
223. The lieutenant-general or commander-in-chief
will be received by cavalry, with swords drawn ,
trumpets sounding, the advance and all officers salut
ing, colors dropping-by infantry, with drums beat
 REGULATIONS. 183
ing, colors dropping, officers saluting and arms pre
sented.
224. A major-general will be received--by cavalry
with swords drawn, trumpets sounding, and officers
saluting, by infantry with three ruffles, colors drop- .
ping, officers saluting and arms presented.
225. A brigadier-general will be received-by cavalry
with swords drawn, officers saluting,--by infantry
with arms presented, officers saluting.
226. The adjutant-general or inspector-general will be
received at review or inspection,-by cavalry with
swords drawn, officers saluting,-by infantry, officers
saluting and arms presented; the same honors will be
paid to any field officer authorized to review and in
spect the troops.
227. All guards will turn out and present arms to
general officers as often as they may pass them; to
colonels, the guards of their own regiments will turn
out and present arms once a day only, after which
they will turn out at shouldered arms.
228. To the secretary of state, treasury, war and navy
departments; to the chiefjustice, the president ofthesenate
and speaker of the house of representatives ofthe United
States, and to governors, the same honors will be paid
as prescribed for the general, commanding in chief.
229. The colors ofa regiment passing a guard will be
saluted with the utmost respect, the trumpets sound
ing or drums beating.
230. When two regiments meet on the march, the
one inferior in rank will halt, form in parade order
and salute the other regiment, which proceeds on the
march at shoulder arms, colors flying, and drums
beating until it has cleared the front of the regiment
that has halted.
231. When general officers, or persons entitled to
salute, pass in rear of a guard, the officer will only
cause his men to stand at shoulder arms and not face
his guard about.
232. All guards will be under arms when armed par
ties approach their posts; and to parties commanded
by commissioned officers, they will present arms,
drums beating, and officers saluting.
233. Sentinels will present arms to all general and
fleld officers, and to the officers of the day; to all
others they will carry their arms at a shoulder.
234. No compliments will be paid by guards or sen
tinels, between retreat and reveille, except those pre
scribed for grand rounds.
235. Sergeants with rifles at a carry, will salute by
bringing the left hand across the body so as to strike
the piece near the right shoulder; a soldier without
184 REGULATIONS.
arms or with side arms only, meeting an officer, will
salute by raising his hand to his cap, which officer
will make a suitable acknowledgement for the com
pliment thus received.
Salutes.
236. The President ofthe United States is to receive a
salute oftwenty-one guns; the national salute is de
termined by the number of States in the Union, at
the rate of one gun for each State.
237. The vice-president will be saluted with seven
teen guns; the heads of the executive department of
the general government, the general commanding in
chief, governors of states and territories within their
respective jurisdictions, fifteen guns.
238. A major -general, thirteen guns, a brigadier
general, eleven guns.
239. A general officer will be saluted but once in a
year at each post, and only when notice of his inten
tion to visit the post has been received; salutes to in
dividuals are to be fixed on their arrival only.
240. A national salute will be fired at meridian, on
the anniversary of the Independance of the United
States, at each military post or camp.
Funeral Honors.
241. On the receipt of official intelligence of the
death ofthe President of the United States, at any post
or station, the commanding officer shall, on the fol
lowing day, cause a gun to be fired at every half
hour, beginning at sunrise andending at sunset.
242. On the day of the interment of a major-general
commandingin chief, a gun will be fired at ever half
hour until the procession moves, beginning at sun
rise.
243. The funeral escort of the general-in-chief shall
consist of a regiment of infantry, a battalion of cav
alry and six pieces of artillery; that of a major-general,
a regiment of infantry, a battalion of cavalry and
four pieces of artillery; that of a brigadier-general, a
regiment of infantry, one company of cavalry, and
two pieces of artillery; that of a colonel, a regiment;
that of a lieutenant- colonel, five companies; that of a
major, two companies; that of a captain, one company
and that of a lieutenant half a company.
244. The funeral escort should always be command
ed by an officer of the same rank with the deceased,
but if none such are present, by one of the next in
ferior grade.
245. The escort will be formed in two ranks opposite
to the quarters or tent of the deceased, with shoul
!
185.

Ր
 REGULATIONS. 185
dered arms and bayonets fixed, the artillery and
cavalry on the right of the infantry.
216. On the appearance of the corpse, the officer in
charge of the escort will command: present-ARMS,
when the honors due the deceased will be paid by
the drums and trumpets.
247. The music will then play and the coffin will be
taken to the right and halted, the commanding offi
cer will next add: Shoulder- ARMS. By company (or
platoon) left wheel, MARCH. Column forward, guide right,
MARCH.
248. The column will then be marched in common
time to appropriate music, and on reaching the
ground, will take a direction so that the guides shall
be next to the grave, and when the centre of the
column is abreast with it, the commander will add:
Column-HALT. Right into line wheel, MARCH.
249. The coffin will then be brought along the front,
and the officer will cause arms to be presented, after
which, he will add: Shoulder- ARMS. Order-ARMS.
Parade-REST.
250. After the coffin is lowered into the grave the
officer will command: Attention. Shoulder--ARMS.
Load at will, LOAD, when three rounds of small arms
will be fired by the escort, taking care to elevate their
pieces.
251. This being done he will add: Shoulder-ARMS.
By company (or platoon) right wheel, MARCH. Column
forward, guide right, MARCH, the music observing not
to play until the escort has cleared the enclosure or
burying ground.
Order ofencampment for infantry.
252. Troops are on all occasions, where the nature of
the ground will permit, encamped in the order of bat
tle, in order that the front of the camp will only oc
cupy the same extent of ground that the troops will,
when drawn up into line.
253. The battalions will encamp in streets perpen
dicular to the line, one-halfthe tents (one company)
on each side of the streets facing inwards.
254. The width of the streets will depend on the
strength of the battalions; the distance between each
tent of the same company will be four feet, that be
tween the tents of each battalion , six feet.
255. The regiment being drawn up in line in front of
the ground it is to occupy when in camp, the colonel
will cause it to break by the left of companies to the
rear into column, and after moving twice their length
they will be halted, faced to the front, by the chiefs of
companies and aligned by the right, the guides cover
186 REGULATIONS . !
ingaccurately; in this position presentinga column by
company left in front, arms will be stacked, and tents
pitched.
256. The tents ofthe right companies in each battal
ion will be pitched in their rear, the first on the pro
longation of the line of right guides; those of the left
companies immediately in their front, the first on the
line of right guides and facing the tents of the right
company in their respective battalions.
257. The tents of all the captains will be placed six
paces from the left flank of their respective companies
and on the prolongation of the line ofcompany tents,
each facing the street passing through his respective
battalion; the majors will place their tents ten paces
from that of the captain of their right company and
on the same line, ali facing to the left, their adjutants
will pitch their tents a like distance from the captain
of their left companies, on the same line and facing
to the right.
258. The colonel's tent faced to the front, in the cen
tre of the centre street and ten paces in rear ofthe
line of majors' tents; the lieutenant-colonel's on the
same line, faced to the front and in the centre ofthe
street next on the right; the aide-de- camp's on the
same line and in centre of the street next on the left;
the commissary on the right in centre of first street,
and thesurgeon on the left in centre of fifth street, all
on the same line and faced to the front.
259. The baggage wagons will be drawn up in line
ten paces in rear of the colonel's tent and horses pic
keted in their rear.
260. The camp "guard quarters" will be stationed
about two hundred paces in front, and on the prolon
gation ofthe centre street.
261. Companies will parade for inspection , roll call,
&c., in the precise order indicated in No. 255, and in
front of their respective tents, from which position
the regiment may be formed instanter by each com
pany facing right, and moving forward into line on
the regimental parade.
Muster Rolls.
262. The muster roll of a cowpany will contain the
name of every officer, musician and private in the
company, beginning wit the captain, 1st lieutenant
and musicians; after which the name of the 2d lieu
tenant, his sergeant and the men composing the first
platoon will follow, next the officer, sergeant and
men of2d platoon; and thus from right to left;opposite
each name insert in the proper columns the kind and
amount ofarms, amunition, accoutrements and foot
 REGULATIONS. 187
up the same on the bottom of the report, making a
grand total of each kind.
263. The muster roll of a battalion will contain only
the names of the major, his adjutant and the captain
of each company; opposite the name of each captain
insert the letter of his company, the number of offi
cers, musicians and privates, and the total amount
and kind of arms, amunition, &c., in his respective
company in the proper columns.
264. Regimental returns will contain the name of the
colonel and entire staff in their proper order, and the
names of the majors of battalions; opposite the names
of majors will be inserted the strength oftheir respec
tive commands, including arms, accoutrements, &c.
265. All muster rolls should be footed up at the bot
tom, showing the grand total, dated, giving the name
of post or station, and signed by the commandant
a nd adjutant.
C.
A.
.

Date.
| Captains.
Name

| 1st Lieutenants.
Station

| 2d Lieutenants.
|Sergeants.
| Musicians.
.

| Privates.
For

Commissioned officers.
Duty
by

| Non-Commis'd officers.
| Musicians.
.

| Privates.
Captain

.
| Commissioned officers.
Sick

1st
Commanded
of

Non-Commis'd officers.
| Musicians.
.

Lieutena
| Privates.
Company

nt
or
REPORT

Commissioned officers.
duty
MORNING

Non-Commis'd officers.
daily

| Musicians.
| Privates.
or

Total present.
con
In
on

Commissioned officers.
extra

| Non-Commis'd officers.

S)( igned
| Musicians.
'
.

| Privates.
| Commissioned officers.
arrest detac
finem'nt servi
Regiment

| Non-Commis'd officers.
h
ce

| Musicians.
Privates.

L.S.
.
.Furl'ghs
| Aggregate.

.
Total Abstract,

leave
L.

w'hout
Infan

Comman
Captain
,N. try
REGULATIONS. 188

ding
 REGULATIONS. 189

MUSTER ROLL of Company Battalion

Regiment Infantry Military District.
N. L., commanded by Capt. mustered in

Yaugers
A. D. 18 ·

revol'rs
City,

Colt's

Trumpets

Remarks
.powder
Muskets
Mustered

Guns
U.
S.
Shot
into ser

Swords
.

Drums
.
Where

Ibs
Whom
vice.
Name

When

Rifles

. ead
.
Rank

.
.
Fifes
lIbs
.

.
By
.
No.

.
.

Station,
(Signed)
W. B.
1st Lieutenant. A. B.
Capt. Commanding.
 No.
| Name.
| Rank.
| When Elected or Appointed.
| Date of Commission.
| Post or Station.
Letter of Company.
| Majors.
| Captains.
1st Lieutenants,
.of
the

| 2d Lieutenants.
H.
W.
.

| Sergeants.
ROLL

for

Musicians.
MUSTER

| Privates.
,
&

| Total.
C

and

.
Pri
Non
by
,

| Muskets.
vates
Coms'd
Officers
Coms'd

| Rifles .
Major
Legion
Nauvoo

| U.S. Yaugers.
Musicians
accounted

Adjutant
Battalio

| Shot Guns.
n
, ommanded

| Colt's Revolvers
| Lbs. of Powder.
| Lbs. of Lead.

)(Signed
| Swords.
Fifes.
in

| Drums.
,

| Trumpets.

W.W.
Mustered
Infantry
Regiment
,
A.D.

.
18
,

Major
.Remarks
District
190
Military
REGULATIONS .

Commanding
 No.
| Name.
| Rank.
When Elected or Appointed .
Date of Commission.
Post or Station.
,

1 Number of Battalion.
City

| Colonels.
| Lieut. Colonels.
Majors.
| Captains.
the

1st Lieutenants,
.
C

2d Lieutenants.
,by

for

1, 8

Sergeants.
of
,the
Legion

A.D.
Nauvoo

Musicians.
of
the

Privates.
&
a
ommanded

Regiment Total.
Offi
nd
Mcers
Non

Horses .
Headquarters
Privates
RETURNS

Saddles and Bridles.

accounted

Muskets.
, usicians
in
REGIMENTAL

Rifles.
Commissioned
Commissioned

U. S. Yaugers.
Mustered

Shot Guns.
Holsters.

)(Signed
Revolvers.
on
the

Lbs. Powder.
Lbs. Lead.

W.S
, .
Infantry
,Regiment

Swords.
Trumpets.
Fifes.
Drums.
,8
1A.D.
Remarks.

,A.)(o-C
dS.
M. reid
,

amp
.Col.
Adjutant
District
191 REGULATIONS.
Military

Commanding
 .Number
Men
of
192

for
drawn
days
of
.|No.

for
.|Rations
Flour
of
.|Rations
Meal
of
Bacon
| ations
R.of
Beef
.
Rations
Fresh
of
.
Pork
of
Rations

ably to the above.

Rice
of
.|Rations
Beans
of
.|Rations

(Signed)
Peas
of
.|Rations
days, commencing

Potatoes
of
.|Rations
Onions
Rations
.of
Salt
.of
|Rations
.
Soap
of
Rations

R.N.,
REGULATIONS.

Candles
.of
|Rations
.|Rations
Vinegar
of
PROVISION RETURN for Company

and ending

Coffee
R.of
| ations
.|Rations
Sugar
of
Regiment Infantry, Commanded by Capt.

Fruit
of
.|Rations
18

.
Remarks

Commanding Regiment.
The Commissary of Subsistence will issue agree
 ‫ܕ ܝ ܝܬܣ ܕܐ ܕ ܘ‬

CİAL wil weten KRUTA

722 srka vaja Pagpinsan

*

}
4
1
1
War 1208.65.2
Rifle and light infantry tactics;
Widener Library 006248653

3 2044 080 699 705